- 142.06 MB
- 2021-10-12 发布
- 1、本文档由用户上传，淘文库整理发布，可阅读全部内容。
- 2、本文档内容版权归属内容提供方，所产生的收益全部归内容提供方所有。如果您对本文有版权争议，请立即联系网站客服。
- 3、本文档由用户上传，本站不保证质量和数量令人满意，可能有诸多瑕疵，付费之前，请仔细阅读内容确认后进行付费下载。
- 网站客服QQ：403074932
全册全套优质课件
人教版
八
年级英语上册分单元课件
Unit1-
u
nit10
unit 1
人教版八年级英语上册单元全套课件
Where did you go on vacation?
To learn
the past simple tense.
To learn to talk about past events.
To learn to enjoy different kinds of activities, to enjoy life.
Objectives
Warming-up
We went on a vacation, vacation, vacation.
We went on a vacation.
And what do you think we saw?
And what do you think we saw?
And what do you think we saw?
Other people on vacation.
People on vacation.
People on vacation.
That’s the only thing we saw.
On vacation
go fishing
go to summer camp
visit museums
go hiking
go to the beach
go sightseeing
go to the mountains
Vacation
Activities
stay at home
Free talk
Where did you go on vacation?
Who did you go with?
Did you have a good time?
She
visited
the
USA
.
She
went
to
New
York
City.
Where did she go on
vacation?
Where did they go
on vacation?
They
went
to
the
museum
.
Where did you go on vacation?
I
went
to
the
Great
Wall
.
Group work
He
went
to
summer
camp
. /kæmp/
Where did he go on vacation?
露营地
,
阵营
Where did you go on vacation?
I
went to Beijing City.
They went to the mountains.
Where did they go on
vacation?
They
went to the beach.
Where did they go on
vacation?
Where did she go on
vacation?
She stayed at home.
He
visited
his grandparents.
Where did he go on
vacation?
1. stayed at home _____
2. went to New York City ___
3. visited my uncle ___
4. went to summer camp ____
5. went to the mountains ___
6. went to the beach ____
7. visited museums ___
Match the activities with the pictures [a-g].
1a
a
b
c
e
f
g
d
b
d
c
g
a
e
f
1. Tina
2. Xiang Hua
3. Sally
4. Bob
5. Tom
4
5
3
2
Listen and number the people in the picture [1-5].
1b
1
1c
Make conversations about the people in the picture.
A: Where did Tina go on vacation?
B: She went to the mountains.
Where did
Bob
go on vacation?
He visited his uncle.
Where did Tom go on vacation?
He went to summer camp.
Where did Sally go on vacation?
She stayed at home.
She went to New York City.
Where did Xiang Hua go on vacation?
Where did he go on vacation?
He went to the beach.
动词过去式 动词原形
went
stayed
visited
did
was
had
go
stay
visit
do
is
have
1. — Where did you go on vacation?
你去哪儿度假了？
— I
went to
the mountains.
我去了山区。
这是一个
特殊疑问句
。由
“
特殊疑问词＋助动词＋主语
＋动词原形
+
其他
?
”
构成
。
由于是询问已发生的动作
(
过去的事情
)
，所以助动词用
过去式
did
，其后的动词用原形。
Language Points
►
—Where did you go yesterday?
你昨天去了哪儿？
— I visited my friends.
我去拜访了朋友。
2. I
stayed
at
home
.
我待在家里。
1
）
stay
可以作及物动词，也可以作不及物动词
。
当
它
作不
及物动词时就不能直接接宾语，其后
接
相
应的介
词短
语，表地点
或
表状
态。
e.g.
stay
in the office
继续任职
(
掌权
)
stay
awake
不睡
(
醒着
)
stay
in the army
留在部队中
stay
at home
呆在家中
►
We’re
staying
in the same hotel.
我们住在同一家旅馆。
2)
home
与
house
,
family
的区别
home
指“家”这个概念，包括“住处”和“家人”。
house
则指“房子”、“住宅”，侧重于建筑结构。
family
则指“家庭成员”。
当
family
作整体概念时，谓语动词用
单数
；
看作一个个成员时，谓语动词用
复数
。
►
I watched TV at
home
last night.
我昨晚在家里看电视。
►
This
house
is very beautiful.
这房子真漂亮。
►
My
family
is
a small but happy one.
我家人不多但很幸福。
►
My
family
are
watching TV.
我的家人在看电视。
3. She
visited
her uncle.
①
句中
visit
是
及物动词，后直接跟宾语
，当其后接
表示人
的词语时译为 “
拜访
”。当其后接
表示地点
的名词时，译为“
参观
”。
e.g. visit the Summer Palace —
参观颐和园
②
visit
还可以作名词“拜访，参观”，构成短语
pay a visit to…/be on a visit to…
译为“访问（某人）”
“参观（某地）”
►
We
paid a visit to
our teacher yesterday.
我们昨天去拜访了我们的老师。
Ex:We are _____a visit _____our English teacher now.
A. on
；
on B. to
；
on
C. to
；
to D. on
；
to
1. My host family tried to cook ______ for
me when I studied in
New Zealand.
A. different something B. different anything
C. something different D. anything different
2. The man has ______ friends in this city, so he often stays at
home.
A. a few B. few C. little D. a little
C
B
I.
单项选择。
Exercises
Lucy did her homework yesterday evening. (
改为否定句
)
Lucy ______ __ _____ _________ yesterday evening.
I had lunch at my friend’s home. (
改为一般疑问句，并作肯定回答
)
—____ you ______ _____ at your friend’s home?
—______, ___ _____.
didn’t do her homework
Did have lunch
Yes I did
II.
根据要求改写下列句子。
3. Jim went
to the beach
last Sunday. (
对画线部分提问
)
_____ _____ Jim ______ last Sunday?
4. They played basketball
yesterday.
(
对画线部分提问
)
________ _______ they play basketball?
5. The students had great fun in the park. (
改为同义句
)
The students ____ __ __________ _____ in the park.
Where did go
When did
had a good/great time
1.
你假期去哪儿了？
2. —
你假期去什么有趣的地方了？
—
是的，我跟我家人去了贵州。
Where did you go on vacation?
— Did you go anywhere interesting on vacation?
— Yes, I went to Guizhou with my family.
III.
汉译英。
中考链接
He went _________
（野营
) with us and taught us how to put up a tent.
camping
go camping
意为“去野营”。
Homework
Make a conversation about what you did last week.
Master the words in this unit and preview next part.
Section A 2a-2d
To learn
the past simple tense
.
To learn to talk about past events.
To enjoy the beautiful scenery,to enjoy our beautiful life.
Objectives
Words review
anyone
few
quite a few
most
pron
.
任何人
adj
. &
pron
.
不多；很少
相当多；不少
adj
.,
adv
. &
pron
.
最多；大多数
few
quite a few
anywhere
most
wonderful
anyone
Quick eye
Review:The rules of the past form
play
ed
work
ed
want
ed
need
ed
2
decide
d
live
d
improve
d
3
carry- carr
ied
study- stud
ied
worry- worr
ied
5
go-
went
have-
had
see-
saw
eat-
ate
buy–
bought
take-
took
win-
won
hang-
hung
4
stop- stop
ped
shop- shop
ped
plan- plan
ned
Where did you go on vacation?
I went to ...
Pair work
Where did you
go on vacation?
I ...
stayed at home
went to New York City
visited my uncle
went to summer camp
went to the mountains
went to the beach
visited museums
go fishing
go to summer camp
visit museums
go hiking
go to the beach
go sightseeing
go to the mountains
Vacation
Activities
stay at home
Central park
中央公园位于美国纽约中心的曼哈顿地区，
是纽约最大的都市公园，四季皆有不同美
景，独享纽约“后花园”之美称。它不仅
是纽约市民心目中的休闲胜地，也是世界
各地游客向往的著名公园。
Do you know?
Listen. Where did the people go on
vacation? Complete the chart.
People
places
Grace
Kevin
Julie
New York City
the beach
at home
2a
Listen again. Check ( )
Yes, I did
or
No, I didn’t
for each question.
Did you…
Yes, I did.
No, I didn’t.
Grace
go with anyone?
go to Central
Park?
buy anything special?
2b
Did you…
Yes, I did
No, I didn’t.
Kevin
play volleyball?
swim?
meet anyone interesting?
Julie
do anything interesting?
study for tests?
go out with anyone?
Complete the sentences using the information in 2b.
1.Grace _____to New York City with his mother.He thought Central Park _____ really nice. He also ______ a hat for his father.
2.Kevin_____ to the beach. He ___________volleyball but ______there.
He thought the food __________really good. He also ______ some very interesting people.
3.Julie didn't go out with anyone. He just ______at home and ________for the test.
went
was
bought
went
didn’t play
swim
was/tasted
met
stayed
studied
A:
Grace, where
did
you
go
on vacation?
B:
I
went
to New York City.
A:
Oh, really?
Did
you
go
with anyone?
B:
Yes, I
went
with my mother.
Role-play conversations between Grace, Kevin and Julie.
2c
Grace:
Where
did
you
go
on vacation?
Julie:
I
went
to Huangshan.
Grace:
Oh, really?
Did
you
go
with anyone?
Julie:
Yes, I
went
with my friends. We
were
very
happy.
Grace
Julie
Listen and answer the questions.
Q1 : Where did Helen go
on
vacation
last month?
Q2 : What did
Helen do there?
She went to Guizhou with her family.
She saw Huangguoshu Waterfall and took quite a few photos.
Role-play the conversation.
2d
Rick: Hi, Helen. Long time no see.
Helen: Hi, Rick. Yes, I was on
vacation last month.
Rick: Oh, did you go anywhere
interesting?
Helen: Yes, I went to Guizhou with
my family.
Rick: Wow! Did you see Huangguoshu Waterfall?
Helen: Yes, I did. It was wonderful! We took quite
a few photos there. What about you? Did
you do anything special last month?
Rick: Not really. I just stayed at home most of the
time to read and relax.
Helen was on vacation last month. She _____
__
to Guizhou with her family and ____ Huangguoshu Waterfall. It was __________.
She took ___________ photos there. Rick didn’t do _________ special last month. He just ______________
___
most of the time to read and relax.
went
saw
wonderful
quite a few
anything
stayed at home
Fill in the blanks According to the conversation.
1. —
Did you
go to Central Park?
你去中心公园了吗？
—
Yes, I did
.
是的，去了。
这是一个
一般疑问句
，由助动词提问，回答也用助
动词。由于询问的是发生在过去的事，所以助动词用
过去式
did
。一般过去时的一般疑问句的句子结构：
Did
＋主语＋动词原形＋其它
?
Language Points
回答
:
Yes,
主
+did. / No,
主
+didn’t.
在过去时态中
,
无论主语是第几人称，是单数
还是复数，助动词一律用
did
。
e.g. —
Did
you/he/she/they go to the park last night?
—Yes, I/he/she/they
did
.
—No,
I/he/she/they
didn’t
.
2. Did you buy
anything special
?
在英语中，
anything, something, nothing
和
everything
是用于指代
事物
的复合不定代词，与之相对应的复合不定代词
anyone, someone, no one
和
everyone ( anybody, somebody, nobody
和
everybody)
用于
指人
。
与形容词连用时
,
形容词
必须放在
复合不定代词之后
，语法上称作“后置”。
e.g. something important——
重要的事
I can see
someone new
in your group.
我看出你们小组里有新人。
There’s
nothing interesting
in the news today.
今天的新闻里没有什么有趣的新闻。
3. I
was on vacation
last month.
be on vacation
译为 “在度假”，
强调状态
。
而
go to vacation
,
“去度假
”
，
强调动作
。
我们应该如何区分英语中强调动作和状态的词语：
1
）一般来说，单独的动词
/
短语一般强调动作；而“
be +
分词
/
形容词”则只表状态。如
marry sb.
和
get married to sb.
表动作，而
be married to sb.
表状态。
2
）如果动词是延续性动词，则一般它既可表示
动作， 也可以表示状态。
e.g. live/stay/work…
3
）如果是单独的瞬间性动词，则它只表示动作。
e.g. get up/put on/begin…
4.
We took
quite a few
photos there.
此句中
quite a few
是一个整体结构，表示“相当多”， 修饰可数名词，不能与
a few(
少数几个
)
混淆。
比较下面例句中
quite a few
和
a few
的区别：
e.g. There are only a few books on the table, but I still have quite a few in the bookcase.
虽然桌上只有几本书，但我的书柜里还有很多书。
quite a few
相当多的
；
不少的
相当于
many
，修饰
可数名词复数。
quite a little
许多的
，
相当多的
相当于
much
，修饰
不可数名词。
quite a few
与
quite a little
5. Did you buy
anything
special?
复合不定代词分为：
指物：
anything, something, nothing, everything
指人
：
anyone, someone, no one, everyone/ anybody, somebody, nobody, everybody
“
后置”：
复合不定代词
+
adj
.
e.g.
I can see
someone new
in your group.
复合不定代词
adj
.
+
—
Where did
you go on vacation?
— I went to New York City.
—
Did
you go out with anyone?
— No. No one was here. Everyone
was
on vacation.
—
Did
you buy anything
special?
— Yes, I
bought
something for my father.
— No, I
bought
nothing.
Summary
I.
写出下列动词的过去时
。
stay_________ do_________
stop_________ play_________
is_________ go___________
buy_______ have _______
use_________ visit_________
are_________ study_________
stayed
played
was
did
used
bought
had
went
visited
studied
were
stopped
Exercises
II.
根据句意及首字母提示填写单词。
1. He didn’t find a____
__
__ in the
bag
.
The
bag
is
empty.
2
.
The movie is very w___
___
___
,
and I like it very
much.
3
.
They want to _______________(
某地
) warm. It’s
too cold here.
nything
onderful
go somewhere
III.
按要求完成句子。
1. I went somewhere interesting.
（改为否定句）
I_______ ____ _____________ interesting.
2. She bought something for her father.
（改为一般疑问句）
_______ she _________ __________ for her father?
3. We
fed some hens
last night. (
对
画
线部分提问
)
________ _______ you ________ last night?
4. bought, something, I, special, last vacation (
连词成句
)
______________________________________________.
didn’t go anywhere
Did
buy anything
What did
do
I bought something special last vacation
Ⅳ.
翻译句子。
1.
你假期去哪儿了？
2. —
你假期去什么有趣的地方了吗？
—
是的，我跟我家人去了山西。
Where did you go on vacation?
—Did you go anywhere interesting on vacation?
—Yes, I went to Shanxi with my family.
3.
今天的新闻里没有什么有趣的内容。
4. —
汤姆假期去哪儿玩了？
—
他去爬山了。
—Where did Tom go on vacation?
—He went to the mountains.
There’s nothing interesting in the news today.
中考链接
— Helen, did you do ______ last weekend?
— Yes, I visited my grandparents in the countryside.
A. anything special
B. something special
C. special anything
“特别的事情”，
不定代词的修饰语要后置，疑问句用
anything
。
A
Talk about your vacation with your
partner.
2. Preview the new words and phrases.
3. Preview the conversation in 3a and the
e-mail message in 3b.
Homework
Section A Grammar Focus-3c
Objectives
To practice the usage of
anyone, someone,
everyone,
anything, something, everything
and
nothing.
To learn new
words:
myself
, yourself, hen,
pig
, seem, bored, someone, diary…
To sum up
t
he simple past
tense.
Where did you go on your vacation?
Did you go to the zoo?
Were there any…?
What else did you do?
…
Let’s talk!
Where did you go on vacation?
I went to New York City
.
Did you go out with
anyone
?
No, no one was here.
Everyone
was on vacation.
Did you buy
anything
special?
Yes, I bought something for my father.
How was the food?
No, I bought
nothing
.
Did
everyone
have a good time?
Oh, yes.
Everything
was excellent.
Grammar Focus
1.
你去了什么地方去度假？
______ _____ you go on ________?
2.
我去了纽约市。
I _____ ____ New York City.
3.
你和别的什么人一起去的吗？
______ ______ go out with _______?
vacation
Where did
went to
Did you
anyone
认真读并观察
Grammar focus
内容，完成下列句子并试着总结一般过去时态的用法。
4.
不，没有别人在这儿。每个人都在度假。
No. ____ _____ was here.
________ was on ________.
5.
你买了什么特别的东西了吗？
_____ you buy ________ _______?
6.
是的，我为我爸爸买了些东西。
Yes, I _______ _________ for my father.
7.
不，我没有买什么东西。
No, I _______ _________.
No one
Everyone
vacation
anything special
Did
bought something
bought nothing
8.
吃的怎么样？
____ ____ the food?
9.
所有的东西尝起来都很好。
__________ _______ really good.
10.
每个人都玩得很开心吗？
_____ ________ have a good time?
11.
哦，是的。一切都很棒。
Oh, yes. ____________ was excellent.
How was
Everything tasted
Did everyone
Everything
The simple past tense
一般过去时
1.
定义
:
1)
表示过去某个时间发生的动作或存在的状态
，
常和表示过去的
时间状语
(
如
yesterday, last night, in 1990,
two days ago...)
连用；
2)
也
表示过去经常或反复发生的动作
，常和表示
频度的
时间状语
(
如
often, always…)
连用。
一般过去时
有哪些时间状语可以用来描述过去？
一般过去时常与表示过去的时间状语或从句连用
。
a
）时间状语
ago
（
two hours ago
（一段时间
+ago
）
yesterday
（句子开头或结尾）
the day before yesterday
last week, last (year, night, month…)
具体时间（
如
Jan. fourth
)
just now
at the age of
one day
long ago
once upon a time
（很久以前）
and so on
this morning
long long ago
Sentences
I
did
my homework
yesterday.
I play
ed
soccer
last Sunday
.
I clean
ed
my room
last week.
I
went
to the beach
three years ago.
I play
ed
tennis with my friends
last weekend.
I
went
to the movies
three days ago.
注
：“过去”的概念并不是只指如“
yesterday, last week,…
”等，实际上“
与现在对立的过去
”，亦即“
非现在的以前
”，哪怕是“过了说话时间的几分钟之前”，只要所要表达的时间与说话时的“现在”形成对立，就必须使用一般过去时来表达。在谈到已死去的人的情况时，多用过去时。
e.g. He was here only
a few minutes ago
.
仅仅几分钟前他还在这里。
I came home
just now
.
我刚回到家。
I got up very early
this morning
.
今天早晨我起床很早。
He was late for school again
today
.
今天他又迟到了。
a
）动词变化规则
规则变化
:
1.
直接加
ed
：
work— work
ed
look—look
ed
play—play
ed
2.
以
e
结尾的单词，直接加
d
：
live —live
d
hope—hope
d
use——use
d
3.
以辅音字母
+y
结尾的，变
y
为
i
加
ed
：
study—— stud
ied
carry——carr
ied
worry——worr
ied
4.
以元音字母
+y
结尾的，直接加
ed
：
enjoy ——enjoy
ed
play——play
ed
5.
以重读闭音节结尾的，双写最后的辅音
字母
+ed
：
stop—— stop
ped
plan——plan
ned
规则动词过去式词尾
-ed
的读音
读音规则
读 音
例 词
在浊辅音和元音后面
/d/
moved /mu:vd/
在浊辅音和元音后面
/t/
passed /pa:st/
在清辅音后面
/id/
needed /’ni:did/
am, is—
was
are—
were
go—
went
do—
did
have—
had
come—
came
take—
took
say—
said
eat—
ate
see—
saw
get—
got
put—
put
sleep—
slept
give—
gave
write—
wrote
read—
read
b
）
动词不规则变化
/red/
buy—
bought
sit—
sat
run—
ran
swim
—
swam
make—
made
feel—
felt
hear—
heard
grow—
grew
tell—
told
know—
knew
find—
found
begin—
began
bring
—
brought
stand—
stood
spend—
spent
catch—
caught
teach—
taught
动词不规则变化
基本结构
：
be
动词的过去
式
Present
Past
am
was
is
was
are
were
单数
复数
I
was
we
were
you
were
(一個人)
you
were
(不只一人)
she
was
they
were
he
was
it
was
肯定句：主语
+was (were) +
其它
.
e.g. I was late yesterday.
昨天我迟到了。
否定句：主语
+was (were) +not+
其它
.
e.g. We weren’t late yesterday.
我们昨天没迟到。
Be
动词的一般过去时态构成：
疑问句：
Was (Were) +
主语
+
其它
?
e.g. Were you ill yesterday?
你昨天病了吗？
肯定回答：
Yes, I was.
是的，我病了。
否定句：
No, I wasn’t.
不，我没病。
特殊疑问句： 特殊疑问词
+was (were) +
主语
+
其它
?
e.g. When were you born?
你是什么时候出生的？
A
:
How
your
vacation
, Lin?
B:
It
pretty good.
A:
How
the
beach
es
?
B:
They
great.
A:
How
the
weather
?
B:
It
hot and wet.
A:
How
the
people
?
B:
They
un
friendly.
A:How
the
store
s
?
B:
They
expensive
.
was
was
were
were
was
was
were
were
were
were
Be— am/is(was)
are(were)
Be
填空
肯定句
要使用动词的
过去式
，
否定句和疑问句
要使用助动词
do
和
does
的过去式
did
。
肯定句：主语
+
动词过去式
+
其它
.
e.g. I went home at nine o’clock yesterday.
我昨天九点钟回的家。
否定句：主语
+didn’t +
动词原形
+
其它
.
e.g. I didn’t go home yesterday.
我昨天没回家。
实义动词的一般过去时态
疑问句：
Did +
主语
+
动词原形
+
其它
.
e.g. Did you go home yesterday?
你昨天回家了吗？
肯定回答：
Yes, I did.
是的，我回了。
否定回答：
No, I didn’t.
不，我没回家。
一般过去式的构成形式
肯定式
疑问式
否定式
I worked
Did I work
I did not work
He /She/It worked
Did
he /she/it work
He /She/It did not work
We worked
Did we work
We did not work
You worked
Did you work
You did not work
They worked
Did they work
They did not work
动词一般过去时，表示过去发生的事；
be
用
was
或用
were
, have, has
变
had
；
谓语动词过去式，过去时间作标志；
一般动词加
-
ed
，若是特殊得硬记。
否定句很简单，主语之后
didn’t
添；
疑问句也不难，
did
放在主语前；
如果谓语之前有
did
，谓语动词需还原；
动词若是
was, were,
否定就把
not
添。
易
记
歌
谣
Last summer, I ______to the beach with my parents.
My vacation _____pretty good . I ____there by bus
_____my bus trip______ relaxing. The beach ______
very beautiful . It _______sunny. I _________ beach
volleyball and ______swimming. The people ______
friendly and the food was ________. I __________my
vacation very much and I _________to go there again.
went
was
went
and
was
was
was
were
delicious
enjoyed
hope
played
went
Write about your vacation and give a report.
某人
某事
任何人
任何事
没有人
没有东西
每人
一切
someone
anyone
no one
everyone
somebody
anybody
nobody
everybody
something
anything
nothing
everything
复合不定代词小结：
1. some, any, no, every
与
-one, -thing
，
-body
可以
组成复合不定代词，他们分别是：
2.
复合不定代词用法
(
1)
some
系列的
不定代词和
some
一样主要用于
肯
定
句
；
any
系列
的不定代词和
any
一样主要用于
否
定
或疑问句
。如：
There is ___________ wrong with my bike.
我的自行车出毛病了。
I can’t see _______in the classroom.
在教室里我没看见任何人。
something
anyone
不过，在表示
请求、建议或征求意见的疑问句中
常用
some
系列的词
。
eg. Would you like ___________to drink?
你想要一些喝的东西吗？
在表达“
任何
”这一含义的肯定句中也要用
any
系列的词
。
eg. I think__________ can do it.
我认为任何人都会做。
anyone
something
(2)
修饰复合不定代词
something, anyone
等的
adj,adv,to do
不定式等
要放在不定代词的后面。如：
Did you meet __________________?
你遇见有趣的人了吗？
I have ________ to do today.
我今天没什么事可做。
There’s __________________ in the newspaper today.
今天的报纸里有一些重要的内容。
anyone interesting
nothing
something important
(4) no
系列的不定代词可与
not...any
系列
的不定代词替换。
eg.
I bought nothing.= I______buy ___________.
我什么也没买。
didn't
anything
(3)
这些不定代词作主语时看作单数，谓语动词用
单数形式。
eg. Everyone ______ on vacation last weekends.
上周末
所有的人都在度假。
was
Linda: Did you do___________ fun on your vacation,
Alice?
Alice: Yes, I did. I went to Sanya.
Linda: How did you like it?
Alice: Well, it was my first time there, so
___________
was really interesting.
Fill in the blanks with the words in the box and practice the conversation.
anything
everything
3a
anyone something anything everything nothing
Linda: Did you go with__________?
Alice: Yes, I did. I went with my sister.
Linda: Did you go shopping?
Alice: Of course! I bought__________ for my
parents
, but _________for myself.
Linda: Why didn
’
t you buy__________ for yourself?
Alice: I didn
’
t really see ____________I liked.
anyone
something
nothing
anything
anything
Dear Bill,
How was your vacation? Did you do ________
interesting? Did________ in the family go with you? I went to a friend’s farm in the countryside with my family. __________was great.
anything everything nothing everyone no one
Fill in the blanks in the e-mail message with the words in the box.
anything
everyone
Everything
3b
We fed some hens and saw some baby pigs. They were so cute! The only problem was that there was __________ much to do in the evening but read. Still __________ seemed to be bored. Bye for now!
Mark
nothing
no one
Did you…
Everyone
Someone(write the classmates’
name )
No one
eat a
nything
at a restaurant?
read anything interesting?
visit anyone in your family?
buy anything?
keep a diary?
Ask your group questions about their last
vacation. Then tell the class your results.
In our group, everyone ate something at a restaurant
...
3c
2.anyone, someone, everyone, no one, anything,
something, everything
，
nothing
等复合不定代词
的用法。
Summary
1.
一般过去时态的构成、用法，
动词过去式的构成规则。
1.get
—
2.say
—
3.have
—
4.be—
5.tell
—
6.think
—
7.write
—
8.drive
—
9.run
—
10.read
—
I.
写出下列单词的过去式。
got
said
had
was, were
told
thought
wrote
drove
ran
read
Exercises
11. see— 12. stand
—
13. put
—
14. eat
—
15. buy
—
16. drink
—
17. sleep
—
18. come
—
19. play
—
20. study
—
21. listen
—
saw
stood
put
ate
bought
drank
slept
came
played
studied
listened
II.
用所给动词的适当形式填空。
We ______ (live) in Japan last year.
Jack________ (stop) the car last Sunday.
Tom _______ (clean) his room and ________ (study) for the Chinese test last weekend.
4.What ______ you ______(do) last night?
5.On Sunday morning I
_______
(play) tennis.
lived
stopped
cleaned
studied
did
do
played
III.
句型转换。
Lucy did her homework at home.
（改否定句）
2. He found some meat in the fridge(
冰箱
).
（变一般疑问句
)
3. She stayed there
for a week
.
（画线部分提问）
Lucy didn’t do her homework at home.
Did he find any meat in the fridge?
How long did she stay there?
4. She went to the beach last Sunday.
(
变一般疑问句
)
5.They stayed
at home
on vacation.(
就画线部分提问
)
Did she go to the beach last Sunday?
Where did they stay on vacation?
6. The weather was hot and humid. (
变否定句
)
7. Nancy went to the cinema last night. (
改为同义句
)
8. The people in New York were
friendly
.
(
就画线部分提问
)
The weather wasn’t hot or humid.
Nancy went to see a film last night.
How were the people in New York?
Ⅳ.
汉
译英。
1.
最近每个人都很忙。
2.—
你假期做什么有趣的事了吗？
—
是的。 我去北京了。
Everyone is very busy these days.
—Did you do anything fun on your vacation?
—Yes, I did. I went to Beijing.
3.
你假期过得怎么样？
How was your vacation?
4.
晚上没有什么事可做，只好看书。
There was nothing much to do in the evening
but reading.
5.
我给我父母买了一些礼物，却没给自己买。
I bought some gifts for my parents, but nothing
for myself.
中考链接
Learning is a lifelong journey because we can learn _______ every day.
A. nothing
new
B
. new something
C. something
new
“每天学习新的东西”，肯定句用
something
，修饰语放在不定代词后面。
C
Almost
______ in
our group has been to the 2nd Digital China Summit. It’s fantastic.
A. someone
B
. everyone
C
. anyone
“
我们
组几乎每个人都去过第二届数字中国建筑峰会”，肯定句用
everyone
。
B
Homework
1. Write about your vacation in your
exercise book.
2. Preview the next part.
Section B 1a-1e
Objectives
To listen about Lisa’s vacation.
To learn to ask and answer questions about Lisa’s vacation.
To try to write a short passage
about Lisa’s vacation.
Warming-up
Where did you go on vacation?
What did you do?
Where do you want to go? Why?
Where did
she
go
on vacation?
She
stayed
at home.
Presentation
Did
she
do
anything
interesting
?
No, she didn’t.
How
was
her vacation?
It was
boring
.
It was
hot
.
How
was
the weather?
How
was
his vacation?
It was
exciting
.
They were
friendly
.
How
were
the people?
不友好的
unfriendly
Where did
they
go
on vacation?
They
went
to summer camp.
Did
they do
anything interesting
?
Yes, they did.
Where did
they
go
on vacation?
They
went
to the beach.
Did
they see
anything beautiful
?
Yes, they did.
good
bad
terrible
delicious
exciting
interesting
...
...
Brainstorm
Use description words to describe about trips of vacation.
friendly
cheap
unfriendly
expensive
boring
tired
How
the weather?
the park?
the people?
the food?
…
the stores?
the vacation?
It was
They were
exciting
.
great
.
hot and wet.
expensive.
unfriendly
.
boring
.
terrible
.
…
were
was
About vacation
B: It
was
delicious
.
A: How
was
the
hamburger?
A: How
were
the
strawberries?
B: They
were
delicious
.
A: How
was
the
apple?
B: It
was
terrible
.
﹩300,000
expensive(
昂贵的
)
How was the car last year?
How were the T-shirts last year?
cheap
expensive
15RMB
200RMB
RMB100,000,000
fantastic
expensive
How was the bus trip?
It
was
relaxing.
Lisa went to Hong Kong with her family. What does Hong Kong look like? Let’s have a look!
Look and say
How was _________?
It
tastes
__________.
food
the food
delicious
How was _________?
It was __________.
store
the store
expensive
_____ was __________?
It was __________.
fun park
the fun park
exciting
How
_______________?
______________.
cake
It was terrible
How was the cake
1. __ delicious 2. __ expensive
3. __ exciting 4. __ cheap
5. __ terrible 6. __ boring
f
a
c
e
b
d
Match the words with the pictures below.
1a
words
words
Look at the words in 1a again.
Write
words on the left.
Write
words on the right.
exciting
cheap
boring
expensive
delicious
terrible
1b
Where did Lisa go on vacation?
_________________________
2. Did she do anything special there?
What was it?
________________________
Listen. Lisa is talking about her vacation. Answer the questions.
She went to Hong Kong.
Yes, she went to a fun park.
1c
3. Did she buy anything for her best friend?
____________________
4. Did Lisa like her vacation?
____________________
Yes, she did.
Yes, she did.
What did Lisa say about…?
her vacation ______
the fun park ________
the stores __________
the people ________
the food __________
Listen again. Fill in the blanks.
great
exciting
expensive
friendly
delicious
1d
Ask and answer questions about Lisa’s vacation. Begin your questions with the following words.
• Where did ... ?
• What did ... ?
• Did she ... ?
• How was ... ?
• How were ... ?
1e
Write
a short passage about Lisa's
vacation.
Lisa had a great vacation. She_____________________________
(
和她的家人去了香港
).She did__________________(
一些特殊的事情
)there. She________a fun park. It was_____________.She also _____________(
去购物了
).Though the things in the store
______________(
很贵
),she _____________________________
(
为她最好的朋友买了一些东西）
.Lisa thought people there ______________(
友好）
and the food there _____________(
美味
).Everyone ______________________(
玩的开心
).Everything was excellent.
went to Hong Kong with her family
something special
went to
really exciting
went shopping
were expensive
bought something for her best friend
were friendly
was delicious
had a good time
I.
填空。
1. The food isn’t d_______, it’s t_______.
2. Let’s d______ the difficult questions.
3. The book isn’t cheap. It’s e________.
4. They went to C______ Park last Sunday.
5. I enjoy r______ the book.
elicious
errible
iscuss
xpensive
entral
eading
Exercises
II.
用所给词的适当形式
填空
。
1. It _______ (rain) yesterday.
2. Jim ______ (go) to the library this morning.
3. Lily _______ (help) me ___(do) my homework.
4. Lily __________ (buy) a bike last week.
rained
went
helped
do
bought
III.
汉译英。
1.
上次放假，我去香港了。那儿的衣服很贵。
Last vacation, I went to Hong Kong. The clothes there were very expensive.
2.
那儿的人们很友好。
The people there were very friendly.
Lily: Joy, _____ was your vacation?
Joy: I had a good time.
Lily: _______ _____ you go on vacation?
Joy: I _____ to Hainan Island.
Lily: _____ was the weather
？
Joy: It was not hot ____ cold. There were long beaches.
Lily: How _____ the beaches?
Joy: They _____ fantastic.
Lily: I want ____ go to Hainan Island.
How
Where did
went
How
or
were
were
to
Ⅳ.
补全对话
,
每空一词。
1. Listen to 1d after class.
2. Write a diary about what you did on
your vacation.
Homework
Section B 2a-2e
Objectives
To read Jane’s diary to learn about her vacation.
To learn to retell the diary.
To keep an English diary to improve our
English ability.
Where did you go on vacation?
Did you go out with anyone?
How was the food and weather?
Did you buy any gifts?
Make your own conversations.
I had a summer vacation. Do you want to know where I went and what I did?
Penang
Where did you go on vacation?
I went to Penang.
Did you go out with anyone?
Yes, I went there with my parents.
How was the food and weather?
The food tastes delicious but it was so hot.
Did you buy any gifts?
Yes, I bought gifts for my grandparents.
What do you think of paragliding, yellow noodles and Weld Qucy?
Jane had a good time in Penang, too. Now let’s read her diary to know something about this beautiful place.
1.What do people usually do on vacation?
2.What activities do you find enjoyable?
Discuss the questions with your partner.
2a
Read Jane’s diary entries about her vacation and answer the questions.
Did Jane have a good time on Monday? What about on Tuesday?
Jane had a good time on Monday, but she had a bad time on Tuesday.
2b
Monday, July 15
th
I arrived in Penang in Malaysia this
morning with my family. It was sunny and
hot, so we
decided
to go to the beach near
our hotel. My sister and I
tried
paragliding
.
I
felt like
I was a
bird
. It was so exciting! For
lunch, we had
something very special
–
Malaysian yellow noodles. They were delicious!
In the afternoon, we
rode bicycles
to Georgetown. There are a lot of new
buildings
now, but many of the old buildings are still there. In Weld Quay, a really old place in Georgetown, we saw the houses of the Chinese
traders
from 100 years ago. I
wonder
what life was like here
in the past. I really
enjoyed walking around the town.
Tuesday, July 16th
What a
difference
a day makes! My father and I decided to go to Penang Hill today. We wanted to walk up to the
top
, but then it
started raining
a little so we decided to take the train. We
waited
over an hour
for the train because there were
too many people
. When we got to the top, it was
raining really hard
.
We didn’t have
an umbrella
so we were
wet
and cold. It was terrible! And
because of
the bad weather, we couldn
’
t see anything
below
. My father didn
’
t bring
enough
money, so we only had one
bowl of rice and some fish. The
food tasted great because I was so
hungry
!
Read Jane’s diary entries again. Fill in the chart.
Things Jane did or saw
Did she like it? (Yes/No)
Why or Why not?
tried paragliding
They were delicious.
ate Malaysian yellow noodles
Yes
Yes
It was exciting.
2c
Things Jane did or saw
Did she like it? (Yes/No)
Why or Why not?
walked around Georgetown
went to Penang Hill
Shared/had one bowl of rice and some fish
It
tasted great because she was hungry.
Yes
No
She liked the old buildings there and wondered what life was like in the past.
many people; waited; rained; got wet and cold; couldn’t see anything…
Yes
Anna: Hi, Jane. Where did you go on vacation last week?
Jane: I ______ to Penang in ________.
Anna: Who _____ you go with?
Jane: I went with my ________.
Anna: What did you do?
Complete the conversation about Jane’s trip to Penang using the information in the diary entries.
went
Malaysia
family
did
2d
Jane: The weather was hot and _____ on Monday,
so we went _________ on the beach. Then
in the afternoon, we _____ bicycles to
Georgetown.
Anna: Sounds great!
Jane: Well, but the next day was not as good. My
_____ and I went to Penang Hill, but the
weather ____ really bad and rainy. We _____
rode
father
waited
sunny
was
paragliding
a long time for the train and we were _____
and cold because we forgot to bring an
________.
Anna: Oh, no!
Jane: And that’s not all! We also didn’t bring
_______ money, so we only had one bowl of
rice and some fish.
umbrella
enough
wet
Make a mind map of 2b, and retell the
diary according to the map in your group.
Thursday, July 18th
Today ___ (be) a beautiful day. My father and I ____ (go) to Penang Hill again, but this time we ______(walk) to the top. We ______ (start) at 9:30 a.m. and ____(see) lots of special Malaysian
Imagine Jane went to Penang Hill again and had a great day. Fill in the blanks in her diary entry with the correct forms of the verbs in brackets.
went
was
started
walked
saw
2e
flowers along the way. About one hour later, we _________ (stop) and _______ (drink) some tea. Then we ______ (walk) for another two hours before we _____ (get) to the top. I ______ (be) quite tired, but the city ______ (look) wonderful from the top of the hill!
drank
stopped
got
walked
was
looked
1.
What
a difference a day makes!
e.g.
What
a lovely day!
多么好的一天啊！
What
nice people they are!
他们是多么好的人呀！
这是一个感叹句。英语语法规定，强调名词时，句首用
what
。
Language Points
2. …so we
decided
to played tennis.
1)
decide to do sth.
决定干某事
e.g. They decided to go to Hainan on vacation.
I decided to go to Shandong for summer holiday.
2)
decide not to do sth.
决定不做某事
e.g. I decided not to go there for a holiday
again.
我决定再也不去那里度假了。
3. And
because of
the bad weather, we couldn’t see anything below.
因为这糟糕的天气，我们看不到（山）下任何东西。
(1)
此句中
because of
为副词，后接短语，它引导原因状语从句，而我们学过的“
because
”
是连词，其后接句子。
because
of
介词短语，“因为”，后接名词、代词、动名词或what从句等。
because
连词，“因为”，引导原因状语从句，表示直接、明确的原因或理由。
【
辨析
】because
与
because of
We couldn’t go out _____________ the bad weather.
因为坏天气，我们不能出去。
He can’t play with his brother ________ he has class.
因为有课，他不能和哥哥一起玩。
because of
because
(2) below /b
ɪ
'lə
ʊ
/
prep.& adv.
在……下面；到……下面
Below
the mountain, thousands of visitors are walking up here.
（作介词）
山下
数以千计的
游客在往上爬。
Please look at the news
below
.
（作副词）
请看看下面的
新闻
。
【注意】
below
指的是物体在某物下方，但不一定是正下方，所指范围较宽。反义词是
above
。
【
辨析
】below/above; on/beneath, over/under
4.We waited
over an hour
for the train because there were
too many people
.
我们等了一个多小时火车因为人太多了
。
too many +pl.
“太多的
……
”
区分：
too much+U.
“太多的
……
”
much too+adj./ adv.
“太
……
”
(
加深程度）
ex.There are _________ people in the street.
He eats _________, so he becomes ___________fat.
Don't eat __________sugar.It's bad for your health.
too many
too much
much too
too much
5.My father didn
’
t bring enough money ...
我爸爸没带足够的钱
……
enough adj. adv. “
充足的（地），足够的（地）
”
用法规则：名前形副后
eg. The boy is
old enough
to go to school.
这个男孩足够大能去上学了。
We still have
enough time
to make this birthday cake look
beautiful enough
.
我们仍有足够的时间使这个蛋糕看起来足够漂亮。
I.
用所给词的适当形式填空。
1. There are many _____________ (different) in the two photos. Can you find them?
2. Lucy tried _________ (run) quickly and she did well.
3. It was so far from here to the museum. They decided _________ (go) there by bus.
4.
That was an____
____
____(enjoy) experience for me.
5.
I_______
____
_(wonderful) who can help us do that.
differences
to run
to go
enjoyable
wonder
Exercises
II.
汉译英。
1.
野营过得愉快吗？
2.
我们看不到下面的任何事物，因为天气太糟糕了。
Did you have fun camping?
We couldn’t see anything below because the weather was so bad.
3.
我们没带伞，所以被淋湿了，觉得特别冷。
We didn’t have an umbrella so we were wet
and cold.
4.
我想知道过去这儿的生活是什么样的。
I wonder what life was like here in the past.
—We shouldn't worryabout Mary.
—You are right. She is______to look after_____.
A. old enough; herself B big enough: herself
C. enough old; her D. enough big; her
中考链接
“她足够大可以照顾自己”。
enough
放在被修饰词后面。
A
1. Remember the words we have learnt
today.
2. Preview the next lesson.
Homework
Section B 3a-Self Check
To learn to talk about your holiday.
To learn to write a travel diary.
To use the Indefinite Pronouns and the verbs corectly.
Objectives
日记是中考各省市常考的题型。
记叙自己一天
生活中所看到、遇到、想到和做过的事情，
特别是
那些
具有教育意义或值得回忆
、
查阅或参考的事情
，也可以用来
抒发
自己当天对某些事件的
感受
，以及对
将来的打算
等。
日 记
1.
格式
：英文日记和中文日记的写法大致相同。一般是第一行写上日期、星期、天气状况。日期通常顶格写，后面是星期，天气状况写在右上角。表示天气情况的词一般用形容词，如：
fine, cold, rainy, windy, cloudy, sunny, snowy
，
foggy
等。正文部分另起一行。
2.
人称
：日记要用
第一人称
写。
3.
时态：
写日记的时间一般是在下午或晚上，有时也有在第二天补记的。所记叙的事情通常发生在过去，所以
常用一般过去时态
。但如果要记叙天气、描写景色、展望未来、议论某事或对话引语等，可以使用
一般现在时或一般将来时
，以生动再现当时的情景。
4.
日记的写作顺序：
日记一般要按照时间顺序或事情的经过来写。语言要清楚、自然，内容要连贯、完整。
Memory Game
记忆游戏
Did they ...?
went to the beach
stayed at home
went shopping
went to New York City
went to the mountains
went to a park
went fishing
went to
summer camp
visited museums
f
b
a
d
e
c
h
i
g
Complete the diary entry about a trip to one of these places. Use the words and phrases in the box to help you.
3a
hot and sunny tired
Beijing duck delicious
take some photos beautiful
buy something special interesting
learn something important August
Wednesday
, _______ 20th
Today the weather was _____________. I went to ______________. It was ________. We _______________. I liked this place because
__________________________
__
.
hot and sunny
August
beautiful
a Beijing
hutong
took some photos
I learned
something
important
hot and sunny tired
Beijing duck delicious
take some photos beautiful
buy something special interesting
learn something important August
For dinner we had ____________. It was ________.
In the evening, I felt really ______.
Beijing duck
delicious
tired
Answer the questions to make notes about a vacation you took.
Where did you go?
2. Did you go with anyone?
3. How was the weather?
4. What did you do every day?
5. What food did you eat?
6. What did you like best?
7. Did you dislike anything?
8. How did you feel about the trip?
3b
Write a travel diary like Jane’s on page 5. Use your notes in 3b.
_____________________
_____________________
_____________________
_____________________
_____________________
3c
Thursday, August 1st
Today I went to
the Palace Museum
. It was cool. Then I
went to visit
the
Great
Wall
.
How great it is! I took many
photos
there
.
In
the afternoon, I went to
Tian’an
m
en
Square
.
The
square is
very large
. Today is
Chinese Army Day
. So
there
were many people
there
and it was very crowded. We
had
great fun playing there!
At
last
, we
traveled
around
a
Beijing
h
utong
on
three-wheelers
.
The
Chinese people are
very
friendly. I felt very happy today,
but
I was really tired.
Sample writing:
Sunday, May 25
th
I arrived in Chengdu
this
morning
with my
parents.
It was sunny and warm,
so we decided to go for a
walk near our hotel. We saw many pretty buildings and lots of good restaurants. For lunch, we had hot pot. It was very spicy but delicious.
I love Sichuan food! In the afternoon, we went to see pandas in the zoo. Pandas are my favorite animals because they’re so cute. I was happy to know people are trying their best to save them. In the evening,
we went shopping along
Chunxi Road and bought
many things. I felt tired
but happy.
Imagine you are all foreigners on vacation in China. You meet each other at the airport on your way home. Talk about what you did on
your
vacation.
4
Make a survey and complete the chart
.
Make questions about vacation.
Ask the questions yourself.
Ask your classmates the questions.
Discuss with your classmates the best place
for a vacation.
5. Write a report on students’ vacations.
Questionnaire
Name:
Mary
age:
12
sex:
female
date:
May 1
Place
Summer Palace
Beijing Stadium
Activities
go boating
go roll-skating
Food
fast food
noodles
Weather
sunny
cool
souvenirs
sun glasses
a cap
Here is an example:
A: Did
go on vacation with you last month?
B: Yes, my family went to the countryside with me.
2. A: Did your family go to the beach with you last weekend?
1 Complete the conversations with the correct words
in
the box.
anything everything nothing anyone everyone no one
anyone
Self Check
B: No. _______ from my family went, but my friend went
with me.
3. A: I did
n’
t bring back anything from Malaysia.
B: ________at all? Why not?
4. A: Did you buy
_________
in the shopping center?
B: No, I did
n’
t.___________was very expensive.
5. A: How was the volleyball game yesterday?
B: Great! __________had a fun time!
No one
Nothing
anything
Everything
Everyone
Last August, our class ______(do) something very special on our school trip. We _______(go) to Mount Tai. We _______ (start) our trip at 12:00 at night. Everyone in our class _______(take) a bag with some food and water.
2. Complete the passage with the correct forms of the verbs in brackets.
did
went
started
took
After three hours, someone looked at the map and _______ (find) out we _______ (be, not) anywhere near the top. My legs _______(be) so tired that I wanted to stop. My classmates_______(tell) me to keep going, so I
_______
___
(go) on.
found
weren’t
were
told
went
At 5:00 a.m., we got to the top! Everyone __________ (jump) up and down in excitement. Twenty minutes later, the sun _______ (start) to come up. It was so beautiful that we _______ (forget) about the last five hours!
jumped
started
forgot
1. The weather was _______ (
晴朗
) last week.
2. The good news made us _______ (
感到
) very happy.
3. I found a girl ________ (
哭
) in the corner on my way
home yesterday.
4. We had __________ (
美味的
) Sichuan food for dinner
today.
5. Where did you go on your _________ (
假期
)?
sunny
feel
crying
delicious
vacation
I.
填空。
Exercises
6. Her sweater was ______________. (
昂贵的
)
7. She _______ (
学习
) for exams last week.
8. Cathy _________(
听
) to popular music last night.
9. Jim ______ (
去
) to the movies with his friends last
weekend.
10. She ______ (
看
) an interesting talk show yesterday.
expensive
studied
listened
went
saw
II.
补全对话。
A: Hi, Lucy. How _____ you?
B: I _____
fine, thank you. How _____ your vacation?
A: It _____ interesting.
B: Really? Where ______ you go on vacation?
A: I _____ to the mountains.
B: _____ you see the monkey?
A: Yes, I did.
are
am
was
was
did
went
Did
1. I _______ _____(not visit) the Great Wall last summer.
I _______ (go) to Qingdao on vacation.
2. — How _____ (be) the beaches there?
— Beautiful.
didn’t
visit
went
were
III.
用括号内所给单词的适当形式填空。
3. — ____ Nancy ____ (go) to New York city last weekend?
— Yes. She_____ (go) there with her parents.
4. Mary ________ (stay) at home and _______ (study) for
the exam last Sunday.
5. — What ______you ______(buy) in Beijing?
— I bought nothing.
Did
go
went
stayed
studied
did
buy
Imagine you are on vacation in the
prairie(
草原
). Write a travel diary.
Homework
unit 2
人教版八年级英语上册单元全套课件
How often do you exercise?
To learn to understand and use wh–questions and adverbs of frequency.
To learn new words:
housework, hardly, ever, once, twice, Internet, program, full, swing...
To learn to do healthy activities more, and develop a good lifestyle.
Objectives
Lead-in
What do you
usually do on
weekends
?
go shopping
help with housework
watch TV
read books
do skateboard
do exercise
What do you usually do on weekends?
I usually
…
on weekends.
do my homework
does she
does her
She
Group work
What do you usually do on weekends?
I usually
…
on weekends.
watch TV
does he
He
watch
es
What do you usually do on weekends?
I usually
…
on weekends.
read
books
read books:
读书
=
do
some
reading
do they
read
They
What do you usually do on weekends?
I usually
…
on weekends.
go shopping
go shopping:
购物
=
do
some
shopping
=
shop
does she
goes
She
What do you usually do on weekends?
I usually
…
on weekends.
skateboard
skateboard:
v
.
踩滑板；做滑板运动
=
go
skateboarding:
踩滑板；做滑板运动
does he
skateboards
He
What do you usually do on weekends?
I usually
…
on weekends.
surf the Internet
surf:
v
.
冲浪
Internet:
因特网
surf
the
Internet:
上网
do they
surf
They
What do you usually do on weekends?
I usually
…
on weekends.
exercise
exercise:
v
.
做运动
does she
exercises
She
always
usually
often
sometimes
never
hardly ever
总是
通常
常常
有时
几乎不
从不
I always do some reading on weekends.
always
usually
often
sometimes
hardly ever
never
从不
,
从未
很少
,
几乎不
有时
经常
,
常常
通常
,
一般
总是
100%
0%
Look at the picture. Make a list of the
weekend activities.
1. __________________
2. __________________
3. __________________
4. __________________
5. __________________
help with housework
read
exercise
watch TV
go shopping
1a
always(100%) _________________
usually _________________
often __________________
sometimes __________________
hardly ever __________________
never(0%) ___________________
exercise, read
help with housework
watch TV
go shopping
watch TV
go
shopping
Listen and write the activities next to the
correct frequency words.
1b
Write a passage using the information in 1b.
Rewrite
What do our friends do on weekends? Here are the answers.
Jim always____________.Mary always _______and
she hardly ever______________.But Jack usually
___________, he never______________.His sister
Grace sometimes __________________.Also,she often________________________.
exercises
reads
watches TV
watches TV
goes shopping
goes shopping
helps with the housework
通过改写短文你发现了什么？
1.
频率副词的位置：
2.
频率副词
________(
影响
/
不影响）主谓一致。
常用于实义动词之前，其它动词之后。
不影响
Practice the conversation in the picture above. Then make your own conversations about what you do on weekends.
A: What do you do on weekends?
B: I usually
watch TV
.
A: Do you
go shopping
?
B: No, I
never go shopping
.
1c
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
sometimes
频度副词，意为“有时”。同义短语为
at times
。
e.g. I sometimes play computer games.
我有时候玩电脑游戏。
Language points
Sometimes some times sometime
some time
__________ I get up very late.
I have read the story __________.
I’ll go to Shanghai __________ next week.
I will stay here for __________.
巧记
sometimes, some times, sometime
与
some time
“
有时”相聚加
s
（
sometimes
）
,
“
几次”分开带
s
（
some times
）。
相聚为“某时（
sometime
）
”
分开“一段时间（
some time
）”。
Sometimes
some time
some times
sometime
I.
补全单词。
1. — What do you usually do on w_______?
— I often watch TV.
2.
The weather here is so cold, I can h______ stand it.
3. Grandpa is pretty healthy because he e_________
every day.
eekends
xercises
ardly
Exercises
中考链接
"Left-behind" children ______see their parents, because their parents work in the cities, leaving them behind in the countryside to be cared for by their grandparents.
A. always B. hardly ever C. Often
“留守儿童几乎看不到父母，因为他们的父母在城市工作，把他们留在乡下由祖父母照顾”。
B
Homework
Keep a weekend diary showing what you do
on weekends.
2. You can write down what you do from the
time you get up until you go to bed.
Section A 2a-2d
To learn to talk about how often people do things.
To learn new words:
once, twice, Internet, program ,full,
swing ,swing dance...
Objectives
Revision
What do you usually do in your free time ?
How often do you …？
Reading Schedule
Sun.
Mon.
Tues.
Wed.
Thurs.
Fri.
Sat.
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
He read
s
books
_____________.
every day
He
always(
总是
)
read
s
books
.
How often
He plays football_______________ .
Exercise Schedule
Sun.
Mon.
Tues.
Wed.
Thurs.
Fri.
Sat.
football
running
running
once a week
He runs_______________.
twice a week
She goes shopping
______________.
Shopping
Schedule
Sun.
Mon.
Tues.
Wed.
Thurs.
Fri.
Sat.
√
√
twice a week
once a month
twice a month
three times
a month
Pie Chart
use the Internet
25%
25 percent
????
%
25 percent
35 percent
15 percent
Listen.
Cheng Tao is talking about how often he does these activities. Number the activities[1-5] in the order you hear them.
2a
How often
every day
once a week
twice a week
three times a week
once a month
twice a month
Activities
a.
____
go to the movies
b.
____
watch TV
c.
____
shop
d.
____
exercise
e.
____
read
2
3
4
5
1
Listen again. Match the activities in 2a with how often Cheng Tao does them.
How often
every day
once a week
twice a week
three times a week
once a month
twice a month
2b
Activities
a.
____
go to the movies
b.
____
watch TV
c.
____
shop
d.
____
exercise
e.
____
read
2
3
4
5
1
Look at 2b. Make conversations like this
：
--How often does Cheng Tao watchTV?
--He watches TV twice a week.
Pairwork
--
--
How often do you do these activities?
Fill in the chart and then make conversations.
Activities
How often
watch TV
every day
use the Internet
read English books
go to the movies
exercise
2c
A: How often do you watch TV?
B: I watch TV every day.
A: What’s your favorite program?
B:
Animal World
.
A: How often do you watch it?
B: Twice a week.
1. Role play in groups;
2. Role play in front of the class
We’ll see which group does the best.
Role-play the conversation.
2d
Jack: Hi, Claire, are you free next week?
Claire: Hmm…next week is quite full for me, Jack.
Jack: Really? How come?
Claire: I have dance and piano lessons.
Jack: What kind of dance are you learning?
Claire: Oh, swing dance. It’s fun! I have class
once a
week, every Monday.
Jack: How often do you have piano lessons?
Claire: Twice a week, on Wednesday and Friday.
Jack: Well, how about Tuesday?
Claire: Oh, I have to play tennis with my
friends. But do you want to come?
Jack: Sure!
Next week is quite______ for Claire, for she has to ____
many activities. She has piano lessons______ (two) a week and dance class ______ (one) a week. She also has to __________ with her friends.
full
once
twice
Fill in the blanks and try to retell the text.
play tennis
do
1.
本课时我们学习的主要语法点是由
wh-
和
how
引导的特殊疑问句以及其对应的答语。
如：
What do/does …?
How often do/does …?
等。
e.g.
What do
you
usually
do on weekends?
你通常周末做什么？
I
usually
listen to music.
我通常听音乐。
Language points
e.g.
How often do
you go to the factory?
你多久去一次工厂？
I go to the factory
twice a week
.
我两周去一次。
How often
do you exercise?
你（你们）多久锻炼一次身体？
How often
+
助动词
do
(
does
或
did
) +
主语
+
do sth.
?
疑问词
how often
是问频率
(
多久一次
),
（在这里
助动词
do
(
does
或
did
)
是起帮助构成疑问的作用）与一般现在时或一般过去时连用
,
回答一般是用表示频率的副词或短语。
如：
always,sometimes, quite often, never, every day,
once a week, twice a month, three times a month, three or four times a month
等。
常考以
h
ow
引导的疑问
短语
how often ”
多久一次
“
用于提问
always ,once a day
等。
how old ”
多大年龄
“
用于提问
ten years old
等。
how soon ”
多久以后
“
用于提问将来时中的
in+
时间段
how long ”
多长时间
“
用于提问一段时间
how many ”
多少
“
用于提问可数名词的数量
how much ”
多少
“
用于提问不可数名词的数量
或提问价格
2.
exercise
exercise
v.
锻炼；
exercise
n.
[U]
运动；
[C]
练习
e.g. Let’ s do our
exercises
.
让我们做练习吧。
Walking is a good
exercise
.
散步是很好的运动。
Doing morning
exercises
is good for our health.
晨练有助于我们身体健康。
3.
three times a week
表示
次数
的词或短语：
once,twice,three times,
four times...
对次数提问使用
how many times
区分表示
频率
的短语：
once a day,twice a week,
three times a month...
对频率提问用
how often
4. Next week is quite
full
for me.
我下周比较忙。
full
忙的；满的；充满的
.
同义词
--busy
e.g. I’ve
got rather a full week next
week.
我下周会非常忙。
My father has a very full life .
我父亲的生活很忙碌。
拓展：
adj.
饱的
5.
How
come
?
为什么呢？
这是英语中的一个口语，相当于汉语的“为什么”、“怎么会”等，既可以独立使用，也可在后接句子，来询问事情的缘由或状况。
e.g. How come the sky is so blue today?
今天天怎么会这么蓝？
A: I didn’ t even eat lunch today.
我今天甚至没吃午饭。
B: Really? How come?
是吗？怎么会呢？
What do you usually do on weekends?
I always exercise…
2. How often do you…?
Once a month / …
Summary
I.
用所给词的适当形式填空。
1. Next week is quite ____ (full) for me.
2. Mother often goes ________ (shop) after work.
3. How often _____ he _____(do) his homework
？
4. He watches TV _____ (two) a week.
full
shopping
does
do
twice
Exercises
II.
请对下面句子画线部分提问。
1. He usually
visits his grandpa
every winter.
2. I visit my grandparents
twice a year
.
What does he usually do every winter?
How often do you visit your grandparents?
III.
汉译英。
1. —
他多久去购一次物？
—
个月一次。
2. —
周末你通常做什么？
—
我通常踢足球。
— What do you usually do on weekends?
— I usually play soccer.
— How often does he go shopping?
— He goes shopping once a month.
3.
他一个月去两次图书馆。
He goes to the library twice a month.
4.
今天天怎么会这么蓝
?
How come the sky is so blue today?
5.
莉莉正在学习跳摇摆舞。
Lily is learning swing dance.
中考链接
—
______ do you exercise, Tony?
—Three times a week.
A. How often B. How soon
C. How long D. How much
一星期三次。
A
多久一次
多长时间
多久以后
多少（钱）
Recite the conversation of 2d.
Preview the new words we will use in the next lesson.
Homework
Section A Grammar Focus-3c
To ask and answer activities and talk about how often people do them.
To learn new words:
maybe,
least...
To use the expressions such as “once a
day”
correctly
and
freely
.
Objectives
How often do you exercise?
Play a game
Once a week? every day ?
do homework
brush your teeth
(
刷牙
)
cut your hair
(
理发
)
wash your clothes
take a shower
clean your room
visit your uncle/grandmother
A:
How often do you …?
B:
once a week/ every day / twice a month
/hardly ever / never / sometimes/…
What do you usually do on weekends?
I
always
exercise.
What do they do on weekends?
They
often
help with housework.
What does she do on weekends?
She
sometimes
goes shopping.
How often
do you go to the movies?
I go to the movies maybe
once a month
.
How often
does he watch TV?
He
hardly ever
watches TV.
Do you go shopping?
No, I
never
go shopping.
Grammar Focus
1.
你通常在周未做什么？
______ ___ you ______ do on weekends?
2.
我总是去运动。
I ______ _______.
3.
他们在周未做什么？
______ ___ they ___ on weekends?
Grammar focus
usually
What do
always exercise
What do
do
根据课本内容，完成下列句子。然后总结频度副词及
how often
相关用法。
4.
他们经常帮助做家务。
They _____ ____ with housework.
5.
她在周未做什么？
What _____ she ___ on weekends?
6.
她有时候去购物。
She _________ _____ ________.
often help
does
do
sometimes goes shopping
7.
你多久去看电影一次？
_____ _____ do you go to the ______?
8.
我可能一个月去看一次。
I go to movies ______ _____ a ______.
How often
movies
maybe once month
9.
他多久看一次电视
?
____ ______ does he watch TV?
10.
他几乎不看电视。
He ______ _____ watches TV.
hardly ever
How often
11.
你去购物吗？
___ ____ go shopping?
12.
不，我从不去购物。
No, I _____ ____ shopping.
Do you
never go
频度副词
always
“
总是
”
，
表示动作重复或状态延续。
usually
“
通常
”
，
表示很少有例外。
often
“
经常
”
，
表示动作的重复，但不如
usually
频繁，中间有间断。
sometimes
“
有时
”
，
表示动作偶尔发生。
hardly
“
几乎不
”
，
常和
ever
连用表示强调。
never
“
从未
”
。
频度
副词通常放在
be
动词、助动词、
情态
动词之
后
，
行为动词
之
前
,
运用时需注意句中时态的一致
。
The weather is
usually
hot in summer.
We
usually
play football after school.
He is
often
late for school.
She
never
stops talking.
My parents are
never
late
for work.
She
always
gets up at 6:30.
He
sometimes
watches TV.
I
often
go to the movies with my friends .
I
hardly ever
go out these days.
“次数”的表达方法
一次
once
， 两次
twice
，
三次或三次以上用基数词加上
times
,
three times, five times, one hundred times.
表示“
……
几次
”的表达方法是：
once a day / a week / a month / a year
twice a day / a week / a month / a year
three times a day / a week / …
这些表次数的词后与一段时间连用，表示动作多长时间发生几次，即
动作的频率
。
how often
意为
“
__________”
，是用于提问
表示
____
的特殊疑问词组。其答语应为表
示
_____
的副词或副词词组。句子的时态
一般
是
_____________
，也可以是一般过去时。
Grammar
多久一次
对频率副词及短语提问 使用
how often.
频率
频率
一般现在时态
Complete the questions with
do
or
does
. Then match the questions and answers.
How often _____ he play soccer?
_____ you drink milk?
How often ____ they stay up late?
_____ Sue eat a healthy breakfast?
How often ____ you eat apples?
____ your parents
play sports?
does
do
Do
Does
Do
do
3
a
a. Yes. She usually does.
b. Hardly ever. I don’t like them.
c. He plays
at least
twice a week.
d. No, they don
’ t
. They
’ re
too busy.
e. Never. They always go to bed early.
f. Yes, I do. Every day.
至少；不少于；起码
答案：
1. c 2. f 3. e 4. a 5. b 6. d
at least
“至少，不少于；起码”，副词词组，指在数量或程度上。
Questions:
__________________________________?
(how often / help with housework)
2. __________________________________?
(what / usually / do / weekends)
3. ___________________________________?
(how often / best friend / exercise)
4. ___________________________________?
(
what /
usually / do
/ after
school )
How often do you help with housework
What do you usually do on weekends
How often does your best friend exercise
What do you usually do after school
Use the words given to write questions. Then ask and answer them with a partner.
3
b
What can you do to improve your English? Add more things to the chart. Then ask your classmates the questions and find the best English student.
How often do you
…
Names
Frequency
read English books?
Lin Ying
twice a week
3c
How can you be a good English learner?
read English books
sing English songs
watch English programs
listen to English tapes
go to the English corner (参加英语角)
chat with foreigners (与外国人聊天)
write English diaries
...
How often do you
…
Names
Frequency
read English books?
Lin
Ying
twice
a week
Su Lei
Hu Tao
once a week
Hu Tao
Ma Li
twice a week
every day
twice a month
write to a pen pal
watch English movies
go to English club
keep an English diary
Sample
Give
a report like this:
Lin Ying reads English books twice a week. Hu Tao goes to English Club twice a week. Su Lei watches English movies once a week. Ma Li writes to a pen pal twice a month. Hu Tao keeps an English diary every day. I think Hu Tao is the best English student.
Then give your own report on your group.
join the summer camp
watch English movies
read English
newspapers
do some
English exercises
Who
’ s
the best English student?
Interview:
read English books
sing English songs
watch English programs
listen to English tapes
join the English corner
(
参加
英语角
)
chat with
foreigners (
与
外国人
聊天
)
write English diaries
A: How often do you
…
?
B: Once a week
／
Every
day / Twice
a
month / Hardly
ever / Never / Sometimes /
…
the best
English student
I think
…
is the best English student.
…
’ s
English is
pretty good
.
... is
very
active
in class.
After
class
,
…
His/her good
habit
s help him/her
get
good
grade
s.
As for
me, I read English
…
I.
句型转换。
1. She goes to the movies
three times a month
.
（对画线
部分提问）
____ _____ _____ she go to the movies?
2. My mother wants me to play the guitar. (
同义句转换
)
My mother______ _____ me to play the guitar.
How often does
would like
Exercises
3. We eat meat twice a week. (
同义句
)
We ________ meat two _________ a week.
4. I always exercise after school. (
变成完全否定句
)
I _________ exercise after school.
5. I practice the piano
every day.
(
对划线部分提问
)
______ ____ do you practice the piano?
have
times
never
How often
II.
汉译英。
1.
至于作业，大多数学生每天都做。
2.
没有学生一周做一次或两次作业。
As for homework, most students do homework every day.
No students do homework once or twice a week.
3.
他几乎从未逛过商店。
He hardly ever goes shopping.
4.
你多久锻炼一次？
How often do you exercise?
5.
她通常
9
点钟上床睡觉。
She usually goes to bed at 9 o’clock.
My brother has a healthy living habit. He
_____ stays
up late, and he is an early bird
.
usually
B
. hardly
C
. often
D
. always
中考链接
健康的生活习惯
B
通常
经常
几乎不
总是
熬夜晚睡
—How often do youusually go to work
by
subway?
—________. I always take a bus, because
there
is no subway in
this city
.
A. Sometimes
B
. Often
C
. Never
D
. Seldom
C
有时
从不
经常
很少
多久一次
没有地铁
Recite the conversation of 2d.
Preview the new words we will use in the next lesson.
Finish the exercise
book.
Homework
Section B 1a-1e
To learn to understand and use wh–questions and adverbs of frequency.
To learn new words:
junk,junk food,coffee,
health...
To eat healthily,To have a good living habit.
Objectives
How often do you eat vegetables?
How often do you eat fruits?
How often do you drink milk?
How often do you eat junk food?
How often do you eat meat?
How often do you exercise?
What sports do you play?
How many hours do you sleep every night?
Free talk: Talk about your habits.
An apple a day keeps the doctor away.
一天一苹果
，
医生远离我
。
fruit
Healthy food
Brainstorm
List some kinds of
healthy
food.
milk
fruit
vegetables
Healthy food
is good for
our
health
.
be good for 对
……
有好处
n.
健康
adj.
健康的
Eating
junk food is bad for our health.
Are they healthy food, too?
Junk food
Junk food
is bad for
our health.
hamburger
coffee
barbecue
chips
instant noodles
be bad for 对
……
有坏处
垃圾食品(Junk Food)，是指仅仅提供一些热量，别无其它营养素的食物，或是提供超过人体需要，变成多余成分的食品。垃圾食品包括：油炸类食品、腌制类食品、加工类肉食品（肉干、肉松、香肠、火腿等）、饼干类食品（包括所有加工饼干）、汽水可乐类饮料、方便类食品（主要指方便面和膨化食品）、罐头类食品（包括鱼肉类和水果类）、话梅蜜饯果脯类食品、冷冻甜品类食品（冰淇淋、冰棒、雪糕等）、烧烤类食品。
New words
milk
coffee
1. __ junk food 3. __ fruit 5. __ sleep
2. __ milk 4. __ vegetables 6. __ coffee
Match the words with the pictures below.
a
f
c
d
e
b
v.
睡觉
a
b
c
d
e
f
1a
vegetables
fruits
We
sleep
every day.
chips
hamburger
Junk food
cola
chocolate
are good for our health.
Junk food is bad for our health.
A: How often do you drink milk, Liu Fang? B: I drink milk every day. A: Do you like it? B: No. But my mother
wants
me to drink it
. She says it’
s
good for
my health.
Ask and answer questions. Use the words from 1a.
1b
Task : divide the food into two groups
healthy:
unhealthy:
cola, salad, soup, hot dog, mushroom,
broccoli, milk , hamburger, dumpling, potato chips, fried chicken, onion, junk food, milk, coffee, chips, cola, chocolate, fruit, vegetables
healthy:
unhealthy:
salad, soup, broccoli, milk , dumpling, onion, mushroom, milk, fruit, vegetables
cola, hot dog, chips, fried chicken, hamburger, junk food, coffee, chocolate
un
healthy
不健康的
junk food
be bad for
health
not
healthy
cola
salad
soup
hot dog
tomato
onions
dumplings
broccoli
healthy or unhealthy?
Listen to the interview about eating habits. Circle your answer to each question.
Does Tina have good habits? Yes. No. I don’t know.
Does Bill have good habits? Yes. No. I don’t know.
1c
Is he in good health?
Of course not
, he isn’t healthy.
Why is he so heavy?
Because his
eating habit
is
bad.
He eats too much junk food.
Activities
Every day
Three or four times a
week
Once or twice a week
never
Eat
vegetables
Drink milk
Eat
junk
food
Drink
coffee
My eating habits are ___
___________.
good/
OK/bad
How are your
eating habits?
Listen again. Fill in the blanks in the survey.
Questions
Tina
Bill
1.How often do you exercise?
2.How often do you eat fruit?
3.How many hours do you sleep every night?
4.How often do you drink milk?
5.How often do you eat junk food?
6.How often do you drink coffee?
every day
nine
never
every day
hardly ever
never
every day
nine
3 or 4
times a week
never
2 or 3 times a week
4 times a day
1d
Who has
better
eating habits
?
Whose
lifestyle
is better?
I think
Ti
na has better
eat
ing
habits
. Because she
eats
every day.
She
has
two or three times a week.
She never
drinks
Her
lifestyle
is better.
She
She
She is very healthy.
nine hours every night.
Although
Bill sleeps nine hours every night, he is unhealthy.
Bill sleeps nine hours every night, too.
Is he healthy?
Who can get better grades?
Her healthy lifestyle helps her
get good grades
.
Good food and exercise help her to
study better
.
Student A is the reporter. Student B is Tina or Bill. Ask and answer questions. Then change roles.
A: How often do you exercise?
B: I exercise every day.
A: And how often do you
…
?
1e
1. But my mother
wants me to drink
it.
want to do sth.
想要做某事
want sb. to do sth.
想要某人做某事
Do you
want to go to the movies
with me?
你想和我一起去看电影吗？
The teacher doesn’t
want us to eat
hamburgers.
老师不想让我们吃汉堡包。
Language points
2. She
says
it’ s
good for
my health.
她说它对我的健康有益。
1)
此句为宾语从句
, says
后面跟的从句的时态
必须和主句中谓语动词时态保持一致
,
都用
一般现在时。
2)
be good for
对
……
有好处
例如：
►
Vegetables
are good for
our health.
蔬菜对我们的健康有益。
►
Junk food is
not
good for our health.
垃圾食品对我们的健康有害。
be good to
对
……
好
He was good to me when I was ill.
我生病时他对我关怀备至。
be good with
善于应付
……
的
He is very good with children.
他对孩子很有一套。
be good at
擅长于
……
的
I'm good at playing chess.
我擅长下国际象棋。
eg.1)It's bad for your
health
.
2)Although he is old, he
is/stays/keeps in good
health
.
be/ stay/ keep in good health
.
=Although he is old, he
is/stays/keeps
healthy
.
be/stay/keep healthy.
3.health----healthy----healthily
n. adj. adv.
结论：
保持健康→
be/ stay/ keep in good health
=
be/stay/keep healthy.
3
）
If you want to keep healthy, you should eat healthily.
adj.
adv.
拓展：加前缀
un
构成反义词
1. I like English very much, so I ____ listen to the
tape in the morning.
A. usually B. hardly ever C. never
2. Milk is good _____ our ______.
A. to; healthy B. to; health
C. for; healthy D. for; health
I.
单
项选择。
A
D
Exercises
1. I sleep
8 hours
every night.(
画线提问
)
_____ _____ ______
do you sleep every night
?
2. He watches TV
twice a week
.(
画线提问
)
_____ _____ _____
he watch TV?
3. Jack does his homework every day.
(
改为否定句
)
Jack _______ _____ his homework every day.
How many hours
How often does
doesn’t do
II.
句型转换。
4. He is talking to his father.
(
用
usually
改写句子
)
He _______ _____ to his father.
5. My father often
reads newspaper
after supper.
(
画线提问
)
_____ _____ _____ father often ____ after supper?
What does your
do
usually talks
III.
翻译句子。
1. —
你多久喝一次牛奶？
—
我每天都喝。
2.
我妈妈想让我喝牛奶。她说它对我的健康有益。
—
How often do you drink milk?
— I drink milk every day.
My mother wants me to drink milk.
She says it’s good for my health.
3.
多读书对我们有好处。
It’s good for us to do more reading.
4.
老师不想让我们吃汉堡包。
The teacher doesn’t want us to eat hamburgers.
5.
大声朗读对提高你的英语有好处。
Reading aloud is good for improving your English.
— What do you think of working as a doctor?
— It's a good job to help people keep _____.
A. busy B. strict
C. healthy D. generous
中考链接
“
……
帮助人们保持
……
”
C
忙碌的
健康的
严肃的
慷慨的
Homework
以
My habits (good habits and bad habits)
为题目写一篇短文。（字数不少于
50
字）
Section B 2a-2e
To learn about the free time activities of the students from No.5 High School.
To learn to use adverbs of frequency to write about your habits.
To learn new words:
percent, through, however, almost, none, less, point…
Objectives
Make your own conversations in pairs.
Revision
What do you usually do in your free time?
How often do you … ？
watch TV
go to the movies
play computer
games
exercise or
play sports
use the Internet
go camping in
the country
Rank these activities according to how often you think you classmates do them (1=most often,6=least often 1最多6最少)
go online
For me, I
most often
go online.
I
least often
go to the movies.
2a
百分数
用基数
+ percent
表示
50
％
fifty percent
百分之五十
3
％
three percent
百分之三
In our class, ____students like using the Internet.
_____ students like playing sports.
____ students like watching TV.
______ students like doing homework.
Let's summarize.
All students?
=100%
Most students?
=
51%-99%
Some students?
=
1%-50%
No students?
= 0%
Pie Chart
use the Internet
25%
25 percent
????
%
25 percent
35 percent
15 percent
Read the article and complete the pie charts on the next page.
What Do No.5 High School Students
Do in Their Free Time?
Last month we asked our students about their free time activities. Our questions were about exercise, use of the Internet and watching TV. Here are the
results
.
2b
We found that only fifteen
percent
of our students exercise every day. Forty-five percent exercise
four to six times a week
. Twenty percent exercise only
one to three times
a week. And twenty percent do not exercise at all!
We all know that many students often go
online
, but we were surprised that
ninety percent of them use the Internet every day. The other ten percent use it at least three or four times a week. Most students use it for fun and not for homework.
The answers to our questions about watching
television
were also interesting.
Only two percent of the students watch TV one to three times a week. Thirteen percent watch TV four to six times a week. And eighty-five percent watch TV every day!
Although
many students like to watch sports, game shows are the most popular.
It is good to relax by using the Internet or watching game shows, but we think the best way to relax is
through
exercise. It is healthy for the
mind
and the
body
. Exercise
such as
playing sports is fun, and you can spend time with your friends and family as you play
together
. And remember,
“old habits
die
hard”. So start exercising before it’s too late!
Read the article and complete the pie charts on the next page.
15
20
20
45
10
90
13
2
85
Read the passage quickly and find the answers to the questions below.
1. How
many kinds of free time activities
are
mentioned in the passage?
_______________________________
2. What are they?
_________________________________
Three.
Exercise, use the internet/ go online,
watch TV
Results 调查结果
Comments 调查结论
Topic 调查内容
Para .1
Para. 2, 3, 4
Para. 5
Skim the article and match each paragraph with the following parts.
Exercise
Watching TV
Go online
Reading task
Read each paragraph quickly and draw a line to get the main idea.
Para1.
Para2.
Para3.
Para5.
Free time activities
Para4.
It is about how often students watch TV.
B. It is a survey about students’ free time activities.
C. It tells how often students do exercise.
D. The best way to relax is through exercise.
E. It is about how often students go online.
Read the article and mark True (T) or False (F).
1. We found that twenty percent of our students exercise every day.
2. Ninety percent of the students use the Internet every day.
3. Most students use the Internet for homework.
4. Only twenty percent of the students watch TV two or three times a week.
5. Do exercise is healthy for the mind and the body.
F
T
F
F
T
Read the article again and answer the questions.
1.How many students do not exercise at all?
2.How many students use the Internet every day?
3.How often do most students watch TV?What do they
usually watch?
20% students do not exercise at all.
90% students use the Internet every day.
Most students watch TV every day. They usually
watch sports, game shows.
2c
4. What does the writer think is the best way to
relax? Why?
5. Do you think the students at No.5 are healthy?
Why or why not?
Exercise, because it is healthy for the mind and the body.
No , I don’t think so
.
Because most of the students use Internet or watch TV on their free time. They don’t like exercising. It’s unhealthy.
1.
We found that only fifteen
percent of
our students exercise every day.
percent n.
“
百分之……”
没有复数形式
基数词
+percent+ of...
“百分之...
的
...”
作主
语时，
谓语的数
和
of
后的名词，代词
保持一致
。
Language points
►
Seventy percent of the boys like
playing computer games.
男生中70%喜欢
玩
电脑游戏。
►
Thirty percent of
time
pass
es
.
百分之三十的时间过去了。
2.
Although
many students like to watch sports, game shows are the most popular.
虽然很多学生喜欢看体育节目，但游戏节目是最受欢迎的。
although
是连词，意为“虽然，即使，纵然”，引导让步状语从句，相当于
though
，大多数情况下两者可互换。
注意：
although 引导的从句不能与but
连用
，
有
although
就没有
but
（即
although but
不同现）
。
Although it rained, the boys still played outside.
= It rained, but the boys still played outside.
尽管天下雨了
，
但男孩们仍在外面玩耍。
Ex.He didn't say sorry to me. He was wrong .
(
合并为一句）
He didn't say sorry to me________he was wrong.
although
3....but we think the best way to relax is
through
exercise.
through prep.
以，凭借，穿过
eg.Light comes in through the window.
易错点：辨析
through, across ,over (
见下图）
Ex.
选词填空
We walked _________the bridge.
Sam liked trekking_______the jungle,because he
thinks it's exciting.
The birds fly ______the lake.
across
through
over
4.. And twenty percent
do not
exercise
at all
!
百分之二十的学生根本不运动！
►
The story isn’t interesting at all.
那个故事一点也没有趣。
►
They didn’t enjoy the vacation at all.
他们根本不喜欢那次旅行。
►
The old man can hardly ever use the computer at all.
那位老人一点也不会用电脑。
not … at all “一点也不”，注意：not代表了所有否定句，次结构可理解为在否定
句末加上
at all
加强否定句语气
。
拓展：在口语中单独说 not at all, 可用来表示
“
不用谢
”“
没关系
”
。
5.
Exercise
such as
playing sports is fun, and you can
spend time with your friends and family as you play together.
►
I know four languages, such as, English and Chinese.
我了解四种语言，例如英语、汉语。
►
She likes animas such as rabbits and birds.
她喜欢像兔子、小鸟这样的小动物。
such as 用来举例，意为“例如；诸如此类的；像······那样的”，结构常为：名词+ such as + 例子。
注意：其后面不可列举出所有的事物。
温馨提示：
such as
可与
like
通用，所举例子只能为单词和短语，但
for example
所举例
子要为句子。
试对比：
He does sports like/such as
running
every day.
He likes sports.For example,
he runs
every day.
6. … but we
were surprised that
ninety percent of them use the Internet every day.
► 我们队这个消息感到很意外。
We are surprised at the news.
► 我在这里见到你很意外
。
I am very surprised to meet you here
.
surprised 形容词
，意思是“感到惊讶的”
，
修饰人，
surprising
“
令人惊讶
”
，修饰物。
常用结构：
1）be surprised at sth
对某事感到惊讶
2）be surprised to do sth
做某事而感到惊讶
3）be surprised + that从句
因……而惊讶
7. So
start exercising
before
it’s too late
!
所以要赶快锻炼起来，不要等到来不及了。
►
Now you know you’re wrong, but it’s too late.
现在你知道你错了，但是已经太晚了。
►
你应当更加用功，别等到为时过晚而赶不上了。
You should work harder before it’s too late to catch up.
start doing sth/to do sth=begin to do sth/doing sth
开始做某事
it’s too late
为时太晚；来不及了
it’s too late与before共同组成从句
，表示“不要等到为时已晚；不要等到来不及的时候；趁着还来得及 ”。
Phrases summary
向某人询问某事
……
的答案
每周四至六次
一点也不
……
上网
至少
每周三或四次
做某事的最好方式
例如
和某人一起度过时光
开始做某事
ask sb. about sth.
the answers to
four to six times a week
not…at all
go online
at least
three or four times a week
the best way to do sth.
such as
spend time with sb.
start doing sth.
According to the article and the pie chart, write sentences with the percentages using always, usually or sometimes.
1. 90% :___________________________________
2. 85% :___________________________________
3. 45% : ___________________________________
4. 10% : ___________________________________
5. 13% : ___________________________________
6. 2% : ___________________________________
90%
of students
always
use the Internet.
85% of students
always
watch TV.
45% of them
usually
exercise.
10% of them
sometimes
use the Internet.
13%
of them
sometimes
watch TV.
2%
of them
sometimes
watch TV.
2d
Choose one of these free time activities or think of your own. Then ask your classmates how often they do this activity and make a pie chart. Show the pie chart to your class.
play computer games read books
go shopping draw pictures play sports
How often do you…?
Names of classmates
1-3 times a week
4-6 times a week
every day
2e
I.
单选。
1. I hardly exercise so I think I’m kind of _____.
A. healthy B. health
C. unhealthy D. unhealth
2. My sister likes fruits ______ she doesn’t like vegetables.
A. and B. but C. or D. also
3. Jim’s parents want him _______ more fruits.
A. eating B. eat C. to eat D. eats
Exercises
4. We ___ go out to eat but not very often.
A. usually B. always
C. never D. sometimes
5. ___ do you read English?
A. What B. How often
C. How far D. How much
II.
翻译句子。
1.
你每天晚上睡几个小时？
How many hours do you sleep every night?
2.
我们发现只有
15%
的学生每天锻炼。
We found that only fifteen percent of our students exercise every day.
中考链接
______ the journey was tiring, Jeff thought it was worth both the time and the money.
As B. Since
C. Unless D. Although
“
____
旅行很劳累，
Jeff
认为付出金钱和时间都很值得。”
D
由于
除非
虽然
既然
Write
your own health report about
“
How healthy are you”?
.
2. Recite
the new words we have learnt.
Homework
Section B 3a-Self Check
eat junk food
once a month
A: How often do you eat junk food?
B: Once a month.
surf the Internet
once a week
A: How often do you surf the Internet?
B: Once a week.
Once a month
Twice a week
Three times
a
week
Four times a week
Once or twice a week
my father
Mr
Lin
Bob
Li
Mei
Mr
White
How often does...
Look at the information in the chart and complete the report.
Activities Days a year
Exercise 365
Read books 365
Watch TV for over 2 hours 320
Drink juice 210
Eat hamburgers 95
help with housework 20
Stay up late 15
Go to the
dentist
0
3
a
Jane is a 16-year-old high school student in the United States.
American
Teenager
magazine
asked her about her habits. Jane has a lot of good habits. She
always
exercises and she reads books __________. Also, she _________ drinks juice and she
__________
stays up late.
often
every day
hardly ever
However
, she has some bad habits, too. She _______ watches TV for
more than
two hours a day, and she _________ eats hamburgers. Her parents are not very happy because she ___________ helps with housework and she _______ goes to the
dentist
for teeth cleaning. She says she is afraid!
usually
sometimes
hardly ever
never
Complete the chart with your own information. In the last column, use expressions like always, every day, twice a week and never.
Activities
How often?
Good habits
Bad habits
3b
Write a report about your good and bad habits. Say how often you do things. Use the report in 3a as an example.
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
_
3c
Take the health quiz. Compare your results with your partner’s. Who’s healthier?
1.How often do you eat breakfast?
a. Never b. A few
times
a week
c. Almost every day.
2.How often do you eat fast food?
a. Never b. A few
times
a week
c. Almost every day
3.How often do you eat vegetables and fruit?
a. Never b. A few
times
a week
c. Almost every
day
4
4. How often do you exercise?
a. A few
times
a year
b. A few
times
a month
c. A few
times
a week
5. How many hours do you watch TV every week?
a.
None
b. One to four c. Five or more
6. How many hours do you usually sleep
at
night?
a.
Less than
six. b. Six or seven c. Eight or more
1.a=0, b=1,c=2
2.a=2, b=1,c=0
3.a=0, b=1,c=2
4.a=0, b=1,c=2
5.a=2, b=1,c=0
6.a=0, b=1,c=2
9-12
points
:
You’re really healthy! Good for
you— and
your health!
4-8points:
You’re smart about your health
most of the time.
0-3points:
You have to learn more about
healthy habits. Don’t
worry— you
can do it!
Are you healthy?
Healthy/unhealthy lifestyle?
Lisa sleeps eight hours every night.
She eats a good breakfast and
she exercises
every day.
She
never eats junk food.
读一读
,
判断谁的
生活健康
？
Healthy/unhealthy lifestyle?
Pam likes to watch TV. On weekends,
she
never
exercises
and she
doesn
’
t like
fruits or vegetables.
She
eats junk
food
. And Pam never goes to the
doctor.
Early to bed,
early to rise,
makes a man healthy, wealthy and wise.
Saying
Language points
1.
However
, she has some bad habits, too. She _______ watches TV for
more than
two hours a day,......
however adv.
然而，不过
可与
but
替换使用，但
however
使用时常在其后加
“
，
”
。
eg. I'd like to go.
However,
I think I'd better not.
more than
多于
=over
相反于
less than
eg.I usually sleep
more than /over
7 hours at night.
1 Complete the chart with activities you do and don’t do. What about your mother / father?
always
usually
often
sometimes
hardly ever
never
I
My mother or father
Self Check
2 Write five sentences using the information above.
For example:
I always eat fast food.
…
3 Fill in the blanks in the conversation.
A: What do Tom and Mike
_______
__
do
on weekends?
B: They sometimes go to the museum.
A:
_________
__
do
they go to the shopping center?
B:
_
__
_______
ever. Maybe about twice a month.
A:
_
__
_________
do they watch TV?
B: Mike never watches TV, but Tom watches
TV
_______day.
A: Oh, I’m just like Tom. I
__
__
_____
watch TV, too.
usually
How often
Hardly
How often
every
always
We ______ go out to eat but not very
often
.
A. usually B. always
C. never
D
. sometimes
2. — ________ do you read English?
—
Every evening.
A. How long B. How often
C. How far D. how much
I.
单项选择。
D
B
Exercises
3. Maria likes ______ every morning.
A
. running B. ran
C. runs D. run
4. My sister likes fruits _______ she
doesn’t
like
vegetables
.
A. and B. but
C. or D. also
B
A
5. Jim’s parents want him ________
more
fruits.
A. eating B. to eat
C. eats
C eat D. eats
6. —_____ do you eat junk food?
—About once a week.
A. How B. How many
C. How long D. How often
B
D
7.
—You’d better not read in bed.
—I’m feeling tired.
—But it’s _______ for your eyes.
A. good B. bad
C. better D. worse
8. I don’t like sports, but I like watching others ___ . A. play B. to play
C. while playing D. when playing
B
A
9. Eating more fruits and vegetables is
good ______
our health.
A. to B. for
C. At D. with
10.—Do you think that you have a
healthy
habit?
—Yes. I _______ my health.
A. look at B. look after
C. look up D. look like
B
B
II.
连词成句。
how, do, computer, often, play, you,
games
2. how, the, movies, does, Jim, often, go, to
How often do you play computer
games
?
How often does Jim go to the movies?
3. do, twice, watch, you, TV, a week
4. most, three, or, a, week, exercise,
students
,
times
, four
5. favorite, is, what, program, your
Do you watch TV twice a week?
Most students exercise three or four times a week.
What is your favorite program?
III.
选词填空。
—
How does Mary usually keep healthy?
— She ________ every morning.
2.
Lily’s
mother _______ go to visit my grandma,
about four times a week.
often never exercise health
do one’s homework
exercises
often
3. Don’t eat too much every meal. It is bad for
your ________.
4. — What does your brother usually do on weekends?
— He often ________________
___
at home.
health
does his homework
IV.
汉译英。
1.
我每晚睡九小时。
2.
我重视我的健康。
I sleep for nine hours every night.
I look after my health.
3
.
我有许多
好
习惯。
4
.
我健康的生活方式帮助我取得好成绩。
I have a lot of
good
habits.
My healthy lifestyle helps me get good grades.
5.
好的食物和运动帮助我更好的学习。
6.
我们应该每天多吃一些蔬菜水果。
Good food and exercise help me study better.
We should eat more vegetables and fruits every day.
How healthy are you?
Write about your own habits.
Homework
unit 3
人教版八年级英语上册单元全套课件
I’m more outgoing than my sister.
Objectives
To learn to talk about personal traits.
To learn to use comparatives to compare people.
To learn new words:
outgoing, hard-working, competition, fantastic…
appearance
Personality
Likes and dislikes
tall , short ,of medium height
fat, thin, heavy ,strong, of medium build
others: have
short hair/a beard /blue eyes
wear
glasses/a yellow skirt
with
glasses/big eyes
in
a red shirt
be
beautiful, handsome, cute
friendly , kind , serious, outgoing, easy-going, calm, wild, athletic, shy, quiet, strict
favorite
subject/color......
like/dislike to do / doing
abilities
can/can’t do sth well
be good at sth/doing sh
height:
build:
Warming-up
1:What does she look like?
She is tall and thin. She has long straight brown hair. She has a big mouth. She wears a pink shirt and black skirt. She is a girl in black shoes.
2:What is she like?
She is outgoing and friendly.
3:What does she like ?
She likes eating bananas.
4:What can she do well?
She can play the piano well.
1:What does he look like?
2:What is he like?
3:What does he like?
4:What’s he good at?
Jane
Mary
Jane is tall.
Mary is
taller than
Jane.
Let’s compare.
heavy
heav
ier
The dog is heavy.
The elephant is
heavier than
the dog.
Lily is _______
than
Lucy.
Lucy is ______
than
Lily.
Lily
Lucy
thin
ner
fat
ter
Lin Lin
Dang Dang
Lin Lin is
cuter than
Dang Dang.
Dang Dang is cute.
Jim
Bob
Jim is young.
Bob is
younger than
Jim.
I have long hair
I have
longer
hair than you.
tall loudly
thin
short hair
long hair
heavy
quietly short
Match each word with its opposite!
1a
Do they look the same?
They are twins.
They are twin sisters.
Why?
They are twins.
They are twin brothers.
Do they look the same?
Why?
Look at the pictures,
talk about the differences.
Who is taller, Tina or Tara?
Who is heavier, Peter or Paul?
Who has longer hair, Tom or Sam?
Who is more quietly, Tom or Sam?
Who is more loudly, Tina or Tara?
Who is shorter and thinner, Peter or Paul?
Tina
Peter
Sam
Tom
Tina
Paul
Listen and number the pairs of twins in the
picture [1-3].
1
2
3
1b
Let’s have a look at these twins.
Look carefully, then let’s play a game.
short
short
er
The baby is
shorter than
the girl.
Compare people
young
young
er
The little boy
is
younger than
the young man
.
old
old
er
Ted
Vince
Vince is
older than
Ted.
Practice the conversation in the picture above. Then make conversations about the other twins.
A: That
’
s Tara, isn’t it?
B: No, it isn’t. It’s Tina. Tina is
taller than
Tara.
And she also sings
more loudly than
Tara.
1c
Let’s practice!
Is that Tom?
No, it isn’t. It’s Sam.
Tom can play
the
guitar better than
Sam.
Who’s Tom?
No, it isn’t. It’s Paul.
Paul’s
thinner
than
Peter. Peter’s
taller
than Paul.
Is that
Peter?
Who’s Peter?
1.
Both
Tom and Sam can play the drums, but Sam
plays them better than Tom.
1) both
“
两个、两者都
……”,
在句中可作代词、
形容词、副词、连词。作副词时常放在
be
动词之后
,
实义动词之前。
Language points
e.g.
Both
(of) his parents are doctors.
(
作代词或形容词
)
=His parents are
both
doctors.
(
作副词
)
They
both
went camping in the holiday.
(
作副词
)
Both
English
and
math are very important.
(both …and…
短语常连接两个并列的成分
,
可连接名
词、动词、形容词和代词等
)
注
:
both
指两者都
,
all
指三者或三者以上都。
2. That’s Tara,
isn’t it
?
附加疑问句：陈述句后添加一个附着的简略疑问结构，用以进行确认。
⑴ 若陈述部分为肯定，便用否定形式进行提问；
⑵ 若陈述部分为否定，便用肯定形式进行提问。
即
前肯后否，前否后肯
►
There’s someone in the room,
isn’t there
?
►
We can’t say it this way,
can we
?
►
There
’s
someone in the room,
isn’t there
?
房间里有人，是吧？
►
He
didn’t
say anything at the meeting,
did he
?
他在会上什么也没说，对吗？
►
We
can’t
say it this way,
can we
?
我们不能这样说，对不对？
特别提醒：附加部分的动词要和陈述句部分保持一致
Have a try
1._______of the twins have long hair.
A. All B. Both C. Each D .either
2.His son never works hard,____________?
3.-Sam hardly ever used the computer yesterday, did he?
-______________.He played computer games till midnight.
A. Yes,he did. B.No,he didn't
C.
Yes,he didn't
D.
No,he did
☺
☺
does he
I.
按要求写出下列各词的正确形式。
1 easy (
比较级
): ___________
2 different (
名词
): _________
3 many (
比较级
): ______
4 serious (
比较级
): _____________
5 friendly (
比较级
): _________
easier
difference
more
more serious
friendlier
Exercises
6 funny (
比较级
):
_________
7 outgoing (
比较级
): ______________
8 quiet (
反义词
): _________
9 tall (
反义词
): ____________
10 beautiful (
比较级
):______________
more beautiful
more outgoing
loud
short
funnier
II.
句型转换。
This picture looks beautiful, but that one looks more beautiful.(
同义句
)
That picture looks ______ _________ _____ this one.
2. She has longer hair than Emma.(
同义句
)
Her hair is ______ ______ _______.
3.Helen studies hardest in her class.(
同义句
)
Helen studies ________ than ______ _______ student
in her class.
more beautiful than
longer than Emma’s
harder any other
1.If you want to be thinner and healthier, you’d
better eat ____food and take ____ exercise.
more, fewer B. more, less
C. fewer, more D. less, more
III.
选择。
2.He’s ____ than his brother.
strong B. stronger
C. the stronger D. the strongest
中考链接
— Which singer do you like, Zhang
Liangying or Zhou Bichang?
— ________. I love their songs very much.
A. All B. Neither C. Both
“我非常喜欢他们的歌曲”
C
两者都不
都（三者及以上）
两者都
— You are singing to the plants!
— That’s true. I believe it helps them grow
______ .
A. slower B. better C. harder
“我相信这帮助它们长得更好。”
B
更好
更慢
更难
Homework
Compare one of your friends with you to find your similarities and differences, then write them down.
Preview the words of this unit.
Section A 2a-2d
— Is that Eric?
— No, that’s David. Eric is
thinner than
David and he is
better
at sports
than
David.
David
Eric is thin
Eric
is better
at sports
Eric
Review
The red box is big.
The green box is small.
The red box is big
ger
than the green box.
The girls dance well.
The
man and the woman dance better.
The man and the woman dance better than the girls.
Listen. Are the words in the box used with
-(i)er or more? Complete the chart.
funny
friendly outgoing
hard-working smart
lazy
(run) fast (jump) high
(work) hard (get up) early
-er / -ier
more
friendly, funny,
fast, high, hard,
smart, lazy,
early
outgoing,
hard-working
2a
Tina …
Tara …
is more outgoing than Tara.
works as hard as Tina.
Listen again. How are Tina and Tara different? Fill in the boxes.
Let’s talk about the differences between Tina and Tara.
friendlier,
funnier,
run faster,
jump higher,
smarter,
get up earlier
2b
Student A, look at the chart on the right. Student B, look at the chart on page 81. Ask and answer questions about Sam and Tom.
Sam
Tom
smart
tall
run fast
get up early
thin
funny
hard-working
friendly
2c
☆☆☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆☆☆
☆☆☆
☆☆☆
1. Sam
works
______
(
hard
) than Tom.
2. Tom is ______
__
(
smart
) than Sam.
3. Tina is ______(tall) and
____
____
(
quiet
) than Tara.
4. Paul is ______
_
(short) and ______
__
(
heavy
) than Pedro.
5. I
get up
_
____
______
_
(
early
) than Tara.
6. Tara is _______________( serious) than Tina.
7.
Du Ji
a
is ____________
_
(
popular
) than others in Class 19.
用形容词的适当形式填空
harder
smarter
taller
quieter
shorter
heavier
earlier
more serious
more popular
Guessing who she/he is?
Try to write at least 3 sentences in your paper to describe
one of your classmates. And let us guess who she/he is.
Remember do not mention his/her name.
Example:
My best friend has long hair. She is taller than me.
She wears glasses. She is a very hard-working girl.
2d
Listen to the conversation and
answer the questions.
1.Who has shorter hair?
Lisa.
2.Who danced better?
Nelly.
3.Who sang more clearly?
Lisa.
4.What does Anna think is the most important?
To learn something new and have fun.
Julie: Did you like the singing competition
yesterday, Anna?
Anna: oh, it was fantastic! Nelly sang so
well!
Julie: Well, I think Lisa sang
better
than
Nelly.
Anna: Oh, which one was Lisa?
2d
Role-play the conversation.
Julie: The one with
shorter
hair. I think she sang
more clearly than
Nelly.
Anna: Yes, but Nelly danced
better than
Lisa.
Julie: You can tell that Lisa really wanted to win,
though.
Anna: Well, everyone wants to win. But the most
important thing is to learn something new and
have fun
.
Anna likes the singing competition. It was __________. Julie thinks Lisa, the one with _______ hair, sang _______
___
and ________ than Nelly. Anna thinks Nelly danced ______ than Lisa. The ________________ thing is to learn something new and have fun.
Fill in the blanks According to the conversation.
fantastic
shorter
better
more clearly
better
most important
Have a discussion
which
在问句中作疑问代词，其含义为“
哪一个，哪一些
”。
e.g. Which are the ones you really like?
哪些是你们真正喜欢的？
Which is your best friend , Tom or Lucy?
哪一位是你最好的朋友，汤姆还是露西？
1.Oh, which one was Lisa?
哦，哪一位是莉莎？
Language points
which
也可
引导定语从句
，在从句中可以
作主语
，也可以
作宾语
。
e.g. Color the birds which are flying.
给那些正在飞的鸟涂色。
The story (which) he told was very interesting.
(
which
作宾语，此时
which
可省略
)
The shop _____ sells flowers is at the end of the street.
A . Who B . where C . which
（
which
作主语
）
2.You can tell that Lisa really wanted to win, though.
不过，你能看得出来，莉莎真的想赢。
1
）
though
作副词，意为“
不过；可是；然而
”，常用于口语中，一般放在
句尾
。
e.g. —Have you ever been to Australia?
你去过澳大利亚吗？
—No. I’d like to, though.
没有。
不过
我很想去。
这是份苦差事，可他还是接受了。
It was a hard job. He took it, though.
拓展
:
(1)though
还可以作
连词
，意为“
虽然；尽管
”，引导让步状语从句，此时可以和
although
互换。
e.g. Though/Although he was ill, he worked hard.
他虽然生病了，但仍努力工作。
(2)though/although
不能和
but
连用
,
但可以
和
yet, still
连用
。
e.g. Though/Although he is 90, he is still very healthy.
尽管已经
90
岁了，但他仍然很健康。
2
）
win v.
获胜，赢
+
比赛、奖项等
过去式
:won,
现在分词
:winning,
名词
:winner
eg. They won the game yesterday.
Zhang Yining won a gold medal in the women's singles.
Who is the winner, Sam or Jim?
拓展
:
赢了某人不用
win,
用
beat
eg.The LA Lakers beat the Rockets.
试对比：
We beat them and won the game.
3.But the most important thing is to learn something new and have fun.
但最重要的是要学到一些新东西并获得乐趣。
the most important
意为“
最重要的
”，是
important
的最高级形式。
important
的比较级为
more important
。
e.g. I think English is the most important of all the subjects.
我认为在所有的科目中英语是最重要的。
I.
按要求写出下列各词的正确形式。
1
funny (
比较级
)
：
___________
2
different (
名词
)
：
_________
3
many (
比较级
): ______
4
serious (
比较级
): _____________
5 friendly (
比较级
): _________
funnier
difference
more
more serious
friendlier
Exercises
II.
翻译句子。
1. —
那是山姆吗？
—
不是，是汤姆。他比山姆的头发短，而且
他比山姆高。
2.
汤姆比山姆更友好。
Tom is friendlier than Sam.
— Is that Sam?
— No, that’s Tom. He has shorter hair than Sam.
And he’s taller than Sam.
中考链接
________ we didn't win the basketball game, we were satisfied with our hard work.
A. If B. Though
C. Since D. Because
B
如果
既然
虽然
因为
句意“虽然我们没有赢得篮球赛，我们对自己的努力很满意”
Homework
想像
自己未来的形象。用英语写一篇短文
。
(
about 60 words)
Many
years later, I will be taller, I want
to be more
beautiful…
2. Preview the new words and expressions.
3. Preview the Grammar Focus.
Section A Grammar Focus-3c
To learn to compare personal traits of people by using
comparatives.
To
learn new words:
as, way, both, physics,
however...
To compare people,learn from others.
Objectives
根据句意填入单词的正确形式：
1. My brother is two years __________(old) than me.
2. Tom is as _______(fat) as Jim.
3. Is your sister __________(young) than you? Yes, she is.
4. Who is ___________(thin), you or Helen? Helen is.
5. Whose pencil-box is _______(big), yours or hers? Hers is.
6. Mary’s hair is as __________(long) as Lucy’s.
7.Ben jumps________ (high) than some of the boys in his class.
8.______ Nancy sing __________ (well) than Helen?
older
fat
younger
thinner
bigger
long
higher
Does
better
Review
唱歌
比赛
比
……
唱得好
头发较短的那个
比
……
唱
得清楚
比
……
跳
得好
更多地练习
重要的是学到东西
重要的是得到
快乐
比较你的父母
阅读
2d-3c,
翻译下列短语及句子。
singing competition
sing better than
the one with shorter hair
sing more clearly than
dance better than
practice more
The most important thing is to learn
something
new.
The most important thing is to have fun.
Compare your parents.
Find their differences in each picture.
The
more, the better.
The man is...
The pig is...
The horse is
The bike goes
fast
.
The car goes ______than the bike.
faster
Tall,
tall
er
, who
is tall
er
?
I am tall. You are tall
er
. You are tall
er
than
me.
Thin,
thin
ner
, who
is thin
ner
?
He is thin. She is thin
ner
. She is thin
ner
than
him.
Funny, funn
ier
. Who is fun
nier
?
You are funny. They are fun
nier
.
They are funn
ier
than
you.
Outgoing.
More
outgoing.
Who
is
more
outgoing?
Lucy is outgoing. Lily is
more
outgoing.
Lily is
more
outgoing
than
Lucy.
Let’s chant!
Is Tom smarter than Sam?
No, he isn
’
t. Sam is smarter than Tom.
Is Tara more outgoing than Tina?
No, she isn
’
t. Tina is more outgoing than Tara.
Are you as friendly as your sister?
No, I
’
m not. I
’
m friendlier.
Does Tara work as hard as Tina?
Yes, she does
.
Who
’
s more hard-working at school?
Tina thinks she works harder than me.
Grammar Focus
Compare some of your classmates or family members,try to
make sentences.
My brother is taller than me ,I work harder than him.
......
1.
什么是形容词的
原级
？
表示修饰两种东西的程度是一样的
,
用
as… as
表示原级
，译为
:“
和
……
一样
”。
2.
什么是形容词的
比较级
？
表示两者相比，一个比另一
个
更
……
，
有比较级的句中有
than
,
且仅限于两者比较。
形容词的原级和比较级
原级和比较级区分程度的不同：
原级
是说明两个人物或事物的程度
一样
。
比较级
是区分两个人物或事物的程度
不一样
。
This tree is as ____ as that tree.
The green bag is as ____as the blue
one.
This pencil is as ____ as that pencil.
tall
big
long
原 级
当两个人或两件事物进行比较时，形容词和副词要用比较级，也就是词尾
-er
形式，比较级常常用
than
来连接被比较的两个人或事物。
►
I
am shorter than you
.
我
比你矮。
￥
2
0
￥
3
0
cheap
cheap
er
The pink dress is
cheap
.
The black dress is ___________
the pink one
.
cheap
er than
The
red
car is
cut
e
.
The
blue
car
______________
the
red
car.
(蓝车比红车更可爱
)
is cute
r than
The red apple is
big
.
The green apple
is ____________
the red one.
bigger than
56.1
kg
heavy
58kg
Garfield
is
heav
y
.
Doraemon
is
____________
Garfield
.
heav
ier
heav
ier than
Garfield
Doraemon
形容词比较级的构成
1.
构成的规则变化
:
2.
构成的不规则变化
:
形容词和副词的比较级
short
-
shorter
small
-
smaller
nice
nicer
safe
safer
-
-
-
-
-
-
big
thin
heavy
heavier
happy
happier
找规律：
big
bigger
thin
thinner
1.
构成的规则变化
:
1)
单音节词和少数双音节词一般在词尾
后加
-er
构成比较级
或
-
est
构成最高级
.
如：
原级 比较级 最高级
cold –—— cold
er
–—— cold
est
bright——— bright
er
———bright
est
young—— young
er
—— young
est
2)
以字母
e
结尾的词只加
–r
或
-st
构
成
比
较
级
和
最高级
。
原级 比较级 最高级
nice ——
nic
er
–——
nic
est
fine —— fin
er
——
fin
est
large
—— larg
er
——
larg
est
3)
重读闭音节词末尾只有一个辅音字母
时，先双写
这个辅音字母
，
再
加
-er
或
-est
。
如
:
big – bigger – biggest
thin
– thinner – thinnest
4)
以“辅音字母
+ y”
结尾的双音节词，先改
y
为
i
，
再
加
-er
或
-est
。如
：
easy
– easier – easiest happy – happier – happiest
5)
多音节词和部分双音节词在词前加
more
或
most
。
如：
delicious — more delicious — most delicious
interesting — more interesting — most interesting
important — more important — most important
2.
构成的不规则变化
:
e.g.
good / well
– better – best
bad / badly/ill
– worse – worst
many / much
– more – most
little
– less – least
far –
farther / further – farthest/ furthest
old
-older/elder-oldest/eldest
讲述
两者有
差异
，
第
一个人物超过第二个
人物
时用比较级
。
基
本句型
：
主语
(‘A’)+
谓语动词
+
形容词
/
副词比较级
+than+
主语
(‘
B
’)+…
e.g. A modern train is
faster than
a car.
现代的火车比轿车快多了。
This
book didn’t cost me
more than
that one.
这本书花费我的钱不比那本多。
比较级的用法
在形容词比较级前还可用
much, even, still, far
a
little
来修
饰
，
表
示“
……
的多”，
“
甚至
……”,
“
更
……”,
“……
一些”。
e.g. This city is
much
more beautiful than before.
She’s
a little
more outgoing than me.
It’s
a little
colder today.
“
比较级＋
and
＋比较级”意为“越来越
……”
多音节比较级用“
more and more
＋形容词原级”
形式。如：
►
It’s getting
worse and worse
.
►
The group became
more and more
popular.
“
Which
/ Who is +
比较级
…
？”
比
较
A
、
B
两事物
,
问
其中哪一个较
……
时用此句型。如：
Which
T-shirt is nicer, this one or that one?
Who is
more active, Mary or Kate?
Which one is
more popular among students,
going
to
concerts
or going to movies
?
the+
比较级
...
，
the+
比较级
... “
越
...,
越
...”
eg.The more,the better.
The harder you work,the better grades you'll get.
Ex. __________you're,________mistakes you'll make.
A.The careful,the less
B.The
more careful,the less
C.The
more carefully,the fewer
D.The more careful,the fewer
✔
使用形容词比较级时需注意以下几点：
1
）
than
后面接代词时
,
一般要用主格形式，但在口语中也
可使用宾格形式。
如：
►
My brother is taller than I/me.
2
）
当需要表示一方超过另一方的程度时，可以用
much,
a lot, a little, a bit, even, still
等来修饰形容词比较级。
注意
:
比较级不能用
very, so, too, quite
等修饰。如：
►
He is
much more serious than
Sam.
3
）形容词比较级后面往往用连词
than
连接另一个比较的
人或事物
,
但在上下文明确的情况下
,
形容词比较级可单
独使用。如：
►
My
sister is tall, but my aunt is
taller
.
我姐姐个子高
,
但我姑姑个子更高。
4
）进行比较的人和物必须是同一类。
►
My books
are more than
yours.
►
I
have more books than
you
.
Use the words to write questions and
answers.
1
. Julie / tall / you
Q
: _______________________
A
: No, she
isn’t
.
She’s
________ than me.
2
. Jack / run / fast / Sam
Q
: ____________________________
A
: No, he doesn’t. He runs______ than Sam.
Is Julie as tall as you?
taller
Does Jack run faster than Sam?
slower
3a
3. your cousin / outgoing / you
Q:____________________________
A: No, she isn’t. She’s
___________
__
than me.
4. Paul / funny/
Carol
Q
: _____________________________
A
: No, he isn’t. He’s
___________
__
than
Carol.
Is your cousin more outgoing than you?
more serious
Is Paul as funny as Carol?
more funnier
1
. Are you taller?
2
.
Are
you funnier?
___________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
Yes, I am. I’m taller now than I was
two years
ago.
Yes, I am. I’m funnier now than I was two
years
ago.
3b
Think of yourself two years ago. Write about how you are different now.
Yes, I am. I’m more outgoing now than I
was two years ago.
Yes, I do. I study English harder now
than I did two years ago.
Yes, I do. I sing better now than I did two
years ago.
3. Are you more outgoing?
4. Do you study English harder?
5. Do you sing better?
Compare
your parents. Check (√)
who is smarter
, funnier, etc. in the chart.
Then ask
your partner about his / her parents.
A: Who is smarter, your mother or your
father
?
B: I think my mother is smarter than
my
father.
3c
Mother
Father
smart
funny
work
hard
outgoing
friendly
sing well
√
old→ fat→ young→ ugly→
high→ low→
light→ white→ sunny→ hot→
cool→
older
fatter
younger
uglier
higher
lower
lighter
whiter
sunnier
hotter
cooler
Exercises
I.
将下列形容词变成比较级形式：
II.
词汇。
1. I’m short but my sister is ________(short).
2. My mother has long hair, and my sister has
________ (long) hair.
3.This little baby is _________________(outgoing)
than that one.
shorter
longer
more outgoing
4. In some ways we look the same, but in some
ways we look ____________(
不同
).
5. Ann is a very _______(
安静的
) girl, she hardly
makes noise.
different
quiet
1. The twins ______ lovely girls.
A. are all B. are both C. both are
2. I like drawing and I am good _____ it.
A. in B. on C. at
3. That box is _______ than others.
A. more
heavier
B
.
heavy C
. much heavier
III.
单项选择。
B
C
C
4. She is three years _______ than I am.
A. old B. more old
C
. older
5. I think a good friend should make
me ____.
A. l
augh
B. laughing
C
. to laugh
C
A
6
. Lucy is very short, but she is ___ than her sister.
A
. shorter
B
. longer
C
. taller
D. older
7
. Frank is ____ friendly than his brother.
A
. a little more
B
. a few more
C
. much
D
. a little
8
. Sam is ____at Chinese than Jim.
A
. good
B
. well
C
. better
D
. gooder
C
A
C
9
. This one is too large.
Can you show me a
_____
one?
A. larger
B. large
C. small
D. smaller
10
.
—Do
you think March is ____than January?
—
Yes
,
i
t’
s
_
___ warmer.
A.
better, a little
B
. well, much
C. worse, very D. nicer, quite
D
A
IV.
翻
译
句
子。
1.
刘英是我朋友，她比
我
外向一点。
2.
安跳舞跳的比丽萨好。
3.
我认为她唱歌比丽丽好。
Ann dances better than Lisa.
Liu Ying is my friend. She’s a little more outgoing than me.
I think she sings better than Lily.
4.
在学校里谁更用功？
Who’s more hard-working at school?
5.
琳达跟杰克一样用功吗？
Does Linda work as hard as Jack?
6.
你比你姐姐更外向吗？
Are you more outgoing than your sister?
7.
我认为莉莉比她姐姐更聪明。
I think Lily is
smarter than
her sister.
一
What do you think of
English?
一
I think English is as
_____
as Chinese.
A.useful
B.more useful C.the most useful
中考链接
as…as
和
……
一样，中
间用形容词原
级。
A
– Paul, do you prefer weekdays or weekends?
– Weekdays, of course.I’m
_____
on weekends.
busy B. much
busier
C
. more busier
D
. the busiest
由句意可知，
Paul
更喜欢
工作
日，因为周末更忙。故选比较级。
B
1. Make an adjective word list including
all the adjective words you know.
2. Write a short passage to compare you
and your best friend.
Homework
Section B 1a-1e
To learn to talk about important personal traits in a friend.
To learn to listen for the details.
To learn new words
:
talented, truly, care about…
Objectives
A friend in need is a friend indeed.
患难见真情。
A faithful friend is hard to find.
知音难觅。
Be slow in choosing a friend;
slower in changing.
选择朋友要慎重，改换朋友更要慎重。
Lead-in
Do you have a friend?
Who’s your friend?
Why do you choose him/her as your friend?
Discuss
Is he a good friend?
When you fight with others, he helps you fight.
When you are tired, he does homework for you.
When you are thirsty, he gives you a cup of tea.
When you meet a thief, he runs away quickly.
Free talk
A good friend …
__ a. has cool clothes.
__ b.
is talented in
music.
__ c. likes to do the same things as me.
__ d. is good at sports.
__ e.
truly cares about
me.
__ f. makes me laugh.
__ g. is a good listener.
What kinds of things are important in a friend? Rank the things below [1-7] (1 is the most important).
1a
在
...
方面有天赋
关心，在意
__ has cool clothes.
__ is talented in music.
__ likes to do the same
things as me.
__ is good at sports.
__ truly cares about me.
__ makes me laugh.
__ is a good listener.
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
Match pictures with their meanings.
A : I think a good friend
makes me laugh.
B : For me, a good friend likes to
do the same things as me.
C : Yes, and a good friend is talented in music
, too.
D : That’s
not very important for me ...
Talk about what you think a good friend should be like.
1b
Like about their best friends
The same as
their
best friends
Different from their best friends
Molly
Molly studies harder.
Mary
They’re
both tall .
Lisa is quieter .
Peter likes to do the same things.
popular,
good at sports
a good listener
Listen. What do Molly and Mary like about their
best friends? Fill in the first column of the chart.
1c
The same as best friends
Different from best friends
Molly
Mary
Molly studies harder. Peter plays baseball better than Molly. Peter speaks more loudly. Molly is a little quieter.
They’re both tall.
They both have long, curly hair.
Lisa is quieter.
Lisa is smarter.
Mary is more outgoing.
is popular; is good at sports; They’re both pretty outgoing.
Listen again. How are Molly and Mary the same
and different from their best friends? Complete
the rest of the chart in 1c.
1d
Challenge
Complete the passage using the information in 1c,1d.
Molly's best friend is Peter. They are both _______and good at_______.But Molly studies ________than Peter.Peter plays basketball______than Molly. Though they are both outgoing,Peter speaks ____________than Molly and Molly is
a little ________.
Mary's best friend is Lisa because Lisa is a good ________.They are both _______and have__________hair. But Lisa is _______
and _________.Mary is_________________.
popular
sports
harder
better
more loudly
quieter
listener
tall
long,curly
quieter
smarter
more outgoing
Talk about Molly and Mary and their best friends.
A: Molly studies
harder
than
her best friend.
B: Well, Mary and her best friend are both tall.
1e
Think about four sentences to describe the same or different things between you and your best friend. One sentence should give the false information and the other three should give the correct information.
The class will guess who she/he is and which sentence gives the false information.
Let’s play a game!
1. ...truly
cares about
me
.
真正地在乎我。
care about v.
担心 。相当于：
be worried, be interested
指：忧虑、担心、关心、惦念
►
Do not you care about anybody?
你难道谁也不关心吗？
►
I really care about my work.
我真的关心我的工作。
Language points
2. I think a good friend
makes
me laugh.
make sb. do sth.
让
(
使
)
某人做某事
(make
后跟不带
to
的不定式
)
►
His words
made
us feel so exciting.
►
The boss
made
the workers work all day
and all night.
3. A good friend is a good
listener
.
listener
本意是“ 听者；听众”，根据语境
a good
listener
应译为“ 作为一个好朋友应当乐于倾听朋友的倾诉”。
类似词语还有 ：
说话者
speaker
4. Peter
likes to do
the same things,
like to do sth
喜欢偶尔做某事
like doing sth
喜欢经常做某事，或个人爱好
如“
Do you like reading?
”你爱好读书吗？
like + to do
表示想做什么事情，类似于
want
，
如“
Do you like to go with me?
”
表示现在愿不愿意去做某事。
I.
句型转换。
1. Peter is thinner than Sam. (
同义句转换
)
2. My sister is better at study than I.
She is clever. (
同义句转换
)
Sam is fatter than Peter.
My sister is much smarter than me at study.
Exercises
3. I study science very well. (
同义句转换
)
4. Miss Li is popular in our class. Mr.
Wang is more popular.(
同义句转换
)
I am very good at science.
Mr. Wang is more popular than Miss Li in our class.
II.
用比较级形式填空。
1.Tom’s bike is new, but John’s bike is ______.
2.Tom’s schoolbag is big, but John’s schoolbag is _______.
3.Tom’s house is small, but John’s house is even _______.
4.Tom’s coat is long, but John’s coat is even _________.
5.Tom’s desk is good, but John’s desk is ________.
newer
bigger
smaller
longer
better
6. He is ________ (young) than I am.
7. Mr. Smith is much _____ (old) than his wife.
8. Chicago is ______ (big) than Paris.
9. This book is ______ (good) than that one.
10. The weather this winter is _______ (bad) than that of
last winter.
younger
older
bigger
better
worse
III.
翻译句子。
1.
对我来说，好朋友喜欢做我喜欢的事。
2.
我认为一个好朋友能让我笑口常开。
3.
你的好朋友跟你有什么不同吗？
I think a good friend makes me laugh.
For me, a good friend likes to do the same things as me.
Is your best friend different from you in any way?
3.
我最好的朋友莉莉在音乐方面很有天分。
My best friend Lily is talented in music.
4.
我们的父母是真的关心我们。
Our parents truly care about us.
5.
我喜欢丽萨，因为她是一位很好的聆听者。
I like Lisa because she is a good listener.
—Mike plays the drums so wonderfully!
—Of course. He is_____than any other
students in his class.
A. talented B. more talented
C. less talented D. the most talented
中考链接
由句意“比班里任意一个其他的学生都有才能”可知，要用比较级。
B
Homework
Write about you and your best friend …
What do you like about him/her?
The same things between you.
The differences between you.
Section B 2a-2e
To learn to talk about important personal traits in a friend.
To learn to write something about you and your friends.
To learn new words
:
serious, necessary, should, as long as, be different from, in fact,the same as…
Objectives
Which is long
er
,
the yellow one or the red one?
The yellow one is long
er
than the red one.
Warming up
Which is bi
gg
er
,
the mouse or the elephant?
The elephant is bi
gg
er
than the mouse.
[‘bɪ
g
ə
]
Which is small
er
,
the mouse or the elephant?
The mouse is small
er
than the elephant.
Which is h
ea
v
i
er
,
the fox or the bird?
The fox is h
ea
v
i
er
than the bird.
Write the comparative forms of the following adjectives. Then use them to write five sentences about you and your friends.
popular____________ funny ________
quiet ________
friendly ________
shy
___________
serious ____________
outgoing ___________ smart ________
hard-working
__________________
more popular
quieter
shyer/ shier
more outgoing
funnier
friendlier
smarter
more hard-working
more serious
2a
Think about four sentences to describe the same or different things between you and your best friend.
One sentence should give the false information and the other three should give the correct information.
The class will guess who she/he
is and which sentence gives the false information.
Let’s play a game!
Sample:
My friend David is more hard-working than me, but I am funnier than him.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______
write the rest sentences by yourself.
Should friends be the same or different? Read about what these people think. Underline the comparative words and phrases in the passage.
My mother told me a good friend is
like a mirror. I
’
m quieter and more
serious than most kids. That
’
s why
I like reading books and I study
harder in class. My best friend
Yuan Li is quiet too, so we
2b
enjoy studying together. I
’
m shy so it
’
s not easy for me to make friends. But I think friends are like books
—
you don
’
t need a lot of them as long as they
’
re good.
It
’
s not necessary to be the same.
My best friend Larry is quite
different from me. He is taller
and more outgoing than me.
We both like sports, but he plays tennis better, so he always wins. However, Larry often helps to bring out the best in me. So I
’
m getting better at tennis. Larry is much less hard-working, though. I always get better grades than he does, so maybe I should help him more.
I don
’
t really care if my friends are
the same as me or different. My
favorite saying is,
“
a true friend
reaches for your hand and touches
your heart.
”
My best friend Carol is really kind and very funny. In fact, she
’
s funnier than anyone I know. I broke my arm last year but she made me laugh and feel better. We can talk about and share everything. I know she cares about me because she
’
s always there to listen.
Match people with their opinions.
A good friend is like a mirror.
Friends are like books — you don’t need a lot of them as long as they’re good.
My best friend helps to bring out the best in me.
A true friend reaches for your hand and touches your heart.
Jeff Green
Huang Lei
Mary Smith
Fill in the chart with the information given in the article.
Name
Opinion
The same as his/her friend
Different from his/her friend
Jeff
Green
Huang
Lei
Mary Smith
A good friend
is like a mirror.
They are
quiet and
study hard.
Jeff is quieter and more serious than most kids.
It’s not
necessary to
be same.
They both
like sports.
Larry is more
outgoing and taller
Than Huang Lei.
She doesn’t care if
her friends are
the same as
her or different.
Carol is
funnier
than anyone.
1. Jeff is less serious than most kids.
2. Jeff and Yuan Li are both quiet.
3. Jeff thinks it is easy for him to make friends.
4. Huang Lei is taller than Larry.
F
T
F
F
Are the following statements true (T) or false (F)?
2c
5. Huang Lei isn
’
t as good at tennis as Larry.
6. Larry works harder than Huang Lei.
7. Mary thinks her friends should be the same as her.
8. Carol broke her arm last year and Mary made her feel better.
F
T
F
F
How do you and your friends compare with the people in the article? Write five sentences.
I’m different from Jeff because I’m louder
than the other kids in my class. My best
friend is similar to Larry
because she’s
less hard-working than me.
2d
Which saying is your favorite? Which friend do you think about when you read this saying? Why? Tell your partner about it.
2e
1. A good friend is like a mirror.
2. Friends are like books- you don
’
t need a lot of them as long as they
’
re good.
3. My best friend helps to bring out the best in me.
4. A true friend reaches for your hand and touches your heart.
1.
That’s why
I like reading books and I study harder in class.
That’s why +
句子
“这便是为什么
……”
、“这就是
……
的原因” （固定的句式）
►
That’s why
he was late this morning.
这就是他今天早上迟到的原因。
Language points
2. … you don’t need a lot of them
as long as
they’re good.
字面意思：只要朋友好，你并不需要许多
→
(
朋友
)
不在多而贵在好
as long as
（固定搭配）连接句子，表示“只要
……”
►
We can talk about this
as long as
you want.
只要你想
(
谈
)
，我们就可以谈谈这事。
►
It’s fine
as long as
you’re happy.
只要你高兴就好。
3. I don’t really care
if
my friends are the same as me or different.
此句中
if
不是“如果”的意思，而是“是否”的
意思
►
I don’t care if he likes it or not --- I’m coming!
我不管他喜欢还是不喜欢
—
我会来的！
►
Can you tell me if I’m right, Mr. Green?
格林先生，您能告诉我我是否正确吗？
宾语从句
作
care
宾语
4. A true friend
reaches for your hand
and
touches your heart
.
hand
引申为“帮助；援助”
heart
则为 “情感；感受”
►
Can you
give me a hand
?
你能帮我一把吗？
►
The movie
touched the hearts
of all the people at the
cinema.
这部电影令所有在场的观众动容。
5. I know she cares about me because she
’s
always
there
to listen.
be there
：
(1)
“
在别人需要帮助时，刻准备伸手相助
”
(2)
“随叫随到；不离
……
左右”
(3)
be there
+ for somebody
►
My parents
were always there for me
when I was
growing up.
在我成长的过程中，我的父母总是随时给予我帮助。
6. My best friend helps to
bring out the best in me.
bring out
（习语）“使显现；使表现出”
bring out the best/worst in someone
“
把某人最好
/
最坏的一面表现或显露出来”
►
Take a look at your friendships. Do they
bring out
the best in
you?
审视一下你的友谊，他们让你表现出最好的自我了吗？
7.I
’
m quieter and more
serious
than most kids.
serious
adj.
严肃的；稳重的
常用短语：
be serious about
对
……
认真
eg:
Our English teacher,Miss Zhang
is very
serious
.
We should
be serious about
our jobs.
I.
翻译句子。
1.
她很风趣，而且比我更外向。但是，我们都喜欢做相同的事情。
She is very funny, and more outgoing than I am. But we both like doing the same things.
2.
那就是我喜欢读书的原因。
That’s why I like reading books.
Exercises
3.
我的老师总能让我表现出最好的自我。
My teacher can always bring out the best in me.
4.
在我有困难的时候，我的好朋友莉莉随时都能
给我帮助。
My best friend Lily is always there to help when
I’m in trouble.
5.
只要能做到这一点她就可以万事大吉。
As long as she did this, all would be well.
6.
我们不知道老师会不会参加班会。
We don’t know if our teachers will attend the
class meeting.
7.
充满爱与灵魂的故事往往能打动人们的心。
A story with love and soul can always touch
the heart.
8.
你为何不伸出援手？
Why you don’t reach for my hand?
中考链接
As middle school students, we_____
follow the public rules wherever we go
．
would B. should
C. might D. could
句意为“作为中学生，无论去哪我们都应该遵守公共规则。”
B
1.Write about the things that are the same and different between you and a friend.
2.Preview the new words and expressions.
Homework
Section B 3a-Self Check
Look at the following pictures,
let’s review the comparative forms.
smaller
bigger
bigger or smaller
smaller
bigger
bigger or smaller
stronger
thinner
stronger or thinner
Which is stronger? A or B?
Which is thinner? A or B?
A
B
heavier
thinner
heavier or thinner
It’s
smaller
.
It’s
shorter
.
It’s
bigger
.
It’s
heavier
.
It’s
longer
.
She
is
taller
.
He is
thinner
.
Who is taller?
Who is thinner?
a dog
a horse
Which is taller?
A horse is taller than a dog .
Who is tall
er
,
the father or the son
?
The father is
taller
th
a
n the son.
Who is short
er
, the father or the son?
The son is shorter
than
the father.
Name
Opinion
The same as his/her friend
Different from his/her friend
Jeff
Green
Huang
Lei
Mary Smith
A good friend
is like a mirror.
They are
quiet and
study hard.
Jeff is quieter and more serious than most kids.
It’s not
necessary to
be same.
They both
like sports.
Larry is more
outgoing and taller
Than Huang Lei.
She doesn’t care if
her friends are
the same as
her or different.
Carol is
funnier
than anyone.
Review
Wang
Lingling and Liu Lili are best friends. Look at the chart below and compare them.
Wang Lingling
Liu Lili
3a
Wang Lingling
Liu Lili
tall
tall
short straight hair
like reading
like sports
popular
outgoing
outgoing
serious
hard-working
long straight hair
popular
funny
smart
1.
阅读表格中的描述
2.
分析描述词的特点：用形容词还是用动词描述
3.
相似的地方，用
both
表达共同点；不同的地方
，
用
比较的句式表达
4.
试着写出这些句子
5.
检查答案
写作指导
Wang has long straight hair, Liu has short straight
hair
. Wang Lingling likes reading, but
Liu Lili
likes
sports.
They
are both popular in class. They’re
both
outgoing
. Wang Lingling is serious.
Liu
Lili is funnier than Wang Lingling. Wang is more
hard-working
than
Liu
, but Liu
is
smarter.
One possible version
Make
notes about two of your friends. One
friend
should be similar to you; the
other friend
should be different.
A friend who is similar to me
A friend who is different from me
Name:
Name:
3b
Write two paragraphs describing
your friends.
相似的方面
:
用
be both
或
likes
句式结构来描述
不同之处
:
用形容词或副词的比较级形式，用正确的句式对比两人的不同
A is more outgoing than B.
B works harder than A.
写作指导
3
c
My friend A is quite similar to me. We are both tall and
thin
. We are both quiet and
serious
. We like reading
together
. We are
hard-working
in class, so we often get
good
grades
.
My
friend B is different from me.
She’s
funnier and
more
outgoing
than me. She always speaks loudly. She is good at
soccer
. She’s smart and she’s a good
listener
.
One possible version
My friend A and I are similar
. Both of us like swimming and reading. We both go swimming at the weekends and then have lunch together. We often share many interesting books with each other. Both of us are interested in cartoon. So we’re good friends.
The other possible version
My friend B is quite different from me.
She
is more outgoing and more popular than me. She sings better and wins a school competition. Many “fans” are attracted by her. But B is much less hard-working. I always get better grades than she does. We help each other.
Read
the job ad. Then compare two of your
classmates
. Decide which classmate is better
for
the job.
Student
Helper Wanted
The English study Center needs a weekend
student
helper for
primary school
students.
4
小学
You must:
-be a middle school student
-have good grades in English
-be good with children
-be outgoing
Call
the English Study Center
at
443-5667 for more information.
call sb. at...
A: So who do you think should get the
job
,
Jenny
or Jill?
B: Well, Jenny is smarter. I think
she should
get
the job.
A: Jenny is smarter, but I think Jill is
more
outgoing
.
1 Put the words in the correct columns in the chart.
hard-working
run fast
quiet
serious
jump high
smart
what people are like
what people can
do
hard-working,
quiet,
serious, smart
run fast
jump high
Self Check
2 Fill in the blanks using the correct forms of the
words
in brackets.
My
brother is _________(funny) than me.
He
makes
people
laugh a lot.
I’m
outgoing, but my best friend
is a lot
________________
(outgoing
) than me.
funnier
more outgoing
3. My brother is as
____________(
serious
)
as
my
sister
.
They
both like to study.
4. My cousin can run __________(fast) than
me
. She
is taller
than me, too.
5. Jim is_________________ (friendly)
than Tom
, so
Tom has
more friends than Jim.
serious
faster
less friendly
e.g. The boss
makes
the workers
work
over 13
hours
a day.
1.
make sb. +
v.
“
让（使）某人
做某事
”。
make sb. +
adj.
“
让（使）某人
……
”
e.g. The teacher’s words
made
the boy
happy
.
Language points
2.
be good with.... “
善于应对
...”
He is good with the old people.
be good at... “
擅长
...”
Mary is good at English.
be good to... “
对
...
好
”=be friendly to...
She is a kind girl,she is always good to everyone.
quiet funny outgoing kind athletic
My friend likes sports. She’s very _______.
Paul is never _____ ! He can’t stop talking.
Lu Xiang is really ______. She is very good
at
math,
physics and
chemistry.
Mary is a ______ girl. She always makes me
laugh
.
5.
Jane
isn’t very _________ . She likes to stay
at
home and read.
athletic
quiet
smart
funny
outgoing
I.
根据句意从方框中
选择
单词填入句中。
Exercises
1. Seen from the mountain, the town looks
________________ (beautiful).
2. She has made far ________ (great) progress
this term than she did last year.
3. She is a head ________ (tall) than I.
4. This room is 3 times ________ (big) than that one.
more beautiful
greater
taller
bigger
II.
根据所给词的正确形式填空。
1. This
year they have produced
___grain __they did
last
year.
A.
as less; as B. as few; as
C. as few; as D. less; than
2. Which is
___
classroom, this classroom or
that
one?
A. bigger B. the bigger
C. a bigger
D
. bigger
D
B
III.
单项选择。
3. This apple
is ______
that one.
A. as big twice as B. as big as twice
C. as twice big as D. twice as big as
4. There are more books in our library
than ____.
A. theirs B. those in theirs
C. that in theirs D. those in their
D
B
5
. It is thought that the harder
________,
________
result you’ll get.
A
.
you
work; the better
B
.
you
will work; the more better
C
. you worked; a better
D
. you were working; more
better
A
1.
他比我大三岁。
2.
我喜欢像我妹妹那样的人。
3.
我像他一样强健。
Ⅳ.
翻译。
He is three years older than me.
I like someone who is like my sister.
I am as athletic as he is.
Ⅴ.
连词成句。
1. my, math, subjects, favorite, English, are, and
2. parents, his, teachers, both, are
3. he, little, a, outgoing, more, me, is, than
My favorite subjects are English and math
.
His parents are both teachers.
He is a little more outgoing than me.
1. Their room is ___ _____
_______ (
稍大点
)
than
yours.
2. I spend
___
____ ______(
多得多
) time on Chinese
than
other subjects.
3. Their life was becoming ______
___ _____ ______
(
越来越困难
).
a
little bigger
a
lot more
more and
more
difficult
Ⅵ.
根据汉语补全句子。
4. The days get ________
____
________
(
越来越短
).
5. She
wants to buy
_________ _______
(
一些
便宜的东西
).
s
horter and shorter
something cheap
中考链接
— I
know little about this product.
— Surf
the Internet, and you will get
much ______
about it.
A. information
B
. message
C
. suggestion
信息
A
消息
建议
句
意为“我对这个产品了解不多。
上网你会得到有关它的很多信息。”
Homework
1. Write something about your past and now.
2
. Think of your best friend. Write
down two ways in
which you are similar, and
two
ways in
which you
are different.
Use comparatives
.
unit 4
人教版八年级英语上册单元全套课件
What’s the best movie theater?
To learn to discuss preferences using superlatives.
To learn the usage of superlative.
To learn new words:
theater, comfortable, close, ticket, worse, comfortably…
Objectives
Good , better , best,
Never let it rest ,
Till good
be
better ,
And better best .
GOOD , BETTER, BEST
Chant
Bad , worse ,worst ,
Never fight against ,
Get better and better,
And you
’
ll be the best.
Review
This computer is
cheap
.
This computer is
cheaper
than
that one.
This one is
the cheapest
of all.
￥6999
￥4999
￥3999
The weather is
bad
.
The weather is
worse
.
The weather is
the worst
.
This car is
the
best
of the three.
good
better
This apple is
the biggest of all
.
big
bigger
10 yuan
20 yuan
50 yuan
This pen is
the most expensive
of the three.
expensive
more expensive
cinema
Where do you want to go ?Why?
theater
radio station
m
ovie theater
=
cinema
comfortable
seats
big screen
friendly service
Blue Moon
Super
Red Star
My house
300 m
400m
500m
is
close
to my home.
Red Star Cinema
Super Cinema
is
closer
to my home.
is
the closest
to my home.
Blue Moon Cinema
￥40
￥20
￥10
is
cheap
.
Super Cinema
Red star Cinema
is
cheaper
.
is
the cheapest
.
Blue Moon Cinema
is
popular
.
Blue Moon Cinema
Super Cinema
is
more popular.
is
the most popular.
Red star Cinema
has a
big
screen.
Super Cinema
Blue Moon Cinema
has a
bigger
screen.
has
the biggest
screen.
Red star Cinema
has
comfortable
seats.
Super Cinema
Blue Moon Cinema
has
more comfortable
seats.
has
the most comfortable
seats.
Red Star Cinema
How do you choose a cinema to go to?
Which is important? Which is not important?
comfortable
seats
big screen
friendly
service
new movies
distance from home
in a fun part
popular
cheap tickets
How do you choose what movie theater to
go to? Write the things in the box under
“Important” or “Not important”.
comfortable seats big screens best sound cheap new movies close to home buy tickets quickly popular
Important
Not Important
big screens
comfortable seats
best sound
popular
close to home
cheap
new movies
buy tickets quickly
1a
What is
the most important
for you in a movie theater?
A:
I think
comfortable seats
are
the most important
for me.
B:
For me
,
…
and
…
are the most important
in a movie
theater.
C: But I think
…
is the most important
.
D:
In my opinion
, I think
…
is the most important
.
Group work
Qualities
Movie Theater
It has the biggest screens.
It’s the most popular near here.
It’s the closest to home.
Town Cinema
It has the shortest waiting time.
It has the best sound.
It has the most comfortable seats.
Listen and match the statements with the
movie theaters.
Movie World
Screen City
Town Cinema
Screen City
Movie
World
1b
Can you show the answers
like this:
Movie World
has
the biggest screens.
Screen City is...
...
A: What
’
s
the best
movie theater?
B:
Sun
Cinema. It
’
s
the cheapest
.
C: But I think
Moon
Theater has
the most
comfortable seats.
D: For me, …
E
: In my opinion, …
Practice the conversation. Then talk about the movie theatres you know.
1c
Showtime Cinema. It
’
s the cheapest.
But I think Gold Theater has the most comfortable seats.
What
’
s the best movie theater?
Talk about the theaters in your town
It has
the biggest
screens.
It
’
s
the most popular
.
It
’
s
the closest to
home.
It
’
s
the cheapest
.
It has
the friendliest
service.
It has
the most comfortable
seats.
I.
写出下列单词的比较级和最高级。
1. good
2. comfortable
3. big
4. happy
5. cheap
6. many
7. difficult
8. little
better
best
more
comfortable
most
comfortable
bigger
biggest
happier
happiest
cheaper
cheapest
more
most
more
difficult
most
difficult
less
least
Exercises
1. Lily gets up ______ (early) than Lucy.
2. Which goes __________ (slowly), Tom or Jim?
3.This book is _______________ (interesting) than that one.
earlier
more slowly
more interesting
II.
根据所给词的适当形式填空。
4. She works ________________ (careful) in her
school.
5. Who goes to bed_________ (late) Jim, Tom or Jack?
6. I think turkey is ________________ (delicious) of all.
the most carefully
the latest
the most delicious
III.
翻译句子。
1.
电影世界
(Movie World)
有最舒服的座位。
2.
最好的电影院是哪个？
What’s the best movie theater?
Movie World has the most comfortable seats.
3. Screen City
是离家最近的电影院。
4.
我喜欢
Town Cinema
，因为它有最大的屏幕。
I like Town Cinema, because it has the biggest screen.
Screen City is the closest to home.
中考链接
— This T-shirt is a bit expensive for me.
— But this is ______one in our shop, sir.
A. cheap B. cheaper C. the cheapest
句意为“
—
这件
T
恤对我来说有点贵。
—
但是先生这是我们店里最便宜的。”选择最高级。
C
Homework
Make conversations with your partner
About your favourite cinema and why
you like it best.
Section A 2a-2d
To learn to discuss preferences using superlatives.
To learn the usage of superlative.
To learn new words:
worst, cheaply, choose, carefully, reporter,fresh, comfortably…
Objectives
￥
200
￥
380
￥
430
better
good
best
Warming up
bad
worse
worst
Listen to a reporter interview
ing
a boy. Circle the
boy’s answers.
Green City Survey
1.Which is the best clothes store?
Miller’s
Blue Moon
c. Dream Clothes
2.Which is the best radio station?
a. 970AM
b. 97.9FM
c. 107.9FM
2a
Listen again. Write the correct store or radio station next to each statement.
Clothes Stores
_____________It’s the most expensive.
_____________ It has the best clothes.
_____________ It’s the worst store.
________You can buy clothes the most cheaply there.
Miller’s Blue Moon Dream Clothes
Blue Moon
Dream Clothes
Miller’s
Miller’s
2b
970 AM
97.9 FM
107.9 FM
___________ It has the worst music.
___________ They play the most boring songs.
___________ The DJs choose songs the most carefully.
___________ It’s the most popular.
107.9 FM
970 AM
97.9 FM
97.9 FM
Radio stations
Listen again,complete the passage.
Miller's is the best clothes store in Green City.It has __________ clothes and you can buy clothes
_______________.Blue Moon is ________________.And
Dream Clothes is _______than
Blue Moon .It has _________service in town.
107.9FM is the best radio station in town. The DJs choose songs________________.
They always play __________________music.But 970AM
has ________music.97.9FM plays _____________songs.
the best
the most cheaply
the most expensive
worse
the worst
the most carefully
the most interesting
the worst
the most boring
Student A, you are the reporter. Student B, you are the boy. Role-play a conversation using the information in 2a and 2b.
A: Hello! I
’
m a reporter.
Can I ask you some questions?
B: Sure.
A:
What
’
s the best / the worst clothing store in town?
B: I think
Miller’
s is
the best
…
/ ...is
the worst
.
A:
Why do you think so?
B:
Well Miller’
s has
……
.
2c
Language points
1.worst /
wɜ:st
/
adj.&adv.
最差（的）；
最坏（的）；最糟（的）
worst
是形容词
bad
，
ill
及副词
badly
的最高级。
worse
是形容词
bad
，
ill
及副词
badly
的比较级。
eg
：
I think John's homework is the worst.
Her writing is worse than her sister.
2.cheaply /'tʃi:pli/
adv.
便宜地
eg
：
She bought the house
cheaply
last year.
She bought a
cheap
house last year.
cheap -cheaper-the cheapest
cheaply -more cheaply-the most cheaply
cheap adj“
便宜的”
3.choose /tʃuːz/
v.
选择，挑选
pt. chose
choose...from
从
……
中选择
choose...as
选
……
当
choose sb. to do sth.
挑选某人去做某事
固定搭配
choose (not) to do sth.
决定（不）做某事
eg: Can I
choose
a book
from
the bookshelf?.
They
chose
Cindy
as
their group leader.
I
choose to go
there by bus.
拓展：
n.choice“
选择”
,make a choice “
做出选择
”
。
eg. I believe you can make a right choice.
Role- play the conversation.
Greg: Hi, I’m Greg. I’m new in town.
Helen: Hi, I’m Helen. Welcome to the neighborhood!
How do you like it so far?
Greg: It’s fantastic, but I still don’t really know my way
around.
Helen: Well, the best supermarket is on Center Street.
You can buy the freshest food there.
2d
Greg: Oh, great. Is there a cinema around there?
I love watching movies.
Helen: Yes, Sun Cinema is the newest one. You can
sit the most comfortably
because they have the
biggest seats.
Greg: Thanks for telling me.
Helen: No problem.
1. Role play the conversation
in groups;
2. Role play the conversation
in front of the class
Let’s see which group does the best.
Role-play
Greg is ____ in town. he doesn’t know his way _______. Helen is telling him some information now: The ____ supermarket is on Center Street. You can buy ___ _______ food there. The ______ cinema around here is Sun Cinema. You can sit ___ _____ ___________ because they have ___ _______ seats.
new
around
best
the freshest
newest
the most
Fill in the blanks According to the conversation.
comfortably
the
biggest
Talk about the supermarkets, restaurants, … around us from service, quality and prices.
Let’s see which group is the best!
Ready?
Teamwork
parks
supermarkets
hotels
food
people
stores
restaurants
Welcome to Shanhai!
— Do you want to go to the supermarket?
— Sure.
— I’ll go, too.
— OK, great. What’s the best supermarket
to go to?
— … supermarket. It has the friendliest service.
— I think … supermarket is the closest to home.
— …
For example:
1.
It
’s the closest
to home.
close adj.
靠近的
be close to
离
……
近，
形容词最高级前经常加定冠词
the
。
close
也可作动词，意为关上
/
闭上
。
►
我们的新房子离学校很近。
►
请关门。
Our new house
is close to
the school.
Close
the door, please.
Language points
close
作形容词
：
1. His
house is
close
to the factory.
他家
靠近
该厂
。
（
近
的
，
接近的
）
2. She
is a
close
friend of theirs.
她是他们的
挚友
。
（关系
）
密切
的
,
亲密的
3. They
live in
close
quarters.
他们的住房
狭小
。
紧密
的
;
狭窄的
;
紧身的
close
作及物动词
：
1. She
closed
the door softly
.
她轻轻地关上门。
（关闭；盖上；合上）
2. The street has been
closed
for two days.
这条街已被封闭两天了。
关
(
商店等
)
；封闭
(
道路等）
close
作不及物动词
：
1. The door
closes
quietly
.
这门关起来不发出什么声音。
（
关闭；盖上；合上
）
2. The post office
closes
at 6.
邮局六点关门。
（商店等）关门，打烊
3. At eleven the conference
closed
.
十一时大会结束。
（结束）
2.
Welcome to
the neighborhood!
welcome to
是固定短语，其后常跟地点名词表示欢迎到某地。
►
欢迎来到我的家。
►
欢迎到我们厂参观。
Welcome to
our factory.
Welcome to
my home.
3.
Thanks for telling
me.
thanks for doing sth.
因做某事而感谢某人
►
谢谢你提醒我。
►
多谢您借钱给我。
Thanks for
reminding
me.
Thanks for
lending
me the money.
4.
Is there a cinema
around here?
around here
附近
►
我喜欢这儿的周围邻里。
►
这附近哪儿有公共汽车站？
I love the neighborhood
around here
.
Where’s a bus station
around here
?
—What’s the
best
movie theater?
—Sun Cinema. It’s the
cheapest
.
—Moon Theater has
the most comfortable
seats.
—You can buy
the freshest
food there.
—
Thank you for
telling me.
Summary
I.
写出下列词的最高级。
big _______
short _______
cheap ________
bad/badly _____
fresh ________
close _____
good/well _____
new ______
cheaply ___________
carefully __________
popular ____________
expensive _____________
boring ___________
shortest
biggest
worst
cheapest
most popular
most carefully
newest
best
freshest
most cheaply
closest
most boring
most expensive
Exercises
II.
单项选择。
1. The yellow shoes are _______ than the blue ones.
A. expensive B. expensiver C. more expensive
2. A cow is ________ bigger than a mouse.
A. much B. more C. many
3. Who’s the _______, Jean, Joan or Jennet?
A. thinner B. thinest C. thinnest
4. I’m taller than others in my class. I’m _______.
A. tall B. tallest C. the tallest
5. My bike is ______, but his bike is ______.
A. new; new B. new; newer C. new; newest
6. —Which is ______ season in Beijing?
—I think it’s autumn.
A. good B. better C. the best
7. The Yellow River is one of ______ rivers in China.
A. long B. longer C. the longest
1. Town Cinema
不拥挤，它有最友好的服务。
2.
我认为她是最有创造力的演员。
3. 97.9FM
是最流行的电台。
97.9FM is the most popular radio station.
Town Cinema isn’t crowed and it has the friendliest service.
I think she is the most creative actress.
III.
翻译下列句子。
中考链接
Of all the students in my class
，
Lily studies _____.
most carefully B. carefully
C. more carefully
句意为“在我们班所有的学生们里，
Lily
学习最认真。”有明确范围，副词要用最高级。
A
Write a short passage about your survey of supermarkets in your city.
Homework
Section A Grammar Focus-3c
To learn to make comparisons using
superlatives.
To learn new words:
worse, service, pretty, menu, act, meal
…
Objectives
friendly
sing well
hard-working
popular
thin
talented
smart
funny
A: Who
sings (the
) best
in your
class
?
A: Who is
the thinnest in
your class
?
B: I think …
I want to know you!
is the
________mountain
in the world.
What mountain is 8,844.43 meters high
in China?
Qomolangma
high
est
is the _______
river in China.
long
est
The Yangtze River
Read and guess.
are ______ ______ ________
of
all the animals in China.
the
most
famous
Pandas
They are fat and cute, black and white. They only live in China and are more famous than any other
animal
to Chinese. People over the world love them and we’re doing our best to look after them.
Think and guess
.
It begins at Chang’an.
This is an old trading road.
is the _______trading
route in the world.
The main product is silk.
old
est
The Silk Road
Plan
a trip along the Silk Road using
the
new language.
China is an amazing country. It has the world’s _______ (high) mountains. The Yangtze River is its _______(long). Pandas are
the
___________ (famous) of all the animals in our country. The Silk Road is
the
____
___(
old) trading road to the world. When we plan a trip, making choices doesn’t mean to choose
the
____
___
__(good) or
the
_______________(expensive) one, but
the
__________ (proper) one.
best
most expensive
most proper
highest
longest
most famous
oldest
Linda
Nancy
Kate
Linda is __________ girl of the three.
Kate is ___________ girl of the three.
the tallest
the shortest
Look and say
￥
50.00
￥
100.00
￥
150.00
The purple bag is __________________ one of all the bags.
The green bag is ____________ one of all the bags.
the cheapest
the most expensive
Look and say
Is Tom
smarter
than Sam?
No, he isn
’
t. Sam is
smarter
than Tom.
Is Tara
more outgoing
than Tina?
No, she isn
’
t. Tina is
more outgoing
than Tara.
Are you
as friendly as
your sister?
No, I
’
m not. I
’
m
friendlier.
Does Tara work
as hard as
Tina?
Yes, she does
.
Who
’
s
more hard-working
at school?
Tina thinks she works
harder
than me.
Grammar Focus
1.
用法：英语中三者或三者以上相比较，表示“最
……”
这样的最高程度概念时，要用 “
the+
最高级” 的结构表示。这种句式一般带有表示比较的介词短语，比如
: in our class, of the three
等。
例如
: Wang
Lin is the tallest in our class.
This
theater is the cheapest of the three.
注意使用最高级时应注意以下几点：
形容词的最高级
(1)
表示 “最
……
之一” 的句式，要用
one of the +
形容词最高级
+
复数名词。
例如：
Jingjiang Hotel is one of the biggest hotels in our city.
Lisa is one of my best friends.
(2)
当最高级前面有物主代词或名词所有格
时
，
不
加定冠词
the
。
例如：
Tom is Lucy’s best friend.
Tuesday is her busiest day.
(3)
最高级前可加序数词。
eg.The Yellow River is the second longest river in
China
.
(4)
形容最高级修饰作表语或介词宾语的名词，代词时
，
被
修饰的词往往省略。
eg.He is the laziest (student) in
our class
.
(5)
形容最高级用在选择疑问句中，
结构为：
Who/Which...,A,B or C?
Who is the best English teacher,Mr.Zhang,Miss Li or Miss Wang
？
2.
形容词比较级和最高级的构成
规则变化
一般情况下，单音节或双音节的形容词比较级直接加
-er,
最高级直接加
-est
。
如：
clever—cleverer—cleverest cheap—cheaper—cheapest
few—fewer—fewest small—smaller—smallest
young—younger—youngest
b.
以
-e
结尾的形容词，比较级
+ -r,
最高级
+ -st
。
如：
large—larger—largest
nice—nicer—nicest
cute—cuter—cutest
c.
以辅音字母
+y
结尾的形容词，变
y
为
i +er
或
+
est
busy—busier—busiest
heavy—heavier—heaviest
easy—easier—easiest happy—happier—happiest
dirty—dirtier—dirtiest
d.
以重读闭音节结尾，末尾只有一个辅音字母结 尾的词，双写最后一个辅音字母，再加
+er
或
+est
。
如：
big—bigger—biggest thin—thinner—thinnest
fat—fatter—fattest
hot—hotter—hottest
e.
多音节和部分双音节形容词，需在原级前
+more
构成比较级，
+ most
构成最高级。
important—more important—most important beautiful—more beautiful– most beautiful
difficult—more
difficult—most difficult
3.
不规则变化：
原级
比较级
最高级
good
/well
better
best
bad /ill/badly
worse
worst
little
less
least
many /much
more
most
far
farther /further
farthest /furthest
old
older /elder
oldest /eldest
最高级规则变化口诀：
最高级，很容易，一般词尾加est
。(
cheap-the cheapest)
词尾若有哑音
e
，
直
接就加st
。(
close-the closest)
重读闭音节， 单辅音字母要双写
。(
big-the biggest)
辅音字母加
y
，
记
得把y变为i
。(
friendly-the friendliest)
多音节，考考你，the most到底加哪里？
(popular-the most popular)
复习：形容词
最高级
的构成
A:
tall
short
quick
thick
light
cool
warm
quiet
wild
calm
-- est
B:
heavy easy tidy dry busy happy healthy hungry early
y
--
i-- est
C:
large
late
nice
-- st
big
gest
D:
big
hot
hot
test
thin “
双写”
thin
nest
wet
wet
test
fat
fat
test
1.We are going to
the Green Restaurant
for lunch.
(划线部分提问)
____________ you going for lunch?
2. Sam is the shortest in his class. (改为同义句)
Sam is ________ than ___
_
_
____ student in his class.
Sam is _______ than _____ _____ students in his class.
Sam is _______ than______
__
______ in his class.
3. How do you like Screen City? (改为同义句)
_______ do you __________ Screen City?
Where are
shorter
any other
What
think of
shorter
the
other
anyone else
shorter
练习：改写句子。
Fill
in the blanks with the correct forms of the words in brackets.
1.We went to the _______(bad) restaurant in town last night.
The menu
had only 10 dishes and the service was not good at all!
2.Blue Moon is _______ (good), but Miller’s is ________
(
good) in town.
3.The Big Screen is__________________
(
expensive) than most cinemas, but Cinema City is_____________________
(
expensive).
worst
good
the best
more
expensive
the most expensive
3a
4
. Movie
City has the ________ (bad) service,
but
we can sit the____________________
(
comfortably) there.
5
. Johnny
Depp acted the _____ (good) in
that
movie. He’s much _________ (
good) than
others at finding the
__________________
(interesting) roles.
worst
most comfortably
best
most interesting
better
Think of three stores in your town and fill in the chart. Then
write six sentences using the information in the chart.
Service
best:
worst:
Quality
best:
worst:
Prices
cheapest:
most expensive:
A: I think
Great
World has the best service.
B: I think
Cool
House has the worst quality.
3b
Where are we going for lunch
?
Think of three
places to have lunch near your school. Write the
information in the chart. Then decide on the best
place to have lunch.
3c
Restaurants
Danny’s
How much is a meal?
How far is it from school?
10 minutes by bus
Is the service good?
Is the food good?
A: Danny
’
s is the closest. Let
’
s go there.
B: No, it
’
s the most expensive. I think we
should
go
to
…
I.
根据要求写出单词。
1. bad (
比较级
）
2. do (
过去式
）
3. best (
原级
）
4. expensive(
反义词
）
5
. big (
最高级
）
6
. report (
名词
）
7. friend (
形容词
）
8. beach
（复数
）
9. quiet (
反义词
）
10. store
（同义词
）
worse
did
good/well
cheap
biggest
reporter
friendly
beaches
noisy
shop
Exercises
3. Lin Sen is
_______________________
in the
class
because he never gets to school on time.
（
最懒的学生之一）
4. Edison was
_________________________in
the world.
(
最伟大的发明家之一）
one of the laziest student
s
one of the greatest inventor
s
The Yangtze River is
________________river
in the world
.
(
第三长河）
the third longest
2. The Atlantic is
________________ocean
in the world.
(
第二大洋）
the second biggest
II.
翻译句子。
1.Hainan is a very large Island .It is the second _________
island
in
China
. (large)
2.
Our teacher is as ______ as before. (
busy
).
3.He is
__________________
among us. (
careful
)
4.Li Lei jumped far ______ than Jim. (
far
)
5.The busier he is, the ________ he feels. (
happy
)
6.I think Yao Ming is one of ____________ basketball
players
in NBA. (
hot
)
busy
the most careful
farther
happier
largest
the hottest
III.
完成句子。
LeBron James is one of
_______
players in the NBA. He is my
hero.
better B. the best
C. worse D. the worst
中考链接
由“他是我的英雄。”可知詹姆斯是最好的
NBA
队员之一。
one of
后面加形容词的最高级。
B
— Who runs
in your class?
—
Tom does. None of us can catch
him
in the race.
A. faster
B. slower
C
. fastest
D. slowest
由“没人能赶得上他。”可知
Tom
跑得最快。要选择
fast
的最高级。
C
Homework
1.Do
some exercise by using comparative and superlative
degree.
2.Write a composition about restaurants by using comparative and superlative degrees of adjectives and adverbs.
Section B 1a-1e
To learn to use the superlatives to describe people.
To learn new words:
creative, performer…
To find others' advantages and learn from them.
Objectives
This apple is __________ of all
.
This apple is ___________ of all
.
the smallest
the biggest
Linda
Nancy
Kate
Linda is __________ girl of the three.
Kate is ___________ girl of the three.
the tallest
the shortest
Look and say
Write these words and phrases next to their opposites in the chart.
funniest most creative quietest best
most boring
most creative
loudest
worst
most serious
quietest
best
funniest
1a
Tell your partner about people you
know. Use the words in 1a.
1b
most boring
most creative
loudest
worst
most serious
Talk about the pictures.
1c
Eliza ___ Vera ___ Steve ___
Dennis ____ The Math Teachers ___
Listen to people talking about a school talent show. Match the pictures with the performers.
d
a
e
c
b
1c
Listen again. What do the people say about
the performers? Fill in the chart with the adjectives you hear.
Names
What people say
Eliza
best,
Steve
Vera
Dennis
The Math Teachers
funniest
creative
, the most
creative
worst, terrible
loudest
excellent, great
1d
Describe the person using
the information in 1d:
1.Eliza was
the best
, She was an
excellent
and
great
piano player.
2. ...
...
Who was the best performer?
Eliza was the best performer.
Look at the information in 1d and make a conversation.
1e
Who was the funniest performer?
Steve was the funniest performer.
Hello, everyone! The talent show was very great. I think Eliza was the.... Steve
was the... . Vera was the.... Dennis was the... The math teachers were the...
Rewrite 1d and make a report.
1. This book is ____ of all.
A
. cheapest
B
. cheap
C
. cheaper
D
. the cheapest
2. He is much ____ than his brother.
A
. taller
B
. tall
C
. the tallest
D
. tallest
3. Li Lei is ____ older than Lucy.
A
. quite
B
. very
C
. much
D
.
more
I.
单选。
Exercises
C
A
D
4. This is one of ____ films of this year.
A. more exciting B. exciting
C. the most exciting D. most exciting
5. The weather in Beijing is colder than_____.
A. in Guangzhou
B. Guangzhou
C. that in Guangzhou
D. that from Guangzhou
C
C
6. Paul is very ____. He is ____than his brother .
A. heavy; heavier
B. heavy; heavy
C. heavier; heavier D. heavy; heavyer
7. It has the ______ clothing store in the town.
A. goodest
B. gooddest
C. best
D. better
8. This ruler is ____ than that one.
A. long
B. longer
C. the longest
D. longest
B
C
A
II.
用括号中形容词的适当形式填空。
1. I am very _______. But Tom is ____________than I .
Frank is _____________. (tired)
2. Which is _____________ (difficult), physics or biology?
3. This book is ______than the other two. It is________
of the three. (easy)
4. In summer it’s _______ (hot) in Wu Han than in Beijing.
5. The Chinese people have a much _______ (good) life now.
tired
more tired
the most tired
more different
easier
the easiest
hotter
better
III.
翻译句子。
1.
我妹妹是我认识的最有趣的人。
2. —
谁是最好的演奏者？
—
伊莱扎是最好的演奏者。
My sister is the funniest person I know.
—Who was the best performer?
—Eliza was the best performer.
IV.
用所给词的比较级或最高级填空。
1. Jean has a ______ (good) family than Mary.
2. The weather is _____ (bad) today than yesterday.
3. It’s _________________ (expensive) TV set in town.
4. Which do you think is ____________________
(interesting) film?
5. Jim is ____________ (funny) boy in our class.
better
worse
the most expensive
the most interesting
the
funniest
The artist is so ________ that he can make different changing pictures with sand.
common B. careless
C. creative D. helpful
中考链接
句意为“这位艺术家那么有创造力，他能用沙子做出不同变换的图片。”
C
普通的
有创造力的
粗心的
有帮助的
Write a short article about the
performers in 1c.
Last night’s talent show was great.
The
best
performer was
Eliza …
2. Preview the passage
Who’s Got Talent?
Homework
Section B 2a-2e
To learn to talk about the most talented person.
To read the passage about talent shows.
To learn new words
:
talent, beautifully, winner, everybody, seriously, all kinds of , play a role, for example…
Objectives
The Voice of China
Have you watched the talent shows?
What do you think of them?
Lead-in
状元成才路
I think…is the most
talented person.
What can he / she do?
He/She…
American Idol
Have you watched the talent shows?
What do you think of them?
China’s Got Talent
Have you watched the talent shows?
What do you think of them?
Have you watched the talent shows?
What do you think of them?
Britain’s Got Talent
Who’s the most talented person you know? What can he/she do? Tell your partner about this person.
2
a
A: I think
… is the most talented
person.
B: What can he /she do ?
A: He / she …
three
talent
shows
Which three talent shows are mentioned?
China’s Got Talent
Britain’s Got Talent
American Got Talent
Read the passage below. Which three talented shows are mentioned?
Who’s Got Talent?
Everyone is good at something, but some people are truly
talented
. It’s always interesting to watch other people show their
talents
. Talent shows are getting more and more popular. First, there were shows like
American Idol
and
American’s Got Talent
.
2b
All these shows
have
one thing
in common
: They try to look for the best singers, the most talented dancers, the most exciting
magicians
, the funniest actors and so on.
All kinds of
people join these shows. But who can play the piano the best or sing the most
beautifully
? That’
s up to
you to decide. When people watch the show, they usually
play a role
in deciding the
winner
. And the winner always gets a very good prize.
However, not everybody enjoys watching these shows. Some think that the lives of the performers are
made up
.
For example,
some people who say they are
poor
farmers are in fact just actors. But if you don’t
take
these shows too
seriously
, they are fun to watch. And one great thing about them is that they
give
people a way to make their dreams come true.
Task 1 Read the first paragraph and finish
the “true or false”.
Read and finish the Tasks below.
It’s boring to watch other people show their talents.
Talent shows are more and more
popular.
3. There
are talent shows only in
America
.
Task 2 Read the second paragraph and find out
all the superlatives in this paragraph.
Best singers, the most talented dancers, the most exciting magicians,
the funnies actors.
Task 3 Read the third paragraph and translate the
following phrases.
1.
编造
2.
例如
3.
事实上
4.
认真对待
5.
使梦想成真
1.make up
2.for exampe
3.in fact
4.take...seriously
5.make their dreams come true
What do talent shows have in common?
_________________________________
_________________________________
_________________________________
2. Who decides the winner?
_____________
Read the passage again and answer the questions.
They try to look for the best singers, the most talented dancers, the most exciting magicians, the funniest actors and so on.
The audiences.
2c
3. Why do some people not like these shows?
_______________________________
_____________________
4. Why do some people like these shows?
_________________________________
________________________________
5. What do you think of these shows?
_________________________________
Because they think that the lives of the performers are made up.
Because they give people a way to make their dreams come true.
They are fun to watch.
Underline all the superlatives in the passage. Then write sentences using at least four of them.
best singer: In my class, Tom is the best singer because he can sing fast songs very well.
2d
A:
Who
(
do you think
) is
the funniest
person
you know
?
B: I think … is
the funniest
person
I know
.
A: Why do you think so?
B: Because ….
funn
iest
most
creative
best
quiet
est
smart
est
tall
est
heav
iest
friendl
iest
thinn
est
bus
iest
most
popular
班级之最
Who’s got talent in your class? Add more talents and write a classmate’s name for each talent. Find out how many students in your group agree with you.
Talents
Classmates’ names
How many students agree?
the best
chess player
the most talented
dancer
the most interesting
writer
the fastest
runner
2e
Who’s Got Talents?
谁是达人？
此句中
who’s
为
who has
的缩写。
have got
表示“具有；具备
之意，相当于
have
。此句字面上的意思是“谁有才华？”
如：
►
Have
you
got
time? I’ve got something important to tell you.
你现在有空吗？我有重要的事要告诉你。
►
We
’ve got
a lot of work to do, you see, to make our town
more beautiful.
你们瞧，我们要把我们的城市变得更加美丽
的话，是有很多工作要做的。
Language points
2.
All these shows have one thing in common.
所有这些节目有一个共同点。
common
是名词，意为“
与
……
相同
”。
常用句型：
in common with sb/sth
有两个意思：
①与某人（某事物
）一起
。
②
像
某人（某事物）
一样
。
►
In common with many others, she applied for a training
place.
►
You are in common with me.
(2)have
…
in common
意为有相同特征
；
想法
、兴趣等
方面相同
。
►
Their views
have
much
in common
with mine.
他们的观点和我的相同。
—The more I get to know Nancy, the more I can realize
that we have a lot______.
—No wonder she is your best friend.
A. in style B. in common C.in need
3.
That’s up to you to decide.
那由你自己来决定。
在英语中，
be up to somebody
是一个习惯用语，用来表“由某人做出抉择”，句子的主语通常为
it
，有时也用
this
或
that
。
如：
►
You can join the club once or twice a week —
it’s up to you
.
你可以一周参加一次或两次俱乐部的活动
—
这由你定。
►
How much should he pay? That
’s
up to him
to decide!
他应该付多少钱？那完全由他来决定。
►
It will
be up to you
to decide which one you want to use.
这取决于你想用哪个。
►
I can tell you that the question will come up, but the
outcome will
be up to you
.
我只能够告诉你这个问题将出现，而结果如何取决于你。
4
. When people watch the show, they usually
play a role in
deciding the winner.
play a role
是一种固定表达， 意为“扮演某一角色；起到某种作用”。若要进一步引出具体的内容，后面应该用介词
in
，表示“在某事或某个方面起到作用或承担某种角色”。
►
John is
playing the leading role
in this year’s play.
今年的演出中约翰是主角。
►
Schools
play the most important role
in education.
学校在教育中起着最为重要的作用。
5.
However, if you don’t take these shows too seriously, they are fun to watch.
take
在此处有
consider (
认为；觉得
)
的意思。
take someone/something seriously
就相当于汉语“认真对待某人或某事；把某人或某事当真”的意思。
如：
►
He was joking, but your sister
took him seriously
.
他是在开玩笑，但你姐姐却当真了。
有时老师们把学生作业看得太重。
Sometimes teachers
take students’ homework too seriously
.
人家托你的事，你别不在意。
When people ask you to do something, you should
take it seriously
.
辨析：
for example
与
such as
讲解来自
《
点拨
》
6.
For example,
some people who say they are poor
farmers are in fact just actors.
for example
作插入语，后面的举例常为句子。并用逗号隔开，可位于句首、句中或句尾。
eg.Noise,for example,is a kind of pollution.
such as
用来列举同类人或事物中的几个，其后只能是单词或短语且不用逗号。
eg.I like drinks such as tea and soda.
此处
be made up
为被动语态，意为“被编造”。
eg
：
He often
makes
up stories
.
The teacher asked the students to
make up
a sentence using the word
creative.
7.Some think that the lives of the performers
are
made up.
1. She works ____ than the other students in our class.
A. hardest B. the harder C. harder
2. It was not ___ yesterday than today.
A. much cold B. colder C. the coldest
3. Wangjiang Park is one of the ___ parks in Chengdu.
A. much beautiful B. most beautiful C. more beautiful
I.
单项选择。
Exercises
4. It’s summer now. The weather is getting ___.
A. hotter and hotter B. hot and hot
C. hottest and hottest
5. Don’t worry. The girl can do it ___.
A. very good B. very well C. very wonderful
II.
完成句子。
1.
当今互联网在我们的生活中扮演着重要的角色。
Nowadays Internet ______ ___ __________ ____ in our life.
2.
森林
里有各种各样的树。
There are ___ _____ ___ trees in the forest.
plays an important role
all kinds of
3.
去哪儿度假由你决定。
It’s
to decide where to go for vacation.
4.
我们必须认真对待这次学校才艺表演。
We must
the school talent show
.
5.
并非人人都喜欢肥皂剧。
likes soap operas.
up to you
take
seriously
Not everyone/everybody
每个人都应该在环保方面发挥作用。
Evervone should ________________the environmental protection.
中考链接
play a role in
Homework
Discuss all kinds of talent shows you know with your partner. Think about the role they play in our daily life.
Preview the next part.
Section B 3a-Self Check
Let’s review the phrases. And make sentences
using them.
1.
有相同特征
_________________
2.
各种各样的
_________________
3.
由
……
决定
_________________
4.
发挥作用
_________________
5.
获得奖品
__________________
have
…
in common
all kinds of
be up to
play a role
get a prize
6.
编造
_______________________
7.
例如
_______________________
8.
认真对待
_______________________
9.
给某人某物
_______________________
10.
实现
_______________________
for example
take
…
seriously
give sb. sth./ give sth. to sb.
make up
come true
crowded
crowded- more crowded - most crowded
creative
creative-more
creative- most creative
good
good-better-best
fast
fast-faster-fastest
quietly
quietly-more
quietly-most quietly
Read the article about Greenwood Park. Fill
in the blanks
with the correct superlative forms of the
adjectives
and adverbs in the box.
Greenwood Park is _________ place to go
to
on weekends. I always finish my breakfast _______
_____
on Saturdays because I want to get to Greenwood Park before 10:00 a.m. to meet my friends. The park is ________________ place
on weekends because almost everyone goes
there
to see
the
the best
the
fastest
the most crowded
3a
crowded
creative
good fast quietly
street performers.
Some
people think they are boring, but I think they are ________________ people. However, the place where you can enjoy your time ________________ is at one of the small coffee shops near the park. You can read or relax there. There
is something
for everyone at Greenwood Park.
the most creative
the most quietly
Why does the writer go to Greenwood Park?
To meet
friends.
To
see the street
performers.
To
read or relax in one of the small coffee
shops near the park
.
Best places / things in my town
Why?
best middle school
No. 1 Middle School
Because it is the most beautiful school in my town.
best
supermarket
New Century Supermarket
the best quality
the best service
the freshest food
3b
Think about some of the best places/things in your town. Why are they the best?
Best places/things in my town
Why?
best restaurant
the most delicious food, the cleanest environment
Meishi Restaurant
best clothes store
Cool Time
best quality clothes
best theater
Wan Da Theater
biggest screen
most comfortable seats
Write about your town and the
best places/
things
there.
_________________________________________
_________________________________________
_________________________________________
_________________________________________
_________________________________________
_________________________________________
3c
本文为写自己所居住的城镇上最好的地方或事物，并说
明
原因。因此，时态应用一般现在时态；
应先描述最
……
的是某个地方，然后说明这个地方最好
的
原因。
应注意正确运用形容词或副词的最高级形式来表达。
写作指导：
写作导图
Best places/things in my town
Why
best middle school
No. 1 Middle School
Because it is the most beautiful school in my town.
best movie theater
Sun Cinema
Because it has the biggest screens and the most comfortable seats. You can sit the most comfortably there and enjoy the newest movies.
Best places/things in my town
Why
best restaurant
Moon Restaurant
Because it has the most delicious food and the friendliest service.
best place to relax
Fresh Park
Because it has the freshest air there.
I live in a small town. I like my town. The best school is No. 1 Middle School because it is the most beautiful school in my town. The best supermarket is New Century Supermarket because it has the best quality things and the best service.
Make a report
The best restaurant is Rui Jia Restaurant because it has the most delicious food and it is the cleanest restaurant. The best clothes store is Fashion Time because it has the best quality clothes. The best theater is Hanhai 3D Theater because it has the biggest screen and the most comfortable seats. I think it is the best place to live. Do you agree?
Discuss the towns/cities in China with a partner. Tell the class which town/city you think is the best.
Which is the best town / city?
…has the best…
…is the best because…
…is better than…, but…is the most…
I think Qingdao is the best city in China because it is the most beautiful. But I think Beijing is the most popular city for visitors
.
4
Sanya is in Hainan Province in southern China. It’s still warm in winter. It’s about 15
℃
in the afternoon. Sanya has beautiful beaches. The price of a hotel room is about 320 yuan a night.
1.Fill in the blanks with the superlative forms of the words in the box.
good cheap popular comfortably bad
1.
Dumpling
House is
restaurant in the city.
You
can get a big plate of
dumplings for only five yuan.
2. Spring Park is
place in the city on
weekends
. Many families go there with their young children.
Lots
of old people like to take walks there, too.
the cheapest
the most popular
Self Check
3. You can
rest
at
Flower Hotel.
Their rooms
are clean and big.
4. 109.9 FM
plays
music
. The songs are
always
boring
and too loud.
5. PEP High School
is
school
in this town. They
have
big classrooms, fantastic teachers and an excellent
sports
center.
the most comfortably
the worst
the best
2.
Read the information. Then correct
t
he
mistakes
in the
sentences
below.
A
movie ticket at Town Cinema is $12.00. It is $10.50 at Screen City, and $10.00 at Movie World.
Screen
City is always very crowded. Many people go to Movie World, too. But you can always get a ticket at Town Cinema.
The
seats at Movie World are very comfortable. The seats at Screen City are a little hard. The Town Cinema seats are very uncomfortable.
2. Screen City has the cheapest tickets.
1. Movie World is the most expensive.
Town Cinema
is the most expensive.
Movie World
has the cheapest tickets.
Movie World is the cheapest cinema.
The
girl just sits
there
_____
and
thinks
about something without
a word.
A. quiet
B
. quietly
C
. comfortable D. comfortably
2. Mr. Li asked us to remember that
_____
careful we are,
_____
mistakes we will make.
A. the more; the fewer
B
. the fewer; the more
C. the more; the more D. the less; the fewer
I.
选择题。
Exercises
II.
完成句子。
1
.
我认为海南是冬季最好的去处。
I
think Beijing is the best
place____
______
____in
autumn.
2.
美食美客是最受欢迎的餐馆
,
因为那里有最好吃的饭菜。
Meishimeike
is
the___
__________
__
restraut because it has ____ ____ ________ food.
3.
你认为哪一个公园最美
?
Which
do you think ____ ____ _____ _________park?
to
go
to
the most delicious
is the most beautiful
Most popular
Homework
Review the unit and prepare for a test.
Write a short passage about your survey of supermarkets in your city.
unit 5
人教版八年级英语上册单元全套课件
Do you want to watch a geme show?
To learn to talk about
preferences.
To learn to make
plans.
To learn new words:
educational, news, plan, hope, discussion,
happen
, may,
expect…
To
learn different kinds of
culture.
Objectives
What kind of TV programmes do you know? Can you name them?
cartoons
game shows
nature programmes
news
sports shows
体育节目
What kind of TV shows are they?
talk shows
soap
operas
sitcoms
=
situation
comedies
情景喜剧
fashion shows
时尚节目
What kind of TV shows is it?
Let’s play a guessing game
Match the TV shows with the pictures [a-g].
1.talk show____
2.soap opera____
3.sports show____
4. sitcom _______
5.game show_____
6.talent show_____
7.news ________
g
f
c
b
e
d
a
1a
Listen and number the shows [1-4] in the order you hear them.
____talent show ____talk show
____soccer game ____ news
1
2
4
3
1b
Listen again, answer the questions.
1.Which show is after the news?
The new talent show.
2.What time does the soccer game start?
At 5:00p.m.
Practice the conversation. Then make your own conversations.
A: What do you want to watch?
B: What do you think of talk shows?
A: They’re Ok. I don
’
t mind them.
B: Then let’s watch a talk show.
1c
love
like
don’t mind
don’t like
can’t stand
(
不介意
,
不反对
)
(
无法忍受
)
What do you think of game shows?
I love them.
What do you think of sports shows?
I like them.
What do you think of sitcoms?
I don’t mind them.
What do you think of talk show?
I can’t stand it.
What do you think of soap operas?
I don’t like them.
News Report
What do you think of … ?
Around the World
The Same Song
Conversation
Law Today
Man and Nature
Tell it like it is
weather report
What do you think of … ?
Make a survey
shows
number
idea
news
talk shows
sitcoms
sports shows
game shows
talent show
What kind of shows do you like ?
1.
What do you think of
game shows?
What do you think of ...?
“
你认为
……
怎么样
?”
谈论对某事物的喜好程度
,
可选择的回答有：
I like it./I don’t mind it./I don’t like it./
I can’t stand it./I like it very much./I love it./
It’s beautiful./They’re fantastic.
Language points
=How do you like ...?
2) think “
想
,
考虑
,
思索”
(v.
动词
)
可以和许多介词搭配
,
组成新的意思。
think of “
考虑”，
“
有
……
的看法”
,
有时等同于
think about.
如：
►
What does he think of Beijing Opera?
他对京剧有什么看法？
► My mother always thinks of everything!
我妈妈总是想到所有的东西。
think highly of sb. /sth.
对某人或某物评价甚高
►
Mr. Black thinks highly of his son.
布莱克先生对他儿子评价甚高。
think
about
“
考虑”
(
指计划
,
观念
,
看它是否相宜、可行
)
►
He is thinking about going to China.
他正在考虑去中国。
2.
Do you
want
to join me?
你想要加入我吗？
1)
want vt.
意为“需要；想要”。
►
I want a sweater.
我需要一件毛衣。
►
The boy wants to go to Taiyuan.
那个小男孩想去太原。
want + n
想要
……
want to do sth
想要做某事
►
If you
want to
be respected, please learn to respect
others first.
如果你想别人尊重你，就请先尊重别人。
want sb to do sth
想让某人干某事
……
►
I
want her to
go to a movie with me.
我想让她和我去看电影。
3.
I don’t
mind
them.
mind
v.
介
意
作
及物动词时，后面通常接名词、代词、
V-ing
形式、复合结构、从句等。
►
Would
you mind my closing the window?
你
介意我关上窗户吗？
►
Would
you mind waiting outside for a moment?
您
介意在外面等一会儿吗？
4.
I can’t
stand
it!
我不能忍受它
/
我受不了它！
stand
1
)“
站
,
站立”
e.g.
Stand
up!
起立
2)
“
顺利接受；忍耐
、
忍受”
(
多用于
否定句、疑问句
) ,
后可接
动名词
。
►
I can’t
stand
the movie! It is too boring!
►
Mary couldn’t
stand
the hot weather.
►
Can you
stand
the pain?
►
I can’t stand waiting any longer.
►
I can’t stand your being treated like that.
My favorite TV show is ______ (
情景喜剧
)
。
2. What do you think of __________ (
谈话节目
)
？
3. I don’t mind ___________ (
肥皂剧
).
I.
根据汉语提示完成句子。
sitcom
talk shows
soap operas
Exercises
1. My
grandfather likes wearing fashion clothes.
He
____________ what
young people
________ (
认为
)him.
2. The old men ____________
rock
music.
They
think
it’s too
noisy.
3. Her sister _______ soap opera.
That’s
her favorite.
4. I __________
to
go shopping with Mother.
It’s
crowded
in the store.
doesn’t
mind
think
of
can’t
stand
loves
don’t
like
II.
填空。
1.
他认为游戏节目比情景喜剧更有教育意义。
He thinks game shows are more educational than sitcoms.
III.
翻译句子。
2.—
你认为肥皂剧怎么样？
—
我不能忍受这个。但我妈妈很喜欢。
— What do you think of soap operas?
— I can’t stand them. But my mom loves them.
中考链接
— Alex, would you mind _____ down the
music? It's too noisy.
— Sorry, dad, I'll do it right away.
A. turn B. turning C. to turn
句意：你介意把音乐的音量调小一些吗？太吵了。
mind
意为
“
介意；在乎
”
后面只能跟动名词作宾语
。
B
1.Write a small passage about your favorite
TV programmer and why you like it.
2.Memorize the new words learnt in this
lesson.
Homework
Section A 2a-2d
To learn to talk about
preferences.
To learn to make
plans.
To learn new words:
educational, news, plan, hope, discussion, stand, happen, may, expect
…
Objectives
talk show
sitcom
(situation
comedy)
soap opera
sports show
game show
Review
TV show
Practice it with your partner.
What kind of TV show is it?
It’s a
sports show
.
What do you think of it?
I don’t mind it
.
What kind of TV show is it?
It’s a
talent show
.
What do you think of it?
I love it
.
What kind of TV show is it?
It’s
news
.
What do you think of it?
I can’t stand it
. But my father
loves
it.
What kind of TV show is it?
It’s a
sitcom
.
What do you think of it?
It’s OK.
I don’t mind it
.
______ sitcoms ______ news
______ game shows
______ talk shows ______ soap operas
1
2
3
4
5
Listen to Lin Hui and Sally’s conversation. Number the TV shows [1-5] in the order you
hear them.
2
a
Listen again. Complete the sentences.
1. Sally likes to watch
____
__________________
.
2. Lin Hui thinks she can learn
_____
____
_______
from sitcoms.
3. Sally thinks
____________
are more educational than sitcoms.
Sally loves
____________
. She plans to watch Days of
Our Past
__________
.
the news or talk shows
some great jokes
game shows
soap operas
tonight
2b
Ask and answer questions about the TV shows in 2a. Use information that is true for you.
A: Do you plan to watch the news tonight?
B: Yes, I like watching the news. I watch it every night.
A: Why?
B: Because I hope to find out what’s going on around
the world.
2
c
Ask and answer questions about the TV shows in 2a
You: Do you plan to watch ... tonight?
Lin Hui: Yes, I like ... I watch it every night.
You: Why?
Lin Hui: Because ...
Work in pairs
Grace: What did you do in class today, Sarah?
Sarah: We had a discussion about TV shows. My
classmates like game shows and sports shows.
Grace: Oh, I can
’
t stand them. I
love soap operas. I like to
follow the story and see
what happens next.
Role-play the conversation.
2d
Sarah: Well, I don’t mind soap operas. But my favorite TV shows are the news and talk shows.
Grace: They’re boring!
Sarah: Well, they may not be very exciting, but you can expect to learn a lot from them. I hope to be a
TV reporter one day.
Read 2d,answer the questions.
1.What does Grace think of game shows and sports shows?
She can't stand them.
2.What are Sarah's favoriteTV programs? Why?
The news and talk shows.
Because we can expect to learn a lot from them.
She hopes to be a TV reporter one day.
Language Points
1.
Do you
plan to
watch the news tonight?
你今晚打算看新闻吗？
plan
vt. & vi
.
计划
,
打算，常用搭配为
plan to do sth.
计划做某事
(2) plan
还可作名词，如：
make plans
制定计划
according to plan
根据计划。 例如：
►
I
plan to
go swimming tomorrow.
►
It is better for you to
make plans
for your future.
2.
I
hope to find
out what’s going on around the world.
我希望了解世界各地正发生些什么。
hope to do sth.
希望做某事
hope
无双宾语， 但其后可以接一个宾语从句，如
:
►
We hope all the people can protect the animals.
我们希望所有人都能保护动物。
3.
go on
发生
1
）义同
happen
，常用于进行时态。
eg
：
What's going on here
？
=What's happening here?
2
）持续，
继续
eg
：
The noise goes on 24 hours a day.
After a short rest,he
went on
.
4.
…but you can
expect to
learn a lot from them.
但是你可以从他们身上学到很多东西。
(1)expect to do sth.
期待做某事
want to do sth.
想做某事
plan to do sth.
计划做某事
hope to do sth.
希望做某事
(2)learn from
后可以接人也可以接事物，
learn from sb.
向某人学习
learn from sth.
从某事中学习
►
— What can you expect to learn from sitcoms?
— I hope to learn some great jokes.
5
. discussion / dɪ'skʌʃn /
n.
讨论，商量
have a discussion about/on sth.
就某事展开讨论
have a discussion with sb.
和某人讨论
eg: They have just had a discussion about where to go on vacation.
拓展：
v.discuss
discuss sth.
；
discuss sth. with sb.
；
discuss +
从句。
6
. happen /
'hæpən
/
v.
发生，出现
常指
(
不好的事）偶然发生
sth. happens/ed to sb.
某人发生了什么事
eg: A traffic accident happened to his brother yesterday.
区分
take place
意为“发生，举行”，多指计划好的活动举行了。
The sports meeting will take place tomorrow morning.
1. He joined us in the __________ (
讨论
) yesterday.
2. Are you for or against the _____(
计划
)?
3. I expect ________ (
了解
) something from news.
discussion
plan
I.
根据汉语提示完成句子。
to learn
Exercises
1.
你觉得肥皂剧怎么样
?
我受不了。
________ do you ______ ___ _____ ______?
I ______ ________ _______.
2.
我希望了解世界各地正发生些什么。
I _____ ______ _____ _____ what’s ______ _____
around the world.
What
think
of
soap
operas
can’t
stand
them
going on
II.
中译英。
hope to find out
3. Tony
认为谈话节目怎么样
?
他很喜爱它。
—What ______Tony think of _____ _____?
— He ________ it.
4.
我哥哥希望从新闻中了解很多东西。
My brother ______ _____ _______ a lot _____news.
does
talk show
loves
hopes to learn
from
5.
你认为这条裙怎么样
?
我无法忍受它的颜色。
6.
你妈妈喜欢访谈节目吗
?
非常喜欢，因为她认为它们很有趣。
— What
do
you
think
of
this
skirt?
— I can’t
stand
its
color.
— Does your mother like talk shows?
— Yes, she does. She thinks they’re interesting.
She loves soap operas.
(
变成一般疑问句，并作否定回答
)
2. Sally went to bed early last night. (
变成否定句
)
— Does she love soap operas?
— No, she doesn’t.
Sally didn’t go to bed early last night .
III.
句型转换。
4. Rick’s mother loves sitcoms. (
变成否定句
)
5. I wear colorful clothes
because I want to be young and
beautiful
. (
就画线部分提问
)
Rick’s mother doesn’t love sitcoms.
Why do you wear colorful clothes?
3. Dick doesn’t mind talk
show
. (
变成
what
引导的问句
)
What does Dick think of talk show?
— Please stay with me this weekend.
— I'm sorry, but my father and I
planned _________ Beijing a long time ago.
A. visit B. visiting
C. to visit D. visited
中考链接
计划做某事
plan to do sth.
C
1.
了解中央电视台有关的电视栏目名称。搜集自己
喜欢的电视节目的相关资料。
(
包括电视栏目名称
,
主持人以及播出时间
)
2. Write down your report.
Homework
Section A Grammar Focus-3c
To practice the sentence structures:
—
What do you plan to do…
—I hope
to…/I want to…/I plan to…/
I expect
to…
To learn new words:
joke,
comedy...
To learn to do meaningful free time activities.Make our life colorful.
Objectives
A: What kind of TV shows are they?
B: They’re
cartoons
.
B: I love them.
A: I do, too.
A: What do you think of
cartoons
?
I like
them very much.
What do you think of the __________?
Mr. Bean
World Cup
sitcom
Beijing opera
talk shows
scary movie
show your opinions
Do you
want to
watch the news?
Yes, I do./ no, I don
’
t.
What do you
plan to
watch tonight?
I
plan to
watch Days of Our Past.
What can you
expect to
learn from sitcoms?
You can learn some great jokes.
Why do you
like watching
the news?
Because I
hope to
find out what
’
s going on around the world.
What do you think of talk shows?
I don
’
t mind them. / I can
’
t stand them./ I love watching them.
Grammar Focus
1.
你想看新闻吗？
Do you want
___
_________the news?
2.
你觉得谈话节目怎么样？
____ ___ ___ ______ __ talk shows?
3.
你计划今晚上看什么节目？
What do you _____ ___ _____ tonight?
根据课本内容
,
完成下列句子。
plan to watch
to watch
What do you think of
4.
你期望从情景喜剧中学到什么？
What can you ____ ____ ______ from sitcoms?
5.
你为什么喜欢看新闻呢？
Why do you like _________ the news?
6.
因为我希望了解在世界各地发生了什么事情。
Because I _____ ___ _____ ____ what’s going on around the world.
expect to learn
hope to find out
watching
常见的跟动词不定式做宾语的动词
:
想要
______
期望
______
希望
_______
计划
______
决定
______
开始
_______
开始
______
尝试
______
动词不定式的形式：
to +
动词原形
e.g. Jack
wants to buy
some flowers for Mr.
Wu.
杰克想给吴老师买些花。
want
expect
hope
plan
decide
begin
start
try
动
词不定式做宾语的用法
1. She expects ________ (arrive) tomorrow.
2. Let’s _______ (watch) talk shows tonight.
3. They hope _______ (visit) the Great Wall next year.
4. Do you plan ______ (find) a part-time job?
5. When do you want _____ (go) swimming?
6. My uncle often helps me _____ (learn) English.
to find
to go
to visit
watch
learn
用动词的适当形式填空。
to arrive
A: What do you plan to watch on TV tonight?
B: I hope to
, but I also want to
.
How about you? Do you
a talk show or
?
A: Oh, I want to
.
Make a conversation and then practice it with a partner.
watch sitcom
watch news
want to watch
talent show
watch talent show
3a
Answer these questions. Give answers that are true for you.
What do you think of game shows?
2. What comedy shows do you like
to watch?
3. Do you plan to watch a sports
show tonight?
4. What can you expect to learn
from the news?
3b
Answer to Q 1:
I really love watching them, because they make me happy and relax.
I like to watch
The Big Bang Theory
and
Mr. Bean.
They are so interesting.
No, I can’t stand it. I think it’s boring.
I hope to know what happened around the world.
Answer to Q 2:
Answer to Q 3:
Answer to Q 4:
— What can you
expect to
learn from
news report?
— I hope to
learn what happened around the world.
— What can you
expect to
learn from
talent show?
— I hope to
learn some talents.
— What can you
expect to
learn from
sports show?
— I hope to
learn their sport results and spirits.
Ask your classmates questions and write their names in the chart.
Find someone who…
Students’ names
wants to watch a movie
hopes to watch a sitcom
expects to watch the news
plans to watch a sports show
never wants to watch a game show
3c
1. Why do you
like watching
the news?
1) like sb. / sth.
我喜欢我的朋友们。
汤姆非常喜欢数学。
Tom
likes
math very much.
凯
特不喜欢西红柿。
Kate
doesn’t like
tomatoes.
I
like
my friends.
Language points
2
）
like doing sth
.
喜欢做
……
（经常性，习惯性）
我喜欢看电视。
你喜欢打篮球吗？
3
）
like to do sth.
喜欢做
……
（偶尔）
我不喜欢打篮球。
I
like watching
TV.
Do you
like playing
basketball?
I don’t
like to play
basketball.
2.
I don’t
mind
them.
mind
介意； 在乎。表示
请求或是征求
意见
时后接
名词， 动名词或代词
。多用以下句型：
Would you mind doing…?
Do you mind …?
► Would you mind
opening the door?
► Do you mind
my dog?
1. A: What do you think of sitcoms?
B: Oh, I _________ mind them.
A. can’t B. don’t C. am not
2. A: What does she think of the talk show?
B: She ________ stand them.
A. isn’t B. doesn’t C. can’t
I.
选择题。
B
C
Exercises
3. She wants to _________.
A. swim B. swimming C. swims
4. — ____ do you think of the movie? — It’s very interesting. I like it.
A. Why B. Which C. How D. What
A
D
5. It’s too hot in the classroom. We can’t ___ it.
We all___
up and go out of the classroom.
A. mind; stand B. stand; stand C. sit; stand
6. How about _____ out for a walk?
A. to go B. going C. go D. goes
B
B
II.
根据汉语，补全英语句子。
1. —
你觉得游戏节目怎样？
—
我忍受不了那些东西。
—______do you
______
___game
shows?
— I _______ ________them.
2.
他们对每样东西的看法如何？
_______ did they _____ _____everything?
What
think of
can’t stand
What
think of
3.
我们喜欢在课堂上用英语问问题。
We
enjoy_____
__________ __ _______ in class. 4.
你介意把这件事告诉他吗？
Would you________ ________him about this?
mind telling
asking questions in English
— Simon
, where do you want to eat?
— _______________.
I eat anything.
A. I don't mind
B
. My Pleasure
C
. Good idea
D
. Certainly not
中考链接
由“我什么都吃。”可知不介意在哪吃饭。
A
我不介意
好主意
当然不
我的荣幸
Homework
Practice the useful sentences in grammar focus.
2. Master and recite the words in this unit.
Section B 1a-1d
To learn to talk about
TV shows and movies.
To
learn new words:
meaningless, cartoon, action movie…
Objectives
Do you like watching movies?
Do you know the kinds of movies?
Which kind do you like best? Why?
Warming up
The kinds of the movies:
action movie
[
'ækʃ(ə)n
]
动作片
sitcom
情景喜剧
comedy
喜剧
cartoon
scary movie
恐怖片
Other kinds of movies:
science fiction
科幻电影
documentary
纪录片
war movie
战争片
Beijing opera
京剧
What do you think of these TV shows and movies? Choose words from the box and write them under the pictures. Each picture can have more than one word.
educational serious wonderful relaxing meaningless enjoyable exciting boring
1a
talk show
___________
soap opera
_________
sports show
—————
News
_______
game show
__________
exciting
serious
educational
enjoyable
boring
talent show
___________
comedy
_________
action movie
—————
scary movie
____________
cartoon
__________
relaxing
enjoyable
educational
exciting
meaningless
Listen and circle the description words you hear in the box in 1a.
educational serious wonderful
relaxing meaningless enjoyable
exciting boring
1
b
John
Mary
Action movies
exciting
Scary movie
Game shows
sitcoms
Talk shows
Listen again. Write down the words John and Mary use to describe the TV shows or movies.
exciting
meaningless
meaningless
relaxing
relaxing
enjoyable
boring
boring
wonderful
1c
Show the answers like this:
John thinks action movies are exciting,
but Mary thinks they are meaningless.
...
Tell your partner what John and Mary like to watch and why. Then tell your partner what you like to watch and why.
John wants to watch talk shows because they’re enjoyable. I
like
to watch action movies because they’re exciting.
1d
Make a survey
Scary movie
Action
movie
comedy
documentary
Jimmy
Sandy
...
Jimmy expects to watch action movies because they’re exciting.
Sandy doesn’t like to watch scary movies because they’re meaningless.
...
Discribe your friend’s favorite movies and write the sentences.
Ⅰ. 用括号内所给单词的适当形式填空。
1. People like documentaries, because he thinks
they are ____________ (enjoy).
2.
I think talk shows are _________________
(education) than soap operas.
3.
Don
’
t do the ______________ (
mean
) things
again. We don
’
t have enough time.
enjoyable
more edcational
meaningless
Exercises
1. The story is very i _______
___
_.The children
likes reading it.
2. Speed is a very successful action movie. I think
it’s e ________.
3. I think thrillers are s ________. I don’t want to
see them.
xciting
cary
nteresting
II.
根据首字母填空。
Homework
Make sentences with the description words.
2.Practice the sentences in 2b on P
37
.
Section B 2a-2e
To learn to talk about
culture.
To learn new
words
:
culture,famous,
appear, become, rich, successful, might,
main, reason, unlucky, ready, simple…
Objectives
Discuss the following questions with
a partner.
Do you like to watch cartoons?
What is your favorite cartoon?
Why do you like it?
2
a
When people say “culture”, we
think of art and history. But one
very famous symbol in American
culture is a cartoon. We all know
and love the black mouse with two large round ears-Mickey Mouse. Over 80 years ago, he first
Read the passage and complete the time line on the next page.
2b
appeared in the cartoon Steamboat Willie. When this cartoon came out in New York on November 18, 1928, it was the first cartoon with sound and music. The man behind Mickey was Walt Disney. He became very rich and successful. In the 1930s, he made 87 cartoons with Mickey. Some people might ask how this cartoon animal became so popular.
One of the main reasons is that Mickey was a
common man, but he always tried to face any danger. In his early films, Mickey was unlucky and had many problems such as losing his house or girlfriend, Minnie. However, he was always ready to try his best. People went to the cinema to see the “little man” win. Most of them wanted to be like Mickey.
On November 18, 1978, Mickey became the first cartoon character to have a star on the Hollywood Walk of Fame. Today’s cartoons are usually not so simple as little Mickey Mouse, but everyone still knows and loves him. Who has a pair of ears more famous than Mickey’s?
November 18, 1978
Steamboat Willie
came out in New York
November 18, 1928
he made 87 cartoons
with Mickey Mouse.
Mickey became the first cartoon character to have a star on the Hollywood Walk of Fame
1930s
Read the passage again and fill in the facts about Mickey.
Mickey Mouse
What does he look like?
Who created him?
What was his first cartoon?
Who is his girlfriend?
Why is he popular?
A black mouse with two large round ears-Mickey
Walt Disney
Steamboat Willie
Minnie
Mickey was like a common man, but he always tried to face any danger.
2c
Read the passage again and discuss the questions with a partner.
American culture.
Ne Zha.
2d
1. What is Mickey Mouse a symbol of? What cartoon character is a symbol of Chinese culture?
2. Do you think Walt Disney is a smart man? Why or
why not? Do you want to be like him?
Yes , I think so . Because his cartoon is famous all over the world. Yes, I do.
3. Why did people want to be like Mickey? Do you want to
be like Mickey? Why or why not?
Because it is like a common man, but he always tried to face any danger. Yes, I do. Because I want to try my best to live.
4. Can you think of another cartoon character that is as
famous as Mickey? Why is the character popular?
Sun Wukong. Because he can face every problem in his life and win at last.
Underline
the following phrases in the passage. Write your own sentences or questions using the phrases.
think of
come out
2e
What do you think of Mickey Mouse?
When the cartoon came out
，
Mickey was popular.
one of the main reasons _____________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
such as ___________________________________
___________________________________
was ready to _______________________________
try his best _________________________________
I have many hobbies such as dancing
，
writing and so on.
I was ready to pass the exam.
He tried his best to do it well.
I like to watch news.
One of the main reasons is that I can
know many new things every day.
1.
When people say “culture”, we think of art and history.
当人们提起文化时，我们就会想到艺术和历史。
think of
有考虑；想起；有
……
想法；对
……
有意见等意思。在该句中应理解为“想起， 想到”。例如：
►
Does the poem make you think of spring?
这首诗有没有让你想到春天？
►
How many stars can you think of ?
你能想到多少明星？
Language points
2.
When this cartoon came out in New York on
November 18, 1928, it was the first cartoon with sound and music.
当这部动画片于
1928
年
11
月
18
问世于纽约时，它成为第一部带有音乐的动画片。
come out
在本句中译为“出版”引申为“问世”。此外还有：出来，（花）开出来之意。
►
The book comes out this week.
该书本周上市。
►
Oh, look! The sun’s coming out!
噢，看！太阳出来啦！
come
构成的其他短语
3.
One of the main reasons is that
Mickey was like a common man, but he always tried to face any danger.
一个主要原因是米奇看似一个普通人，但他总是尝试应对任何危险。
one of …
后跟可数名词复数，表示
……
之一。其后的谓语动词用单数。
►
One of my favorite movies is Mr. Bean.
我最喜欢的电影之一是憨豆先生。
►
One of my best friends is Ann.
安是我最好的朋友之一。
4.
However, he
was
always
ready to try his best
.
然而，他总是做好尽全力的准备。
1)
be ready to do sth
准备做某事
get ready to do sth
与之同义，但前者强调
状态
，后者强调
动作
。
►
Are you ready to start?
你准备好了吗？
►
Please get ready to start.
请作好开始的准备。
2)
Try one’s best
尽某人最大的努力
其后跟动词不定式形式，即：
try one’s best to do sth.
►
Don’t give up. Just try your best.
不要放弃。只管尽你最大的努力。
►
Come on
！
Just try your best to let your dream come true.
加油！尽最大的努力去实现你的梦想吧。
5.
People
went to the cinema
to see the “little man” win.
人们去电影院是为了看这个“ 小人儿” 赢。
go to the cinema
也可译为“ 看电影”类似表达如下：
go to movies
go to a movie
go to see a movie
6.
Today’s cartoons are usually
not so
simple
as
little Mickey Mouse, but everyone still knows and loves him.
此句中
not so…as
结构表示“
不像
……
那样
……
；不如
……
这么
……”
。
如：
►
It was
n’t
so
good
as
last time.
这次不如上次好。
►
It’s
not so
easy
as
you’d think.
这不像你想的那么容易。
a movie
an action movie
go to
a comedy
a documentary
a thriller
a movie
an action movie
a comedy
a documentary
a thriller
=
see
Do you know?
I.
根据句意及词首字母写出单词。
1. Cheng Long is a f ________ movie star.
2. My grandfather likes Beijing O _______ a lot.
3. What movie do you like best? My f________
movie is Titanic.
4. Where’s my key? I can’t f ________ it.
amous
pera
avorite
ind
Exercises
II.
翻译句子。
1.
你喜欢什么样的电影
?
喜剧。
What ____ of ________ do you like?
I like comedies.
2.
他不喜欢京剧
,
因为京剧太没意思了。
He ________ like Beijing Opera, because ___ is very
_______.
kind
movies
doesn’t
boring
it
3. 他是我最喜欢的演员
，我认为他很出色
。
He is my _______ actor. I ______ he is ______.
4.
她认为喜剧很有趣
,
所以经常和朋友去看喜剧。
She ________ comedies are very ______, so she
_____
______ to see comedies ______ her friends.
favorite
think
great
thinks
funny
often
goes
with
III.
单项选择。
1. What do you ________ do?
A. want B. want to C. like D. to like
2.My grandfather __stay ____home and watch TV.
A. like, at B. like, in
C. likes to, at D. likes to, in
3. ___ kind of movies _____ Lucy like?
A
．
What, does B
．
What, do
C
．
What’s, does D
．
Which, do
B
C
A
4.___a word, we can learn a lot __Chinese history.
A
．
For, for B
．
In, about
C
．
For, about D
．
In, for
5.Gina likes action movies, ___she doesn’t like thrillers.
A
．
and B
．
so C
．
or D
．
but
6. September is ________ month of the year.
A
．
nineth B
．
ninth
C
．
the nineth D
．
the ninth
B
D
D
中考链接
— Nowadays more and more foreigners are
becoming interested in Kungfu.
—
That’s true. It’s an important part of
Chinese ______.
A. invention B. story
C. culture D. custom
功夫是中国文化很重要的一部分。
C
发明
文化
故事
风俗
Homework
S1
S2
Why
action movies
comedies
Cartoons
Scary movies
Beijing Opera
1.Write your movie review using the notes in 3b.
2.Make a survey and then make a report.
3.Write a movie review about your
favorite movie.
Section B 3a-Self Check
To learn to talk about
culture.
To learn new
words:
army,dress up,take one'place…
To learn from
traditional
Chinese culture.Try our best to face difficulties in our
lives.
Objectives
1.
想起
__________
2.
例如
________
3.
发行
;
出版
___________
4.
在二十世纪三十年代
_____________
5.
主要原因之一
______________________
6.
努力做某事
______________
7.
准备好做某事
__________________
8.
尽最大努力
_____________
Let’s review the phrases.
think of
come out
in the 1930s
one of the main reasons
be ready to do sth.
try one’s best
try to do sth.
such as
1.
dress up
装扮
;
乔装打扮
2.
take one’s place
代替
;
替换
e.g. The kids
dressed up
to take part in the party.
e.g. Robots will
take our place
to
do many things
.
New words
e.g. My brother joined the
army
last year.
去年我哥参了军。
3.
army
n
.
陆军
;
陆军部队
e.g. I hope you’ll
do a good job
in
the company.
希望你在公司好好干。
4.
do a good job
干得好
Mulan didn’t have any brothers. She took her father’s place to join the army.
Do you like cartoons? Do you know Mulan? Can you say something about her?
Mulan dressed up like a boy. Nobody knew she was a girl in the army.
Warming up
Fill in the blanks in the movie review. Use the words in the box to help you.
fantastic shows action
want comes
from
played
about
like
exciting
plan
Mulan is an
______________
movie.It
______________ an old Chinese story. The movie is
__________
a village girl, Mulan. She dresses up like a boy and takes her father
’
s place to fight in the army.
about
comes from
exciting
action
3a
I think the actress
________
Mulan
’
s role well. The other
actors are also
___________
and
they did a good job in the movie. I
_______
Mulan very much. The movie
_______
her love for her family, friends and country. If you
_______
to watch a movie this weekend and you
__________
to see something enjoyable, choose Mulan!
played
fantastic
like
shows
plan
want
She
dresses up
like a
boy and
take
s her father’s
place
to fight in the army.
她女扮男装，替父上战场打仗。
1
）
dress up
“
盛装打扮、乔装打扮
”
。
e.g. I’d like you to
dress up
for my birthday party tonight.
今晚我希望你为我的生日派对打扮打扮。
Language points
Young kids often
dress up
and have fun at Halloween.
万圣节前夜，小孩子通常都乔装打扮，玩得很开心。
2
）
take one’s place
取代某人的位置，顶替。
e.g.
Nam believes that no one can take Kin’s place in her heart.
家岚相信，在她的内心世界里没有人可以取代陆坚。
2. They
did a good job
in the movie.
他们在电影中表演出色。
do a good job
好好干；干得好；干得出色
e.g. I’m sure you can do a better job next time.
我相信你下次会干得更好。
You’ve done a good job of it.
你干得太漂亮了
!
Write
notes for your own movie review.
The name of the movie:___________
The kind of movie:___________
What the movie is about:___________
What you think of the movie / stars
:__________
3b
The name of the movie: ______________
The kind of the movie: _______________
What the movie is about:
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
What you think of the movie/star:
____________________
Ne Zha
Cartoon
N
e Zha was born to be magic. But he didn't accept his fate. He believed he was the master of his own fate. With the help of his master and parents, he tried his best to save people in danger. At last , he became a great hero.
Write notes for your own movie review.
It was fantastic.
3c
Write your movie review using the notes in 3b.
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
本文为写自己所喜欢的电影的剧情回顾，因此，时态应用一般现在时态与一般过去时态；
首先，可介绍影片的类型，及主人公等
;
然后，介绍故事的梗概
;
最后，表达你对该影片的看法。
写作指导
:
What do you and your partner think of these TV shows or movies?
Write description
words for each one.
4
me
My partner
Soap operas
Talent shows
News
Sports shows
Game shows
Talk shows
Comedies
Scary movies
Action movies
Cartoons
1. Write questions and answers using the words in brackets.
1. A: ______________________________
B: ______________________________
Q = Question A = Answer
Q: what / think of /soap operas
A: can’t stand
What do you think of soap operas?
I can’t stand them.
Self Check
Q: what show / want to watch / tonight
A: talent show
2. A:____________________________________
B:_____________________________________
Q: what / except to learn / game show
A: interesting information
3. A:____________________________________
B:_____________________________________
What show do you want to watch tonight?
I want to watch talent show.
What do you expect to learn from game show?
I hope to learn some interesting information
.
Q: what / hope to watch / tomorrow
A: news
Q: do / plan to watch / action movie
A: no / plan to watch / comedy
4. A:____________________________________
B:_____________________________________
5. A:____________________________________
B:_____________________________________
What do you hope to watch tomorrow?
I hope to watch the news.
Do you plan to watch action movie?
No, I plan to watch comedy.
2 which of these statements do you agree with (
√
) or
disagree with (
ⅹ
)? Give at least one reason by yourself.
I think game shows are meaningless. ( )
I can’t stand soap operas. ( )
I think sitcoms and talent shows are relaxing. ( )
4. I love talk shows. ( )
5. I think comedies are fantastic. ( )
√
ⅹ
√
ⅹ
ⅹ
I.
翻译词组
。
1.
去看电影
_____________
2.
动作片
_____________
3.
京剧
_____________
4.
看
……
_____________
5.
大量
,
许多
____________
6.
因为
____________
go to a movie
action
movies
Beijing
Opera
look at
a lot of
because of
Exercises
7.
事实上
____________
8.
找到
____________
9.
想起
____________
10.
替代
……
的位置
___________
11.
干得好
______________
12.
尽最大努力
_____________
in
fact
find out
think of
take one’s place
do a good job
try one’s best
II.
根据汉语或首字母提示填写单词。
1. My daughter and son are _________(
学生
) in No. 110
Middle School.
2. We don’t have classes on w_________.
3. I think someone in Class Nine _______ (
找到
) his shoes.
4. Her f_______ (
最喜欢的
）
fruits are apples and bananas
.
students
eekends
finds
avorite
III.
用所给单词的正确形式填空。
1. The two __________are very interesting (comedy).
2. He plans__________
（
swim
）
tomorrow.
3. Your sister _________ a nice bag (have).
4. Her brother wants ________ a documentary (see).
5. Tom and Kate __________ here (not be).
comedies
to swim
has
to see
are not
IV.
单项选择
。
1. —
Do you want to go to a movie?
— _________
A. Yes, I want. B. No, I am not.
C. Yes, I do. D. No, I haven’t
2. Jack wants _______ the park.
A. go to B. to go
C. to go to D. goes to
3. My brother likes action movies ______he doesn’t like
documentaries.
A. and B. but C. or D. so
C
C
B
1. Sally’s birthday is
October fifth
. (
对
画
线
提问
)
________ _____ Sally’s birthday?
2. Peter’s sister likes thrillers. (
一般疑问句
)
______ Peter’s sister ______ thrillers?
3. We have an Art Festival each year. (
否定句
)
We _______ _______ an Art Festival each year.
When is
Does
like
don’t
have
V.
根据要求完成句子。
4. Mary wants to see a movie.
(
对画线
提问
)
What _______ Mary _______ to see?
5. Grandmother wants a birthday party this year.
(
否定句
)
Grandmother ________ ______ a birthday party
this year.
6. I want to have apples and eggs for
dinner
. (
一
般疑问
句
)
_____ _____ _____ to have apples and eggs for dinner?
does
want
doesn’t
want
Do you want
1.
你怎样认为连续剧？我受不了。
_____ do you ____ ___ ____ ______?
I ____ ____ ____ .
2.
他
不喜欢情景喜剧。
He ______ ______ _______.
3. Evan
对朋友不在乎。
Evan _______ _____his friends.
What
think of soap operas
can’t stand them
doesn’t
like sitcoms
doesn’t mind
VI.
翻译练习。
4.
你去哪里度假了？我参观了博物馆。你的假期怎么样？
事实上。相当不错。
________ did you go ___
______
_
?
I _______
_______.
____ ____ your vacation? ___ ____, it ___
__________.
5.
我哥哥喜欢体育世界而我姐姐喜欢情景喜剧。
My brother_______ Sports World_____ my sister likes
___
_
_____.
Where
on vacation
visited museum
How was
In fact
was pretty good
likes
and
sitcoms.
VII.
连词成句。
1. you, to, do, a, go, want, movie, to
____________________________?
2. thinks, funny, is, he, movie, the
_____________________________.
3. of, what, movies, kind, like, you, do
_____________________________?
Do
you
want to go to a movie
He thinks the movie is funny
What kind of movies do you like
4. a, movie, on, my, to, family, often, go, weekends
______________________________
_____________.
5. but, she, like, movies, action, I, likes, comedies.
______________________________
___________.
My family often go to a movie
on weekends
I like action movies but she likes
comedies.
VIII.
句式转换。
1. I
don’t mind
sports shows.(
划线提问）
2. I like game shows.(
否定句）
What do you think of sports shows?
I
don’t
like game shows.
Homework
Make a plan (
计划
) for this Sunday.
e.g. I will
go
to see an action movie.
I think it’s interesting and exciting.
The newest
action
movie is hero.
I will go to see it this Sunday.
unit 6
人教版八年级英语上册单元全套课件
I’m going to study computer science.
To learn to talk about future intentions.
To learn to talk about your dream job.
To have a dream and work hard to make it come true.
Objectives
a pianist
an engineer
What are their jobs?
Warming up
a computer
programmer
an astronaut
a professional
basketball player
a doctor
a teacher
a cook
a policeman
a writer
a dancer
an actor
an actor/actress
a soldier
waiter/
waitress
bus driver
act
ress
Wait
ress
art
ist
violin
ist
athlete
driv
er
cook(
厨师
)
dent
ist
danc
er
doct
or
sing
er
gymnast
golf
er
housewife
music
ian
nurse
pian
ist
police
man
play
er
report
er
writ
er
soldi
er
(
战士
)
fisher
man
fire
man(
消防队员
)
post
man
bank cl
er
k
shop assistant
basketball
computer
programmer
engineer
pilot
Brainstorming Job names
easy
fun
exciting
interesting
relaxing
boring
difficult
hard
dangerous
She/He is a/an…
Do you think these jobs are interesting? Rank them [1-12](1 is most interesting ,12 is least interesting ).
___computer programmer ___ cook
___ doctor
___ engineer ___ teacher
___ violinist
___ bus driver ___ pilot
___ pianist
___ basketball player
___ scientist ___ actor
1a
Pair work:
What are you going to be when you
grow up
?
长大
Listen and fill in the blanks. Then match the items.
1.computer programmer a. take _______ lessons
2.basketball player b. study _________ science
3.engineer c. practice __________ every day
4.actor d. study ______ really hard
acting
computer
basketball
math
1b
A: What do you want to be when you grow up?
B: I’m going to be a basketball player.
A: How are you going to do that?
B: I’m going to practice basketball every day.
Practice the conversation in the picture. Then make conversations about the other jobs in 1a.
1c
My good friend Peter likes painting. He is good at painting animals. He is very quiet. He is going to be a painter when he grows up because it’s an exciting job . He’s going to paint really hard and paint every day. Ben likes… and Mary likes…
Report:
Write something
about yourself
I like _________. I'm good at______________.
I'm very ______________.
I'm going to be _________ when I grow up
because _________________________.
I'm going to __________________________
to make my dream come true.
Language points
1
. What do you want to be
when
you
grow up
?
长大以后你想做什么？
when
此处用作连词，意为“当
……
时”，用来引导时间状语从句。在
when
引导的时间状语从句中，主语是一般将来时，从句要用一般现在时表示将来。
grow up
意为“成长，长大”，
grow
的过去式是
grew
。
want to be
“想要成为
……
” ，其后接职业名称。
2.
How are you going to do that?
I’m going to practice
basketball every day.
我打算每天练习（打）篮球。
(1)
这是一个
be going to
用于特殊疑问句的句子
,
be going to
用于疑问句中将
be
放在主语前。
be going to
表示将要发生的动作
,
含有“计划
,
打算”的
意思
,
后跟动词原形。常跟表将来的时态连用。
(2)
practice
作动词，表示“（不间断地）练习”，后可用名词作宾语，若跟动词时需用动名词形式。
►
He always want to practice his English with me.
他总想和我练习英语。
(3)
everyday
意为“每天”，表示频率，在句中作状语，通常位于句末。
I.
根据句意及所给提示填空。
1. My brother is a d_____, and he works in this hospital.
2. Mike likes playing the violin, so he wants to be a great
v________ one day.
3. Qian Xuesen is one of the greatest s_______ in China.
4. Yao Ming is a very famous b________ p_____.
5. I am going to be an ________ (
工程师
) when I grow up.
iolinist
octor
cientists
layer
engineer
asketball
Exercises
II.
根据汉语意思完成句子，每空一词。
1. 你打算怎样成为一名演员？
How
____
you
______ ___ ____
an actor?
2. 你妹妹将来想做什么？
What does your sister
_____ ____ ___
in the future?
3. 她打算努力学习数学。
She
___ ______ ____
study math
_____
.
are
hard
want to be
is going to
going to be
4.
汤姆想成为一名编程人员。
Tom wants to be a
___________ ____________.
5.
我们会尽力帮助汤姆学习汉语。
We will ____ ____ ____ ___ help Tom with his
Chinese.
computer
try our best to
programmer
中考链接
一
Jimmy, what do you want to be
when you grow up?
一
I want to be ______ engineer.
A. a B. an C. the
engineer
是以元音音素开头的单词，因此用
an
。
B
1. listen to 1b.
2. write down the job words.
3. Write a report about your dream job.
Homework
Section A 2a-2d
A: What are you going to be when
you grow up?
B: I’m going to be a/an…
A:
How
are you going to do that?
B: I’m going to..
Free talk
What is she going to be when she grows up?
She is going to be a tennis player.
How is she going to do that?
She is going to practice tennis every day.
What ? How?
When?where?
Listen. What is Cheng Han going to do?
Check ( √ ) the correct boxes in the picture.
√
√
2
a
What
Where
How
When
Cheng Han is going to be a teacher.
He is going to move to Shanghai.
Cheng Han is going to learn how to teach children.
He is going to finish high school college first.
2b
Listen again. What are Cheng Han’s plans for the future? Complete the chart.
B: He wants to be a teacher.
B: He is going to move to Shanghai.
B: He
is going to learn how to teach children.
B: He is going to finish high school and college first.
A: What does Cheng Han want to be?
A : Where is Cheng Han going to move?
A: How is Cheng Han going to do that?
A: When is Cheng Han going to start?
Ask and answer questions.
2c
Write down Cheng Han's plan for the future using the information above.
Cheng Han wants to be a __________when he grows up. He is going to learn_____________________. And he is going to move to ___________. To make his dream come, he is going to _________________________________first.
teacher
how to teach children
Shanghai
finish high school and college
Pair work:
A:
What
are you going to be when you grow up?
B: I’m going to be a/an
…
A:
How
are you going to do that?
B:I’m going to..
A:
Where
are you going to work?
B:I’m going to work in…
Give a report
about your plan
for the future.
I want to be a ...when I grow up. ......
The Old Man and the Sea
是海明威著名的代表作之一，
1951
年创作于古巴。故事讲述了古巴老渔夫桑提亚哥在海上独自钓到一条巨大的马林鱼并与之周旋、搏斗，历经三天最终捕获大鱼，在返航途中却又遭受鲨鱼袭击的经历。故事弘扬了人类迎接挑战及勇敢面对失败的无畏气概。
Have you read
The Old Man and the Sea
?
Do you know who wrote it?
Ernest Miller Hemingway (1899-1961)
，
美国著名现代作家，
1953
年普利策奖、
1954
年诺贝尔文学奖获得者。海明威被誉为美利坚民族的精神丰碑，并且是“新闻体”小说的创始人。其写作风格简洁、硬朗，有“文坛硬汉”之称，对美国文学及
20
世纪世界文学的发展有极深远的影响，代表作包括
《
老人与海
》
、
《
永别了，武器
》
、
《
太阳照常升起
》
等。
Do you know him
?
Role-play the conversation.
Andy: What are you reading, Ken?
Ken:
The Old Man and the Sea
by Hemingway.
Andy: Wow, now I know why
you’re so good at
writing stories.
Ken: Yes, I want to be a writer.
Andy: Really? How are you going to become a writer?
Ken: Well, I’m going
to keep on writing
stories, of course. What do you want to be?
be good at…
擅长于干
……
keep on doing…
继续，坚持干
……
2d
Andy: My parents want me to be a doctor, but I’m not sure about that.
Ken: Well, don’t worry. Not everyone knows what they want to be. Just make sure you try your best. Then you can be anything you want!
Andy: Yes, you’re right.
be sure about…
对
……
有把握，确信
……
make sure
确信，证实
try one’s best
尽最大努力
Listen and answer the questions.
1. What book is Ken reading?
2. Who is the author?
3. What does Ken want to be?
He is reading
The Old Man and the Sea
.
Hemingway.
He wants to be a writer.
Ken is reading a book called ____________________. He is good at _____________. He wants to be a ______. He _________ keep on writing stories.
Andy’s parents wants him to be a ______, but he is _______ about that.
Not everyone knows what they _________. Just _________ you try your best. Then you can be anything you want!
The Old Man and the Sea
writing stories
writer
doctor
not sure
Fill in the blanks According to the conversation.
want to be
make sure
is going to
Rewrite the conversation
Ken is good at writing stories. He wants to be a writer. He is going to keep on writing stories.
Andy’s parents want he to be a doctor. But he isn’t sure about it.
1.
How
are you going to
do that
？
你打算怎么做？
be going to
表示将要发生的动作，含有“计划
,
打算”的意思，
后跟动词原形。常跟表将来的时间连用。
如
: next Sunday
下星期天
, next month
下个月
, next year
明年等。
►
I
am going to
play football this afternoon
．
我打算今天下午踢足球。
►
I
’m not going to
swim this Sunday.
这个星期天我不打算去游泳。
Language points
2.
The Old Man and the Sea
by Hemingway.
海明威的
《
老人与海
》
。 此处介词
by
为
“由
……
所著”之意。再如：
a short story by Lu Xun
(
鲁迅的一部短篇小说
)
。
3.
be sure about
确信；
be sure about sth /doing sth
确定某事或者确定干某事
►
You can be sure about their interest in it.
你可以肯定他们对这个很感兴趣。
4.
make sure
确保；查明
►
I make sure he will come here.
5.
try one’s best
尽最大努力
尽力干某事用
：
try one’s best to do sth
►
I’ll try my best to pass the exam.
6.
Then you can be anything you want!
那么你就能当上你想做的人了。
此句的基本意思是
you can be anything
，不定代词
anything
指代未来所从事的某一职业，
you want
用来修饰
anything
。
Sentences pattern:
1. — What are you going to be when you grow up?
2. — I am going to be a/an
…
— How are you going to do that ?
— I am going to …
3. be going to +v
原形表示“打算做某事”
Summary
Phrases:
grow up keep on doing be good at doing
be sure about make sure
I.
根据提示完成下列句子。
1. My brother is going to be a p______ (a person who
controls a plane) when he grows up.
2. Bill’s father is an e__________ (a person who is
trained to plan the making of machines, roads, etc).
ilot
ngineer
Exercises
3. Cheng Han is going to m____ (to change the
place where you live, work, etc) to New York.
4. She exercises every day to keep f___ (healthy
and strong).
5. Yao Ming is a p_________ (doing something as
a paid job) basketball player.
ove
it
rofessional
II.
问答连线。
1. What are you going to be when you grow up?
2. Are you going to sing country music?
3. How are you going to become a singer?
4. When are you going to start?
5. Where are you going to take singing lessons?
c
e
b
a
d
a. I’m going to take singing lessons.
b. I’m going to start next month.
c. I’m going to be a singer.
d. In New York City.
e. No, I’m not.
中考链接
—Will you join in the discussion tomorrow?
— ________ Maybe I’ll have a meeting.
A. Well, I’m not sure.
B. That’ll be great!
C. Certainly.
D. You’re welcome.
由
maybe
可知不确定
.
A
1. Learn the new words and phrases by heart.
2. Make a survey:
What do your friends do?
What do they want to be?
How are they going to do that?
3. Finish the exercises in
Learning English
.
4. Preview 3a-3c on page 43.
Homework
Section A Grammar-3c
To learn to use
be going
to
.
To
learn to talk about future intention with
what, how, where,
when
.
To have a dream and work hard to make it come true.
Objectives
Let's play a guessing game!
She/He is …
句型
：
1
.
What are you going to be when
you
grow up?
I
’
m going to be
a
/
an
…
2
. How are you going to do that?
practice
——
every day
study
——
(
really hard)
take
——
lessons
Review
I
’
m going to
3
.
What is he/she going to be when he/she grow
s
up?
He/She is going to be aan
…
4. How is he/she going to do that?
practice
——
every
day
study
——
(
really hard)
take
——
lessons
He/She is going to
What ? How?
When?where?
A:
What
are you going to be when you grow up?
B: I
’m going to
be a computer programmer.
A:
How
are you going to do that ?
B: I
’m
going to
take computer lessons and learn
math hard
.
A:
Where
are you going to work?
B: I
’m
going to
work in
Guangzhou
.
Pair work
What do you
want to be
when you grow up?
I
want to be
an engineer.
How
are you going to
do that?
I’m going to
study math really hard.
Where are you going to work?
I’m going to move to Shanghai.
When are you going to start?
I’m going to start when I finish high school and college
.
Read the sentences carefully.
want to be…
想成为，想要成为
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
状元成才路
Grammar Focus
What do you want to be when you grow up?
I want to be an engineer.
How are you going to do that?
I’m going to study math
really
hard
.
Where are
you going to work?
I’m going to move to Shanghai.
When are you going to start?
I’m going
to start when I finish high school and college.
be going to +
动词原形
对于将要发生的事，或打算、计划、决定要做的事，皆
以
“
be going to +
动词原形
”的句型来表示。
►
He
is going to be a doctor when he grows up.
►
They’re
going to play chess next week.
常
与一些表示将来时间的状语连用。如：
tomorrow
“明天”
, this evening
“今天晚上”
, next month“
下个月
”
。
注意：句型中有
be
动
词， 用
is
还是
am
还是
are
，取决于
主语
.
肯定句
否定句
一般疑问句
特殊疑问句
主语
+be(am/is/are)+going +to+
动词原形
+
其他
.
be going to
的句型
主语
+be(am/is/are)+not+going+to+
动词原形
+
其他
.
Be(Am/Is/Are)+
主语
+going+to+
动词原形
+
其他
?
疑问词
+be(am/is/are)+
主语
+going+to+
动词原形
+
其他？
肯定句
的构成和用法
句型
:
主语
+be going to+
动词原形
如
：
I
am going to
play football next Sunday.
He
is going to
teach in Beijing next year.
They
’re going to
meet outside the school gate.
It
is going to
rain.
We
’re going
home tomorrow.
否定句
的构成和用法
句型：
主语
+be not going to +
动词原形
如：
We’re
not
going to have any class next week.
It’s
not
going to rain this afternoon.
I’m
not
going to be a teacher.
He
isn’t
going to see his brother tomorrow.
They
aren’t
going to watch TV this evening.
一般疑问句
的构成和用法
句型：
be+
主语
+going to +
动词
原形？
如
：
Are you going to be a doctor in the future?
Yes, I
am.(
肯定回答）
/No, I’m not.(
否定回答
）
Is
your sister going to bring you lunch?
Yes
, she
is./No,she isn’t
.
特殊疑问句
的构成和用法
：
句型：
特殊疑问词
+
一般疑问句
How
are they going to school tomorrow?
By bike.
Wha
t
is he going to do next Sunday?
He is going to read books.
When
are you going to buy a new bike?
Tomorrow.
Where
is the little girl going ?
She is going to her grandma’s home.
There be
表
“
将来
有
……
”
时用
There be going to be
特别提醒
eg.There is going to be a sports meeting tomorrow afternoon.
Ex.______________more people visiting here
next year.
A.There is going to have B.There be going to have
C.Ther is going to be D.There be going to be
♣
Match what these people want to do with what they are going to do.
They’re going to practice every day.
I’m going to buy a fast car.
We’re going to take singing lessons.
She’s going to study
education
.
She’s going to study math.
I’m going to study science.
He’s going to go to a cooking school.
He’s going to take acting lessons.
3
a
____1. My friend wants to be an engineer.
____2. My brother wants to be an actor.
____3. I want to be a scientist.
____4. My sister wants to be a school teacher.
____5. Those boys want to be soccer players.
____6. My friend and I want to be singers.
____7. My cousin wants to be a cook.
____8. I want to be a race car driver.
e
h
f
d
a
c
g
b
Fill in the blanks. Then practice the conversation.
A: Kelly, what do you want to be
you grow up?
B: I
to be a doctor.
A: Wow!
are you going to do that?
B: I’m
to study medicine at a university.
A: Hmm
…
sounds difficult. _______are you
______
to
study?
B: I’m going to
in London.
A:
are you going to start?
B: I’m going to
next September
.
when
want
How
going
Where
going
study
When
start
3b
Complete the chart and discuss it with your partner.
What
Where
How
When
A: What do you want to be when you grow up?
B: I want to be a reporter.
A: How are you going to do that?
B: I’m going to write articles and send them to
magazines and newspapers.
3c
Make a conversation
using
what,how,where and when.
A:What do you want to be when you grow up?
B: ...
A: ...
... ...
Exercises
I.
用所给词的适当形式填空。
1.Our cousin
___________(
go) play soccer
this afternoon
.
2.
_____
you
___________(
play) basketball with
me next week
?
3.The actor
_____
going to
_________(
move
)
to Guilin.
4. He admires actors very much. He’s going to take
_
____
__
(act) lessons every day.
is going to
Are
going to play
is
move
acting
II.
句型转换。
1.They have a basketball match every Sunday. (
用
next Sunday
替换
every Sunday ) They____ ____ ___ ____ a basketball match next Sunday. 2.We are going to
have a school trip
next week. (
画
线部分提问）
____ ____ you ____ ____ ___next week? 3.I’m going to see my teacher on Teachers’ Day. (
改为一般疑问句，并做肯定回答）
— ____ ____ going to see _____ teacher on Teachers’ Day? — Yes, I am.
Are you
your
What are
g
oing to
do
are
going to have
III.
把下列各句译成英语。
1
.
我
叔叔要写一部小说。
My
uncle
____
_______ _______ a new story
．
2
.
我
哥哥打算学医。
My brother ___
______ ____ _____ medicine.
3
.
我
要把这本书寄给我的老师。
I ___
________
____
______ this book to
my teacher
．
is going to write
is
going
to
study
am
going to send
1.I’m, going to, walk, school, not, to,
_____________________________________.
2. Friday, what, is, do, going, to, next, he
_____________________________________?
What is he going to do next Friday
I’m not going to walk to school
IV.
连词成句。
Homework
1.Make sentences
with
be
going
to
.
2.Make a survey of your friends, relatives,
or
classmates,
write a report about their
dream
jobs
.(50words
)
Section B 1a-1e
To review the sentence patterns about future intentions by listening to the New Year’s resolutions:
What are you going to do next year?
I’m going to…
How are you going to do …?
To learn to make New Year’s resolutions.
Objectives
New Year's Day is coming!
Warming up
Let’s make New Year’s Resolution!
I’m going to play basketball.
I’m going to get lots of exercise.
I’m going to get healthier food.
I
’
m going to take photos.
I’m going to take up a hobby like painting.
learn to play an instrument
get a part-time job
get up early
get good grades
eat healthier food
get lots of exercise
travel to Beijing…
save some money
read more books
work harder
make many friends
New year’s resolutions
New Year is coming. A good plan is a good beginning to success.
What are your new year’s resolutions?
How are you going to do that?
New Year's Resolution
What are you going to do next year?
I’m going to…
Sounds interesting. I’m going to…
Great!
Talk about new year’s resolution with your partners.
1. Learn to play an instrument
（
乐器
）
2. make the soccer team
3. get good grades
4. eat healthier food
5. get lots of exercise
5
4
3
2
1
Match the pictures with the
New Year’s
resolutions
.
resolution n.
决心
1a
A: What are you going to do next year?
B: Well, I’m going to
take guitar lessons
. I really love
music
.
A: Sounds interesting. I’m going to
learn a foreign language
.
B : Are you? Great! But
foreign
languages are not for me.
foreign adj.
外国的
foreigner n.
外国人
1b
What are you going to do next year? Tell your partner.
Listen and circle the resolutions you hear in 1a.
1. learn to play an instrument
2. make the soccer team
3. get good grades
4. eat healthier food
5. get lots of exercise
1c
Listen again and fill in the chart.
resolution
How are they going to do it?
Lucy
Kim
Mike
He is going to study hard and do
his homework every day.
She is going to take piano lessons.
learn to play
the piano
get good
grades
make the
soccer team
He is going to practice really hard. (I’m going to go to a summer camp and play soccer every day there.)
1d
Make a list of other resolutions and how you are going to make them work. Then discuss them with your group. (P 44)
A:
I want to be
a teacher.
B:
How are you going to do that
?
A: Well,
I’m going to
study hard and get good
grades.
B: Sounds like a good plan. I want to
get
a lot of exercise.
1e
I want to be a violinist.
How are you going to do that?
I’m going to practice violin very hard.
Sounds like a good plan.
I want to be an engineer.
How are you going to do that?
I’m going to finish high school and go to a famous university.
Sounds like a good plan.
I want to be a pianist.
How are you going to do that?
I’m going to take piano lessons.
Sounds interesting.
I want to be a soccer player.
How are you going to do that?
I’m going to join the soccer team.
Sounds fantastic.
Report
My New Year's resolution is that ____________________________.
I'm going to _________________.
Tim's
New Year's resolution is that___________________________.
He's going to _________________.
...
— What are you going to do next year?
— I’m going to…
— I want to be…
How are you going to do that
？
I’m going to…
make the soccer team
get good grades
eat healthier food
get lots of exercise
learn to play the piano
Summary
I.
翻译下列短语。
1.
弹钢琴
______________
2.
组建足球俱乐部
__________________
3.
取得好成绩
______________
4.
吃健康的食物
______________
5.
进行大量锻炼
______________
play the piano
make the soccer team
get good grades
eat healthier food
get lots of exercise
Exercises
1.
他明年要组织一支足球队
。
He’s going to make the soccer team next year.
2.
她下个月要吃更健康的食物并多锻炼身体。
She is going to eat healthier food and get a lot of exercise next month.
II.
翻译句子。
3.
明年我要上钢琴课
。
I’m going to take piano lessons next year.
4. —
你打算怎样成为一名篮球运动员？
—
我打算努力练习打篮球。
— How are you going to become a pianist?
— I’m going to practice playing basketball
really hard.
Homework
Write a passage about how you are going
to make your city cleaner.
Section B 2a-2e
To read to learn different kinds of resolutions.
To learn the new words and useful expressions
To work hard to make our dream come true.
Objectives
be able to
meaning
question
discuss
promise
at the beginning of
improve
能够做某事
n.
意义
v.
怀疑
v.
讨论
n.
诺言
v.
许诺
在
……
开始
v.
改善
Words review
write down
physical
themselves
have to do with
self-improvement
take up
写下
adj.
身体的
pron.
他们自己
与
……
有联系
n.
自我改进
开始做
hobby
weekly
schoolwork
agree with
n.
业余爱好
adj.
&adv.
每周地
n.
学校作业
同意赞成
Enjoy the poem
Dreams
— Langston Hughes
Hold fast to dreams,
For if dreams die.
Life is a broken-winged bird,
That can never fly.
Hold fast to dreams,
For when dreams go,
Life is a barren field.
Frozen only with snow.
译文：
梦想
—
兰斯顿
·
休斯
紧紧抓住梦想，
梦想若是消亡，
生命就像鸟儿折了翅膀，
再也不能飞翔。
紧紧抓住梦想，
梦想若是消丧，
生命就像贫瘠的荒野，
雪覆冰封，万物不再生长。
Discuss the questions with your partner.
Did you make any resolution last year?
No , I didn’t.
Were you
able to
keep them? Why or why not?
No , I wasn’t. Because I forgot them.
be able to…
会；能够
2a
Read the passage and match each paragraph with its main purpose.
1. To question the idea of making resolutions.
2. To give the meaning of resolution.
3. To discuss the different kinds of resolutions.
2b
1. Do you know what a resolution is? It’s a kind of promise. Most of the time, we make promises to other people. (“Mom, I promise I’m going to tidy my room when I get back from school.”) However, promises you make to yourself are resolutions, and the most common kind is New Year’s resolutions.
When we make resolutions at the beginning of the year, we hope that we are going to improve our lives. Some people write down their resolutions and plans for the coming year. This helps them to remember their resolutions. Others tell their family and friends about their wish and plans.
D
2. There are different kinds of resolutions. Some are about physical health. For example, some people promise themselves they are going to start an exercise program or eat less fast food. Many resolutions have to do with self-improvement. ______ Some people might say they are going to take up a hobby like painting or taking photos, or learn to play the guitar. Some resolutions have to do with better planning, like making a weekly plan for schoolwork.______
A
B
3. Although there are differences, most resolutions have one thing in common. People hardly ever keep them! ________Sometimes the resolutions may be too difficult to keep. Sometimes people just forget about them. For this reason, some people say the best resolution is to have no resolutions! How about you
—
will you make any resolutions next year?
C
Write the letters [A-D] in the correct places in the passage.
A: There are about making yourself a better person.
B: For example, a student may have to find more time
to study.
C: There are good reasons for this.
D: The start of the year is often a time for making
resolutions.
2c
1.What is a resolution?
2. When do people usually make resolutions?
3.Why do people usually make resolutions?
Answer the questions with short sentences.
It is a kind of promise.
The beginning of the year.
They want to improve their lives.
2d
4. How do people remember their resolutions?
5.How many kinds of resolutions does the writer talk about?
6.Why do you think resolutions may be difficult to keep?
7.Do you agree with the writer? Why or why not?
They write down them or tell their family and friends.
Three.
Because people just forget about them.
Yes , I think so. Because doing is better than saying.
Why do you think resolutions may be difficult to keep?
2. Do you think the best resolutions is to have no resolutions? Why or why not?
Discussion
2. Yes. The resolutions are very hard to keep, so the best resolutions is to have no resolutions. We should make smaller goals and then achieve them step by step.
Sometimes people are lazy, impatient…
Possible answers:
Read the passage again,finish the following tasks.
1
判断正误，
2
补全句子，
3.
写出第三段中
one thing
指代内容，
4
转换同义句，
5
英译汉
1.We
make resolutions at the end of the year.(T/F)
2.People write down their resolutions and plans to help them ____________________________
3.___________________________________
❀
to
remember their resolutions
People hardly ever keep them!
4.
Sometimes the resolutions may be too difficult to keep.
Sometimes the resolutions may be______difficult_______people_______keep it.
5.Some resolutions have to do with better planning, like making a weekly plan for schoolwork.
__________________________________________.
so
that
can't
一些决心和更好的计划有关，比如制定每周的功课计划。
Find the phrases in the passage. Then write down your own sentences with them.
have to do with
make promises
What does the trouble have to do with you?
Do not make promises easily as it will injure you most.
2e
have…in common
write down
for this reason
take up
We have lots of things in common besides music.
Write down the qualities you'd like to have.
For this reason, we left the party early.
He left a job in the city to take up farming.
Fill in the blanks to retell the text.
Resolution is a kind of ________. Promises you make to yourself are resolutions, and the most common kind is ____________________. When we make resolutions at the _________ of the year, we hope that we are going to ________ our lives.
promise
beginning
improve
New Year’s resolutions
There are different kinds of resolutions. Some are about ________ health. Some have to do with ________________. Some are about better planning, like making a _______ plan for school work.
Although there are differences, most resolutions _______________________. People hardly ever keep them!
physical
self-improvement
weekly
have one thing in common
1.
at the
beginning
of this year
在今年年初
beginning n.
开头
,
反义词为
end
，结束。
at the beginning of
在
……
开始
at the end of
在
……
末尾
from the beginning to end
从头到尾
如：
He will come here at the beginning of this month.
他会在这月初来到这里。
Language points
2.
They are going to start an exercise program
or
eat
less fast food.
eat
与
have
这两个动词都可以表示“吃”。
1) eat
可用作及物或不及物动词
,
是日常用语，但用在
日常口语中不够礼貌。让别人“吃”，通常用
have
。
►
Where shall we
have
our dinner?
我们在哪儿吃饭？
2)
在美国
, eat
既作“吃”
,
又作“喝”解。
如
: We
eat
our soup first.
我们先喝汤。
3)have
是普通用语
,
同样可以表示“吃”
,
也可以表示
“喝”。用在非正式的文体中。
如
:
►
What time do you
have
supper?
你们什么时候吃晚饭？
►
I do not
have
coffee in the evening.
晚上我不喝咖啡。
注意：
“
吃药”
,
习惯上说
have
／
take medicine,
不说
eat
／
drink medicine
。
如
:
►
Your son catches a bad cold. He should
have
some medicine.
你儿子得了重感冒，他应该吃药。
3. Some resolutions
have to do with
better
panning…
有些决定与合理的时间规划有关
……
句中
planning
为名词，表示“计划、规划”如
：
city planning
(
城市规划
)
。
better plan
意为：合理规划，指通过
制定计划来更加充分地利用时间、空间、精力。
2)
Have to do with
表示“与
……
相关；与
……
有关联或有
关系”如：
►
What dose this problem have to do with what we’re learning
today?
这道题跟我们今天所学的内容有什么关系？
4.
Sometimes the resolutions
may
be
too
difficult
to
keep
.
有些时候这些决定可能会太难而无法实现。
1)
句中情态动词
may
表示推测，相当于汉语的“可能；也许；大概”的意思。如：
►
You may be right this time, but I’ m not sure.
这一次或许你是对的，但是我无法确定。
2) too…to…
是一个固定结构，表示“太
……
而不能
……”
►
The kid is too young to play this game.
这个小孩太小，不能玩这个游戏。
3)
句中的动词
keep
表示
“
履行（诺言等）；遵守（惯例等）
”
如：
►
People hardly ever keep them!
人们很少履行它们（指计划）。
还有类似的用法：
keep a promise(
信守承诺
)
keep one’s promise (
遵守承诺；说话算数
)
等。如：
We always keep our word.
我们说话是算数的。
练习：用下列短语造句
have to do with
（与
……
有关）
make promises
（做出承诺）
have something in common
（有共同之处）
write down
（写下；记下）
for this reason
（为此；由于这个原因）
take up
（开始从事）
be able to
at the beginning of
write down take up
have to do with
forget about
能够做某事
在
……
开始
写下，记下
从事，学着做
有关系
忘掉
Summary
We like _________ (
讨论
) answers in groups in class.
Do you often make ________ (
承诺
) to other people?
Students have too much ___________ (
学校作业
) to do every evening.
Nancy really wanted __________ (
提高
) her English.
Middle school students have lots of musical _______ (
业余爱好
) like playing the guitar.
I.
根据汉语提示，补全单词。
to discuss
promises
schoolwork
to improve
hobbies
Exercises
Do you often make a ______ (week) plan for the schoolwork?
At the _________ (begin) of the class, Miss Zhou sang a song for us.
Do you know the ________ (mean) of “resolution”?
My parents don’t agree ______ (buy) me an iphone.
II.
用括号内所给词的适当形式填空。
weekly
beginning
meaning
to buy
中考链接
In his e-mail, David promised _________his daughter during her stay in Japan.
visiting B. visit
C. visited D. to visit
承诺做某事
promise to do sth.
D
1.Learn the new words and phrases by heart.
2.Finish the exercises in
Learning English
.
3.Preview 3a-4 on page 47-48.
Homework
Section B 3a-Self Check
Objectives
To learn to write about your
resolutions.
To learn the new words:
own
, personal,
relationship...
To learn to make plans to do
things.
be able to
at the beginning of
write down take up
have to do with
forget about
能够做某事
在
……
开始
写下，记下
从事，学着做
有关系
忘掉
Review
resolutions
own personal improvement
physical health
how to do better at school
make more money
do better at home
improve the relationships with family and friends.
How many kinds of resolutions do you know?
What are they?
Brain storm
Talk about your future jobs
soldiers
— What
are you going to
be when you grow up?
— I
want to be
…
policeman/policewoman
doctors
cook
Complete the paragraphs about resolutions with the words in the box.
take
listen make
is help
learn
are
3
a
Resolutions
___ promises to yourself. They may ____ to make you a better person and to make your life easier. I am going to ______ four resolutions.
The
first resolution is about my own personal improvement. Next year, or maybe sooner, I am going to ____ up a new hobby. I think singing ___ a great activity so I am going to _____ to sing. I think this will also make my family happy because they love to _____ to music and sing together.
take
is
learn
listen
are
help
make
Write your resolutions under the following headings.
Ideas for improving my physical health
Ideas for improving my relationships with my
family
and friends
3.
Ideas for doing better at school
get more exercise, eat less fast food, go to sleep early…
spend more time with my family, help my friends more…
read more books, study hard, do homework…
3b
Use your notes to write three more paragraphs about your resolutions. In each paragraph, write what you are going to do and why.
_______________________
_______________________
_______________________
_______________________
_______________________
3
c
本文
为写自己新年决心。因此在写句子时
应用一般
将来
时态，用
be going to
结构。
根据
3b
中的要点提示，模仿
3a
中的写作方式，
将
自己
的新年决心依次写在每个相关的决心里。
最后
，再通读一遍自己的短文，看是否通顺和正确。
写作指导
：
Sample writing:
The
second resolution is about improving my physical health. I am going to try a new sport such as ping pong and play it two or three times a week. Playing more sports will help me to become healthier and I will not fall ill so often.
The
third resolution is about improving
my relationships
with my family and friends. I am going to spend more time with my family. Maybe we can take up a new hobby
together! Doing more things together with my family will make my family happy. I am also going to help my friends more. For example, I can help them with their English homework if there is anything they don’t understand. Helping my friends will show them that I care about them and that they are important to me.
The last resolution is about how to do better at school. I am going to read more books in English. That is going to help me learn more English words. I know I can keep this resolution because reading is fun.
We’re going to make the subway better.
Then
people don’t have to drive to work.
2.
_________________
3
. _________________
4.
_________________
…
Imagine you work for your city. Think of a plan to
make it
cleaner and greener. (
P48
)
4
We’re going to end burning coal for heating. We will try to look for a kind of new energy.
We’re going to plant more trees around the city.
We’re going to go to school or work by electric-bike.
We’re going to help clean the streets and parks on the weekends.
1 Match the jobs with the school subjects.
1.computer programmer medicine
2.engineer
computer
science
3.doctor
math
4. basketball player
science
5.scientist
P.E
.
Self Check
A: What do you ________to be when you grow up?
B: I want ________ a scientist.
A:Wow! That sounds cool. But it’s difficult.
______ are
you
________
to do that?
B: After I finish high school, I’m ________ to go to university.
A: ________ are you ________ to study?
B: In Hefei. I’m ________ to study there for four years.
A: I think I want ________ a teacher. I’m ________ to teach
in
Wuhan.
2 Fill in the blanks in the conversation.
want
to be
How
going
going
Where
going
going
to be
going
3 Write about your plans.
Tomorrow, I’m going to_____________________
Next week, ______________________________
Next month, ______________________________
Next year, ________________________________
have an English lesson.
I am going to
travel
to Dalian.
I am going to visit my friend.
I am going to move to another city.
1. ____
you ____ a teacher when you grow
up?
A.
Will; going to be
B.
Are; going to be
C.
Are; /
D.
Will; be
2. I don’t know if Tom _____. Maybe he ___
if
it doesn’t
rain.
A.
will come; comes
B.
will come; will come
C.
comes; comes
D.
comes; will come
B
B
I.
单项选择。
Exercises
3. He will be back ____a few minutes.
A.
with
B.
for
C.
on
D.
in
4. What time ____we go to the
station tomorrow
?
A.
will
B.
shall
C.
do
D.
are
5. He will leave Beijing as soon as he
___ the work
next
week.
A.
finishes
B
.
doesn’t finish
C.
will finish
D.
won’t
finish
D
B
A
6. There____ a party this afternoon.
A.
will be
B.
will have
C. is
going to have
D.
are going to have
7. It____ National Day tomorrow. We ___ a party.
A.
is going to be; will have
B.
will be; is having
C.
will be; are going to have
D.
will have; is going to be
8. Tom is 10 years old now, next year he ___11.
A.
is
B.
is going to
C.
will be
D.
will to be
A
C
C
II.
根据汉语提示完成句子。
1.
My
brother is studying _________ ________
(
计算机科学
)
，
and he wants to be a _____________
(
电脑程序员
).
2. Li
Lei’s uncle is a ____________(
专业的
)
engineer in
the factory.
3.I
think he can become a good _______(
飞行员
).
4
. Bai Yansong is a famous _________ (
新闻记者
)from
CCTV
.
`
computer science
programmer
professional
pilot
reporter
1. Cheng
Han’s mother is going to
hold
art
exhibitions
. (
改为一般疑问句
)
___ Cheng Han’s mother ______
to
hold
art
exhibitions?
Is
going
III.
句型转换。
2. I’m
going to be
an actor
when I grow up.
(
就
画
线
部分提问
)
_____ are you going to __ when you grow up?
3. My
aunt is going to move to
Paris
.
(
就画线
部分提问
)
______ is your aunt going to _____ ?
What
Where
be
move
4. We are going to
play basketball
tomorrow
.
(
就画线
部分提问
)
_____ are you going to ___ tomorrow?
5. Her cousin is going to travel
around the
world.
(
改为同义句
)
Her cousin is going to
travel_________________
.
What
all over the world
do
6. are, to, going, next, week, they, do, what?
(
连词成句
)
______________________________
7. I’m, going, walk, fast, not, too, to.
(
连词成句
)
_______________________________
What are they going to do next week?
I’m not going to walk too fast.
A: ________________________?
B: I’m going to buy a present(
礼物
).
A: ____________________________?
B: I’m going to give it to my English teacher.
What are you going to do
Who
are you going to give it to
IV.
补全对话。
A: _______________________?
B: I’m going to buy a card.
A: __________________________?
B: I’m going to buy it in the shop over there.
A: Are you going there alone (
独自一人
)?
B: No. _____________________________.
What
are you going to buy
Where
are you going to buy it
I
am going there with my friend
1.
这是我的个人意见
。
This is my personal opinion.
2.
你同意他的想法吗
?
3
.
我们
的假期刚开始时，雨就整整下了
3
天。
It rained on and on for three whole days at the beginning of our holiday
V
.
翻译句子。
Do you agree with his idea?
5.
他能帮你的忙
。
He is able to help you.
4.
我的新年计划是改善我和家人还有朋友的关系
。
My New Year’s resolution is improving my relationships with my family and friends.
6.
这次事故我是全部亲眼看到的。
I saw the whole accident with my own eyes.
Homework
Write a letter to your friend to tell him or her what you are going to do for the next vacation.
unit 7
人教版八年级英语上册单元全套课件
Will people have robots?
To learn to make predictions.
To learn to predict future with the sentence patterns:
will + do/there will be
.
To
predict our future and work hard for the future.
Objectives
I played computer
when I was a child.
I study computer
every day.
I will be a computer
scientist like Bill Gates.
Free talk
大胆畅想未来
Let’s predict our futures.
How will the world be different in the future,
100 years from now?
People
will
have robots.
Robots can do...
Kids
won’t
go to school. They’
ll
study at home on computers.
Will there be
more
trees or
fewer
trees?
I think there will be ________ trees.
People
won’t
use money. Everything
will
be free.
Free
Language Goal: Make predictions.
How will the world be different 100 years from now? Read these predictions. Check ( ) A for agree or D for disagree.
___A___D 1.People will have robots in their homes.
___A___D 2.People won’t use money. Everything will be free.
___A___D 3.Books will only be on computers, not on paper.
___A___D 4.Kids won’t go to school.
They’ll study at home on computers.
___A___D 5.There will only be one country.
___A___D 6.People will live to be 200 years old.
1a
Listen and circle the predictions you hear in 1a.
People will have robots in their homes.
People won’t use money. Everything will be free.
Books will only be on computers, not on
paper
.
Kids won’t go to school. They’ll study at home on computers.
There will only be one country.
People will
live to be
200 years old.
1b
一张纸
a piece of paper
↓
live to be...
活
到
……
Translate the sentences according to the listening.
1.
我认为人们将不使用钱了。
I don't think people will use money.
2.
你认为所有东西将免费吗？
Do you think everything will be free?
3.
将有世界和平吗？
Will there be world peace?
4.
孩子们将不去上学。
Kids won't go to school.
A: Will people use money
in 100 years
?
B: No, they won
’
t. Everything will be free.
Will people live to be 200 years old?
A: Yes, they will.
1c
Ask and answer questions about the predictions in 1a.
100
年后
People won’t use money. Everything will be free.
人们不使用钱，任何东西都是免费的。
be free
免费的， 除此意思外，
be free
还有“有空的，空闲的”意思。
►
Many Spaniards believe that music and movies should be free.
许多西班牙人认为音乐和电影应该是免费的。
►
Will you be free tomorrow morning?
你明天早上有空吗？
Language points
2.
Will people use money
in 100 years
?
一百年后人们还会使用钱吗？
这里的
in 100
years
“
在
……
期间；在
……
以后”后接一段时间表示在将来某段时间之后。
►
He’ll come back
in a week
.
他将于
一周之后
回来。
►
I’ll call you
in
two hours
.
我
两个小时后
给你打电话。
3. Will
people
use
money in 100 years?
will+
动词原形表将来
莉萨半个小时之后到。
____________________________
Lisa
will arrive
in half an hour.
4. “
there be
”句型一般将来时的表达
:
肯定句
:
There will be
＋名词
(
短语
)
否定句
:
There will not / won’t be
＋名词
(
短语
)
一般疑问句
:
— Will there be
＋名词
(
短语
)?
— Yes, there will. / No, there won’t.
Will there be
fewer trees?
There will be
more people.
There won’t be
money.
Everything
will be
free.
1. ______ you _______ your winter holiday next week?
A. Do... have B. Will... have C. had D. have
2. —When _____ you ____ to Australia? —Next Monday.
A. did, fly B. will, fly C. are, fly D. do, fly
3. Which team ________ the next football match?
A. wins B. won C. will win D. win
I.
单项选择。
B
B
C
Exercises
II.
根据要求完成句子。
1
.Tony will
go to cinema
tonight.(对画线部分提问)
_________ _________
Tony
_________ t
onight?
2. I think Sally will be
a doctor
in five years.
（
对画线部分提问
）
_________ ___________ you think Sally __________ ___________ in five years?
What
will
will
be
What
do
do
3. There will be fewer people in 100 years.
(
改为一般疑问句
)
___________ there ____ fewer people in 100 years?
4. There won
’
t be any paper money. (
改为同义句
)
There will be ______ __________money.
Will
be
no
paper
There________ a concert in our school hall next week.
A. is going to have B. will have C. will be D. is going to hold
中考链接
由下周可知是一般将来时。要用
there will be
。
C
Five years ago
Today
In five years
He was….
He is ….
He will be….
He played….
He plays….
He will play….
He had….
He has….
He will have….
A task
Make a survey about your best friends and finish the following chart.
My future is not just a dream !
What will you be? Will you be pretty?
Will you be a teacher / doctor or whatever?
write a conversation to talk about your dream.
Homework
Section A 2a-2d
To learn to make predictions.
To learn to express quantities with
more, less, fewer...
To live a carbon life to protect our earth.
Objectives
n.
预言
Free talk
Let’s make a
prediction
about the
future.
n.
未来
He studies at home ___ __________.
on
computers
直升机式的帽子可以快速地带你到达目的地
。
Let’s share more fun predictions about the future.
衣服能自动换成时新样式
。
四条腿的裤子保证你随时随地可以休息
。
变成一身健康的古铜色皮肤只需几秒钟
。
Listen and circle the words you hear.
There will be (more / less / fewer) people.
There will be (more / less / fewer) free time.
There will be (more / less / fewer) cars.
There will be (more / less / fewer) pollution.
There will be (more / less / fewer) trees.
2
a
There will be fewer people. ___
There will be less free time. ___
People will use the subways less. ___
There will be more pollution. ___
Cities will be very big and crowded. ___
√
√
Listen again. Check ( ) the predictions you hear.
√
2b
Listen again,write T for true,F for false.
1.Here are some students' predictions about the future.( )
2.There will be more cars and subways because of more people.( )
3.Less pollution will be good for the earth.( )
4.Countries will be big and crowded because there will be a lot more people.( )
T
T
F
F
Make conversations about the predictions in 2a and 2b.
A: What’s your prediction about the future?
B: I think
there will be
more pollution.
A: Really? I don’t think so. But I think
there will be
fewer
trees.
2c
There will be more trees on the _____.
earth
Which opinion do you agree?
There will be fewer trees in the future.
There will be less pollution in the future.
There will be more pollution in the future.
Nick: What are you reading, Jill?
Jill: It
’
s a book about the
future
.
Nick: Sounds cool. So what will
the future be like?
Jill: Well, cities will be more crowded and polluted.
There will be
fewer
trees and the
environment
will be
in great danger
.
2d
Role-play the conversation.
Nick: That sounds bad! Will we have
to move to other planets?
Jill: Maybe. But I want to live on
the earth.
Nick: Me, too. Then what can we do?
Jill: We can use
less water
and
plant more trees
.
Everyone should
play a part in
saving the earth.
What is Jill reading?
2) What will the future be like according to the book?
3) What can people do to save the earth?
Read the conversation then answer the following
questions.
He’s reading a book about the future.
Cities will be more crowded and polluted.
There will be fewer trees and the environment will
be in great danger.
We can use less water and plant more trees.
Everyone should play a part in saving the earth.
Read and try to recite the conversation in 5-10 minutes.
1. Role play the conversation
in groups;
2. Role play the conversation
in front of the class
Role-play
Let’s see which group does the best.
Fill in the blanks according to the conversation.
Jill is reading a book about the future. Can you
imagine what ____ the future ____ like? Cities ___ ___
more crowded and polluted. There ___ ___ fewer trees
and the environment ___ ___ in great danger.
___ we ___ ___ move to other planets? What can we
do to live on the earth? We can use ___ water and plant
____ trees. Everyone should ___ ___ ____ ___ saving
the earth.
will
be
will
be
will
be
will
be
Will
have
to
play
a
part
in
less
more
1.
“
there be
”
句型一般将来时的表达
:
肯定句
:
There will be
＋名词
(
短语
)
否定句
:
There will not / won’t be
＋ 名词
(
短语
)
一般疑问句
:
— Will there be
＋名词
(
短语
)?
—Yes, there will. / No, there won’t
.
Language points
Will there be
fewer trees?
There will be
more people.
There won’t be
money. Everything will be free.
意思
用法
比较级
最高级
few
一些（否定）
修饰
可数名词
fewer
fewest
little
一些（否定）
修饰
不可数名词
less
least
many
许多
修饰
可数名词
more
most
much
许多
修饰
不可数名词
more
most
2.
fewer
与
less
及
more
表数量的用法
例
:
a few days ago
,
for a few weeks
►
He has
few friends
here.
►
There will be
fewer trees
.
few
，
形容词
，
带否定含义“
几乎没有
，
很少的
”，修饰可数名词。其比较级、最高级为规则变化：
few
－
fewer
－
fewest
。
“
a few
”
表示“
一些
”。
2) There’s
little
food
left. We have to buy some.
There’s
a little
water
in the cup.
There will be
less
pollution
.
little
，形容词
,
带否定含义“
很少的，几乎没有的
”
“
小的，幼小的
”，修饰不可数名词。其比较级、
最高级为不规则变化
:
little
－
less
－
least
。
“
a little
”
表
一些
”。
3)
There will be
more
people on the earth in the future.
More
and
more
students start to exercise
more
everyday to keep fit.
many
“
许多”，修饰可数名词。
much
“
许多”，修饰不可数名词。
many / more
比较级、最高级为不规则变化：
many / much
－
more
－
most
3.
play a part in
参与某事
►
China plays a more and more important part in
the world.
现在中国在世界上担负着越来越重要的角色
►
Everyone should play a part in protecting the
environment.
4.
What’s your
prediction
about the future?
你对未来有什么预测？
prediction
是
predict
的名词形式。有“
预言、预料、预测”
之意。 例如：
►
Sales were five percent lower than predicted.
销售额比预计的低
5%
。
►
Newspapers predicted that Davis would be re-elected.
报纸预测戴维斯将再次当选。
5.
Everyone should
play a part in
saving the earth.
每个人都应当尽一份力来拯救地球。
play a part in…
是一个固定结构，表示“参与
……
；
在
……
中尽自己一份力量” 例如：
►
She
plays an active part in
teaching these poor children.
她积极参加对这些贫穷孩子的教学工作。
►
He didn’t
play a part in
making this decision.
他并没有参与做出此决定。
will + do
表将来
There be
句型的一般将来时
— Will there be
...?
— No, there won’t. / Yes, there will.
3) more, less, fewer
的用法：
可数名词
前用
more/fewer
，
不可数名词
前用
more/less.
Summary
I.
根据句意用括号内所给单词的适当形式填空。
1. — There will be more cars in the future.
— I disagree. I think there will be
______
(few) cars.
2. I think there will be_______ (robot)everywhere in 50 years.
3. There will be more _________(pollution) on earth.
4. I will have ____(little) free time next month than this month.
robots
pollution
less
fewer
Exercises
II.
英译汉，并写一写。
1. —
Will
people use money
in
100 years?
—No, they won’t.
2. Kids
won’t
go to school in the future. They
’ll
study at
home on computers.
3. Everyone should
play a part
in planting trees.
4.
There will be
more trees here in ten years.
5. —
Will there be
fewer jobs for people?
—Yes,
there will
.
1.—
一百年后人们还使用钱吗？
—
不，不用。
2.
未来孩子们不会去上学了，他们将在家里用电脑学习。
3.
每个人都应该参与植树。
4.
十年后这里会有更多树木。
5.—
未来工作岗位会更少吗？
—
是的。
1.
明天不用上课
。
There ____ ____ ____ class tomorrow.
2. There will be a sports meeting tomorrow.
(
一般疑问句
）
___ ______ ___ a sports meeting tomorrow?
will
be
no
Will
there
be
Ⅲ.
填空题。
中考链接
每个人都应该在环保方面发挥作用。
(play)
Evervone should ________________ the environmental protection.
play a part in
Make predictions about future life with your partner.
2. Preview the new words and phrases.
Homework
Section A Grammar Focus-3c
To learn to use
will +
do
.
To learn to use
there will
be
.
To be able to predict city in the
future
with
the words
more
, fewer,
less...
Objectives
What will the future be like?
Cities will be more polluted. And there will be fewer trees.
Will people use money in 100 years?
No, they won’t. Everything will be free.
Will there be world peace?
Yes, I hope so.
Kids will study at home
on computers
.
They won’t go to school.
Grammar Focus
Countable nouns
Uncountable nouns
There will be
more
people.
There will be
fewer
trees.
There will be
more
pollution.
There will be
less
free time.
’ll = will
won’t = will not
I’m
=I am
You’re = you are
There’s
= there is
There’re
= there are
Don’t = do not
Doesn’t = does not
你以前还学过哪些缩写形式呢？
In the future, there will be
______fresh
water because there will be
______
pollution in the sea.
2. In 100 years, there will be
______
cars because there will be
______
people in the cities.
less
more
more
more
Fill
in the blanks with
more
, less or fewer.
3a
3. There will be_______ jobs for people
because
_______ robots
will do the same jobs as people.
4. I think there will be______ cities
because people
will
build
_______ buildings in
the
country.
5. In 50 years, people will have ______free time because
there
will be _____ things to do.
fewer
more
more
more
fewer
more
Complete the predictions with what you think will happen.
Kids study at school now. In 100 years,
___________________________________
2. I sometimes see blue skies in my city, but
in the future
_________________________
__________________________________
Kids will study at home on computers
I will often see the blue skies,
because there will be less pollution.
3
b
4. Families usually spend time together on
weekends, but maybe in 200
years
____________________________________
_____________________________________
3. People now usually live to be about 70-80
years old, but in the
future
_________________________________
People will live to be 200 years o
ld
.
Everyday can be weekend, because
they have robots to do everything.
I think there will be more tall buildings, and there will be fewer cars and more buses.
Draw a picture of what you think a city in the future will be like. Then describe it to the class.
3c
What can you see in this picture?
50 years later
There will be
more
people.
There will be
fewer
trees.
There will be
more
pollution.
There will be
more
buildings
.
There will be
more
cars.
There will be
less
fresh air.
There will be…
将会有
Changes
be going to + V
原形
1)
以人为
主语
，
表示
计划、打算去做某
事
，
这种计划
和
打算往往是事前就有的
。
►
She
is going to leave tomorrow.
►
There
is going to be a football match after class.
2)
表示人根据已有的事实和
迹象
，
认为
某
事即将发生。
►
It’s
going to rain.
R
eview
Grammar Focus
一般将来时
—— The simple future tense
概念：
1
）表示
将要
发生的动作或存在的状态。
►
We
will go to see him tomorrow.
我们
明天来看他。
2
）表示
将来
经常或反复发生的动作
。
►
From
now on, I will come every day
.
从
现在起，我每天都来。
肯定句
否定句
一般疑问句
特殊疑问句
主语
+ will +V
原形
主语
+ will +not + V
原形
Will +
主语
+ V
原形
特殊疑问词
+
一般疑问句
2.
基本句型
简略回答
Yes, I will.
No, I won’t. (
注意缩写形式）
Will
句式总结
肯定
否定
一般疑问句
回答
I will have many toys.
I won’t have many toys.
Will I have many toys?
Yes, I will. No, I won’t.
He will do a good job.
He won’t do a good
job.
Will he do a good job
Yes, he will. No, he won’t.
There will be more people.
There won’t be more people.
Will there be more people?
Yes, there will. No, there won’t.
They will be happy.
They won’t be happy.
Will they be happy?
Yes, they will. No, they won’t.
3. Will
表示将来时态
,
其后常跟
的
时间
状语。
tomorrow
明天
next week
下周
next year
明年
before
在
...
之前
next month
下个月
soon
不久
the day after tomorrow
后天
the year after next
后年
the week after next
下下周
★in ten years
十年后
注意：
Will
常用于第二、三人称，但在口语中各种人称都可以用
will
。
否定式：
will not = won’t
一般将来时
—— The simple future tense
There be
的一般将来时，表示：将来存在
有
（
1
）肯定句：
there will be…
e.g. There will be more people.
There will be fewer trees.
（
2
）否定句：
there won’t be…
e.g. There won’t be more papers.
There won’t be more buildings.
1.
People
won’t use
money
.
people
作“人”讲时，是
可数名词
,
单、
复数相同。
a
/ one people
或
two peoples
three
people, many
people
people
泛指
“人们”，是
一个集体名词
.
如：
►
There
are
five people
in that room.
那个
房
里有
五个人。
►
Many
people
like to go shopping
.
很多人
喜欢购物。
(×)
(
√ )
Language points
people
的其他意思
1) We study for the people.
我们
为人民而
学习
。
the people
作“人民”
讲
，
有
“全体”的含义。
2
) The Chinese people is a great people.
中华民族是一个伟大的
民族
。
people
作“民族”
讲
，
可以
说
a people
。
the village people
乡下人
the city people
城里人
people
指“平民、百姓、居民”
3
)
辨析
: people, person, folks
和
human.
1)
people
意思为“人们”时
,
着重指全体
2)
person
①
“人”
包括
men, women, children
② people
的单数形式
one people
one person
√
③
意思为“人们”时
,
着重指个体
VIP
= very important person
重要成员
3)
Folks
如
:
the old folks at home
家里的老人
意为“人们”时
,
指一般人或特殊年龄、位置、境遇等特殊阶级的人
,
现在常用
people
。
4)
human
= human being
人
(
类
)
主要用来区别于其他动物
纸币
paper money
硬币
coin
small money =change
零钱
ready money =cash
现金
earn / make money
赚钱
bank money
把钱存入银行
save money
存钱
refund money
退款
2)
m
oney
，
不可数名词
，
意
为“
钱，金
钱”。
可用
:
much, some, any, a lot of
等修饰。
2.
Everything will be
free
.
free
adj.
免费
的
，
免税的，空闲的，自由
的
→
n. freedom
免费，自由
free
list
免税货物单
free
market
自由市场
free
speech
言论自由
free
thinker
自由
思想家
free
way
高速公路
freeman
自由人
(
公民
)
freehearted
坦率
的
freewill
自愿的
3.
Kids won’t
go to school.
kid
小山羊、小山羊皮
(
口语
)
小孩
Kid =child
kids =children
(n.)
(v.)
(
口语
)
欺骗、耍弄、开玩笑
变化
过去式
kidded
现在分词
kidding
常用语
You’re kidding
!
你
在开玩笑
No kidding
!
别开玩笑
4.
They’ll study at
home on
computers.
homeland
hometown
homework
homemade
homegrown
homeless
be away from home
the joys of home
Please
make yourself at
home.
祖国
家乡
家庭作业
自制的
国产的
无家可归的
离家在外
天伦之乐
请随便
(
不要拘束
)
！
辨析
: family, house,
和
home
1)
family
指家、家庭、家人
不指住房
2)
house
指居住的房屋、
住宅
►
This
is my new house.
这是我的新居
3)
home
►
These
are my family.
这是我的家人
谚语
: East or west, home is best
.
金
窝银窝
,
不如自己的狗窝
.
谚语：
There is no place like home
.
没有
地方比得上家
.
①
指同家人共同生活的地方
,
不一定含有建筑物的意思
.
②
可以是船上、窑洞或帐篷里的家庭组织
.
③
特别强调家里的氛围和环境
④
home
在美语中指“住宅”
=house
5. People will
live
to
be
200 years old.
live to be +
基数词
+ years old
“
活
到
……
岁
”
辨析
live, alive, living
和
lively
live
“
活着的”
,
置于名词之前
,
作定语。
alive
“
在世的”
,
常作表语
,
但偶尔也
作后
置
定语
或补语
。
living
“
活着的”
,
常作定语
,
也可以作表语
,
作
表语时相当于
alive
。
lively
“
活泼的
,
有生气的”
,
既可以作定语
,
又
可以作
表语
。
adj.
6.
I think
there will be
more pollution.
(
宾语从句
)
某地
有某物
(
表存在
)
There be
某人
有某物
(
表拥有
)
Have / has
2) there be
接词要运用
就近
(
临近
)
原则
►
There
is a
book and two bags
.
►
There
are two
bags and a book.
1)
有
注意
:
由于
will
后接动词原形
,
因此
在
“
there
be
”
句型
一般
将来时的句中
will
之后用
be
动词的
原形，即
“
be
”
一词，无论
后面是单、复数或
不可数名词
(
短语
)
。
e.g
.
There
won’t
be
any paper money.
There
will
only
be
one country.
There
will
be
more leisure time.
3)
there be
句型的时态变化
一般过去时
There was / were…
一般现在时
There is / are…
一般将来时
There will be…
e.g. There
is
a book on the
table.
There
will
be
more people in this city
.
There
won’t
be
rain soon.
— Will
there
be
rain?
— Yes
, there will. / No, there won’t.
辨析
: every
和
each
7.
I think
every
home will have a robot.
every
each
每个
①
着重指由一个一个所形成的全体
②用于三个或三个以上的人或物
①
着重指全体中一个一个的个体
②用于两个或两个以上的人或物
►
E
very
answer is right.
每个答案都是对的
.
►
There
are trees on
each
side of the road.
路
的两边都
有树。
8.
There will be
fewer
trees.
There will be
less
free time
.
相同
点：
fewer
和
less
都表示“较少”的意思。
不同点：
1.
fewer
是
few
的比较级
，只能修饰
可数名词
复数
。
2.
less
是
little
的比较级
，只能修饰
不
可数名词。
用
fewer
或
less
填空
。
1) I earn _____ money than my sister.
There are ______cars parked outside
than yesterday
.
3) We have ______students this year
than
last year.
4) You ought to smoke _____cigarettes and
drink
_____beer.
less
fewer
fewer
fewer
less
练一练
：
9. Yes,
I hope so
.
对，我希望如此。
此句意为“
yes, I hope there will be
world Peace
”
。
句中的
so
为副词，代替了对话中上文所说的内容，除
hope
外，
so
还常与
think
（想），
believe
（相信），
guess
（猜测）等词搭配。例如：
►
A
: Is he coming to see us?
他
要来看我们吗？
B
: I think so.
我想是的。
10.
I sometimes see blue
skies
in my city,...
我
有时看到城市里的蓝天
，
……
句
中
skies
用作复数
，
表示天气或某地
的天空
看上去怎样
，
如
：
►
a
land of blue skies and warm sunshine.
一
片有着蓝蓝的天空和温暖的阳光的土地
。
当
只
指“天空”时
，
sky
通常
用单数形式
，如
:
►
There wasn’t
a cloud in the sky
.
天空
中万里无云。
►
The
sky turned dark just before the storm.
暴风雨
来临前，天空变得漆黑了。
Ⅰ
.
写出句中所缺单词。
1. I hope my r_____ can help me with
my housework
.
2. Will kids go to s_____?
3. There are many c________ in Asia.
4. There isn’t f_____ dinner in the world.
5. There won’t be any ______ _______(
钞票
).
6. The students hope teachers will give them
______(
少
)
homework
than last term.
chool
ountries
ree
obot
paper
money
less
Exercises
1. What _______ you ______ (do) this Sunday?
There _____ _____ (be) a football match.
______ you _______ (go) with us?
2. I _____ ______ (go) to see your father as
soon as
I get
to
Beijing.
3. I think it ______ _____ (be) rainy tomorrow.
4. My father _____ ______ (send) me a new bike
when
I
am tall enough.
II.
填空。
will
do
will
be
Will
go
will
go
will
be
will
send
1. —Where
______ you ____(live) five years
ago
?
—I
_____ (live) in Changsha.
2. He ______(be) a teacher after he left college.
3. Now he __________(have) lots of free time,
but he
_________(have) less free time in ten years.
4. There ________(be) fewer children in people’s
home
in 10 years.
Ⅲ.
用动词的适当形式填空。
lived
did
live
was
has
will have
will be
5.
— _____
they _____(play) football after school
next
Monday?
— No
, they
________.
Will play
won’t
Ⅳ.
按要求改写句子。
Students will go to school in the future.
（
改为一般疑问句
）
____________________________________
2) There will be some robots in our home.(
改否定
)
_____________________________________
3) Every one will have
a small
car
. (
对划线部分提问
)
——————————————————
What will every one have?
There
won’t
be some
robots in our home.
Will students
go to school in the future
?
1.
明天
, Jim
就
15
岁了。
2.
明天我爷爷不会去钓鱼。
3.
你下个月将会来合肥吗
?
4.
我们什么时候再见面
?
Ⅴ.
翻译。
My grandfather won’t go fishing tomorrow.
Jim will be fifteen years old tomorrow.
Will you come to Hefei next month?
When shall we meet again?
1. People will have robots in their homes
___100
years.
A. at B. in C. after D. with
2. I think there will be
____people
and
____pollution
.
A. fewer, many B. less, fewer
C. more, less D. less, fewer
3. There won’t be any ______ in 100 years.
A. paper moneys B. papers money
C. papers moneys D. paper money
B
C
D
Ⅵ.
单项选择。
4. Will there ______ more cars in people’s homes?
A. have B. has C. be D. /
5. I think every home will _____ a car.
A. be B. have C. has D. there be
6. There are two white ______ on the desk.
A. paper B. piece of paper
C. papers D. pieces of paper
7.
— Will
there be more trees?
— Yes
, ______.
A. they will B. there will
C. there will be D. there have
B
D
B
C
中考链接
In the near future, there
______
self-driving cars in our city.
is
B
. was
C
. are
D
. will be
由“在不久的将来”可知是一般将来时。要用
there will be
。
D
Write a short passage about yourself,
using the simple past tense, the simple
present tense and the simple future tense.
Homework
Section B 1a-1e
To be able to describe personal life in the future with
the simple future tense.
To learn to summarize the article.
To be able to predict the robots in the future with the words and expressions correctly.
Objectives
What will the world be like?
What were you doing five years ago?
What are you doing now?
In fifty years, what will the world be like?
more about the world
rocket
robot
astronaut
What will the earth be like in
the future (in 100 years)?
Cars will fly in the sky.
People will see the doctor at
home on computers.
People will live in the moon.
…
Write each word in the correct column below.
astronaut
house
apartment
train
rocket
space station
computer programmer
Jobs
Transportation
Places to live
astronaut
computer
programmer
train
rocket
house
apartment
space station
1a
n.
宇航员
n.
火箭
太空站
n.
公寓
Think of other words and write them in the
chart in 1a.
Jobs
Transportation
Places to live
astronaut
computer
programmer
train
rocket
house
apartment
space station
robot cleaner
super policeman
space ship
helicopter
(
直升机
）
flat
(
公寓
)
shelter
(
避难所
)
1b
Listen to Alexis and Joe. Number the pictures [1-3].
2
3
1
1c
Listen again. Fill in the blanks with the correct verbs in the box.
I
______ in an apartment across the street
from
here.
2. I ________ near here.
3. I _______a computer programmer.
am live work lived took
will be will live will fly
work
am
live
1d
4. We
in a house in the country.
5. I
the train to school.
6. I
an astronaut.
7. I
rockets to the moon.
8. I
on a space station.
lived
will be
will fly
took
will live
am live work
lived
took
will
be
will live will fly
Past
Now
Future
Living place
Job
Transportation
/
Listen again, fill in the chart
a house
an apartment
a space station
a student
a computer
programmer
an astronaut
train
rocket
Student A is Alexis and Student B is Joe. Talk about Joe’s life now, 10 years ago and 10 years from now.
A: Where do you live?
B: I live in an apartment.
1e
A: Where
did
you
live
10 years ago?
B: I
lived
in Greenville.
A: How
did
you get to school?
B: I
took
train to school.
10 years ago
A: what
will your life be like
in 10 years?
B: oh, I think
I’ll be
an astronaut.
A: Where
will you live
in 10 years?
B: I
will live
on a space station.
In 10 years
Give us a report to describe
your past,now and future .
Ten years ago,I...
Now...
In the future,...
Some robots are very
human-like.
一些机器人十分像真人。
在
human-like
（形似真人的；真人一样的）一词中，
like
为形容词后缀，用在名词之后，与其构成一个完整的形容词，表示“ 形似
……
的；像
……
一样的；类似于
……
的”。
Language points
如：
a bird-like building
（像鸟一样的建筑）
a cabbage-like vegetable
（一种形似卷心菜的蔬菜）
the ball-like thing on the top of the building
（楼顶上那个像球一样的东西）
I.
用一般将来时填空。
(
借助
will)
1. I _________ (visit) my uncle tomorrow.
2. There _______ (be) a football match next week.
3. He ________ (help) you with your English this evening.
4. They _________(play) soccer if it doesn’t rain.
5. We _________ (have) a meeting tomorrow.
will
visit
will be
will help
will play
will have
Exercises
II.
翻译句子。
1.
你认为人们的家里会有机器人吗
?
Do _____ _____ there will be robots ___ ______ homes?
2.
人们将活到
150
岁。
People ____ _____ ___ ____150 years old.
3.
我认为她会当医生。
I think she ______ ____ a doctor.
you think
in people’s
will live to be
will
be
4.
你住哪儿
?
我住在北京。
______ _____ _____ ______? I live in Beijing.
5.
他反复看她的来信。
He reads her letter ____ ____ ____ _______.
6.
等了很长一段时间后他厌烦了。
He _____ _______ after waiting for a long time.
over
and
over
again
got
bored
Where
do
you
live
III.
完成句子。
1.
凯蒂不能参加运动会了。
Kitty ____ _____ _______ ___take part in the sports meeting.
2.
昨天有好几百人来我们学校参观。
__________ ___ people came to visit our school yesterday.
3.
彼得在上海找到了一份工作，他不得不在那里独自生活。
Peter finds a job in Shanghai, so he has to _____there_______.
Hundreds of
is not able to
live alone
4.
我们家乡的污染没有以前严重了。
There is _____ ___________ in our hometown
than before.
5.
十年后你会是什么样子？
How ____ ____ __ ______ in ten years?
less pollution
will you be like
Ⅳ
.
单项选择。
1.The next time you see Nikos, he ___ sixteen years old.
A. will be B. is C. was D. will
2.Margot _______ computer science last year.
A. studies B. studied
C. will study D. is studying
3.In ten years, John _______ an astronaut.
A. is B. will be C. was D. will
A
B
B
4. How many people _____ there fifty years ago.
A. will B. were C. are D. will be
5. In AD 20 000,what _______ the world be like?
A. is B. will C. was D. are
6.There is _____ meat but ______ cakes on the plate. Please have one.
A. a little; a few B. a few; a little
C. few; little D. little; a few
B
B
D
7. There is very _______ on this street.
A. few traffics B. little traffics
C. few traffic D. little traffic
8. —What is your favorite 21st century prediction?
—I predict there will be _______ leisure time.
A. many B. few C. fewer D. less
D
D
写作
内容
:
你想要
拥有自己
的机器人
，跟科学家
描述
一下你都要求你的
机器人
会什么技能！
Homework
Dear robot scientist,
I am a student from No.52 Middle School. ________
______________________________________________
_______________________________________________
_______________________________________________
_____________________________.
Yours
Section B 2a-2e
To be able to describe personal life in the future with
the simple future tense
.
To learn to summarize the article.
To be able to predict the robots in the future with the words and expressions correctly.
Objectives
Tell your partner what you know about robots. What do they look like and what can they do?
2a
What do they look like?
They look like humans.
What does it look like?
It looks like a kangaroo.
This robot looks like a huge arm.
What will robots do for us
in the future?
Let’s make predictions
In 100 years….
speak
do exercise
run
cook
play the piano
play football
dance
help people do the most unpleasant jobs
help with the housework
1.
even adv.
甚至；连；愈加
e.g.
The little girl can
even
recite the article.
小女孩甚至还能背诵这篇文章。
2.
human adj.
人的
n.
人
e.g.
A
human
can think and talk, but an animal can’t.
人能思考、说话，但动物不能。
New words
3.
already
adv
.
已经；早已
e.g.
My aunt is
already
fifty, but she looks very young.
我姑姑早已五十岁了，但她看起来很年轻。
4.
dangerous
adj
.
有危险的；不安全的
名词
danger +
后缀
ous → dangerous
e.g. Some animals are
in great
danger
.
一些动物处于极大的危险中。
Lions are
dangerous
animals.
狮子是危险的动物。
in great danger
处于极大的危险中
5.
factory n.
工厂
e.g.
There will be more
factories
in the future.
将来会有更多的工厂。
6.
fall v. (fell/ fel/)
倒塌；跌倒；掉落
fall down
突然倒下；跌倒；倒塌
e.g.
The house might
fall down
in a few months.
几个月内这所房屋也许就会倒塌。
pl.-factories
7.
disagree v.
不同意 ；持不同意见；有分歧
前缀
(dis) + agree (
同意
)→disagree
disagree with sb. / disagree to do sth.
e.g. My father
agrees
, but my mother
disagrees
to go there
so late.
我爸爸同意，但我妈妈不同意如此晚去那儿。
8.
believe v.
相信；认为有可能
believe sb.
相信某人说的话；
believe + that
从句
e.g.
I
believe that
you can finish the work on time.
我相信你会按时完成工作。
9.
shape n.
形状
pl.-s
e.g.
What is the
shape
of your kite?
你的风筝是什么形状的
？
10.
hundreds of
许多；大量
= lots of
e.g. There are
hundreds of
flags in front of the building
在那个高楼前有很多旗帜。
辨析：数字
+
原形，
s,of
共存亡
↓
↓
表具体数量
two hundred “
两百
”
表大概数量
hundreds of “
好几百，许多
”
11.
over and over again
反复地；多次，还可以说
over and over
e.g.
They sang the song
over and over
.
他们反复地唱那首歌。
He called
over and over again
but nobody answered.
他多次打电话但没有人接。
12.
possible adj.
可能的；可能存在或发生
(
前缀
)im+ possible →impossible
不可能的
e.g.
Do you think it’s
possible
to beat them?
你认为战胜他们有可能吗
?
To cross this river seems
impossible
.
穿过这条河似乎不可能。
Read the article and match each paragraph with the question it discusses.
Para 1 will robots think like humans in the future?
Para 2 what will robots be like in the future?
Para 3 what can robots do today?
Para 4 what are robots like in movies?
2
b
Do
You Think You Will
Have Your
Own Robot?
When we watch movies about the
future, we
sometimes see
robots
. They
are
usually
like
human
servants.
They
help
with
the
housework
and do jobs like working in
dirty or
dangerous
places.
2. Today
there are already robots working in
factories
.
Some
can help to build cars, and
they
do simple jobs
over
and
over again
. Fewer people will do such jobs in the
future because they
are boring, but robots will never
get
bored
.
Scientists are now trying to make robots look like humans and
do the same things as we do
. Some robots in Japan can walk and dance. They are fun to watch. However, some scientists believe that although we can make robots move like people,
it will be difficult to
make them really think like a human. For example, scientist James White thinks that robots will never
be able to
wake up
and know
3.
where they are. But many scientists
disagree with
Mr. White. They think that robots will even be able to talk like humans in 25 to 50 years.
Some scientists believe that there will be more robots in the future. However, they
agree
it may take hundreds of years. These new robots will have many different shapes. Some will look like humans, and others might look like animals. In India, for example, scientists made robots that look like snakes.
4.
If buildings
fall down
with people
inside, these snake robots can help
look for
people under the buildings.
This was not possible 20 years ago,
but computers and rockets also
seemed impossible 100 years ago.
We never know what will happen in the future!
In some science fiction movies, what
will
people
have
in the future?
2. Which country has robots that can
walk and
dance?
3
. Where are the huge arm robots working now?
Robots.
Japan.
In factories.
Read and answer the questions.
4. What does James White think?
5. What kind of job can a snake robot do?
He thinks that robots will never be able to
wake up and know where they are.
After an earthquake, it could help look for
people under buildings.
Read the article again quickly. Complete the sentences about what robots can do now.
1.Robots can build
in factories.
2.They can do
jobs many times and not get bored.
3.Some can
and
.
4. Some can help
people under
.
cars
simple
walk dance
look for
buildings
2
c
Some robots are very human-like. They can walk and _________ like people. Some scientists think that in the future they will _________ robots more like humans. This may not
in the near future, but at some point, robots will even be able to _________ like people.
Fill in the blanks in this paragraph with words from the article.
dance
make
happen
talk
2
d
However, some scientists_______ . James White believes that robots won’t be able to do the _________ things as us. For example, he thinks that robots will
_________be able to wake up and know where they are. Which side do you _________ with?
same
never
agree
disagree
what kinds of animals might robots look like in the future? What do you think these robots will be able to do? Write your ideas and discuss them with your partner.
I think some future robots might look like butterflies. They will be able to sing and dance. When I am sad, they can try their best to make me happy. And when I want to go shopping, they can take me to the mall,(
购物广场
) so that I will never stand in the crowded street. In my life, it gives a lot of help.
2
e
1.
Fewer
people will do such jobs in the future because they are boring, but robots will never
get bored
.
此句中的
get bored
译为“
感到厌烦，感到无聊”。
其同义词为：
be bored
二者的区别在于：
get bored
（强调动作）
be bored
（强调状态）
英语中有很多过去分词或形容词都可以和
get, be
连用。比如：
tired
，
angry
等。例如：
Language points
►
You won’t
be bored
when you are hungry.
当你饿的时候你就不会觉得无聊了。
►
If you do the same things month after month, you may
get bored
.
如果你每月都做同样的事情，你可能会感到厌烦。
2.
It will be difficult to
make them really think like a human.
把机器人做的像人一样思考将会很难。通常用
it
做形式主语，将不定式和动名词置于谓语后面，特别是主语较长时，或在一些习惯用法中。
当谓语是系表结构（
be +
形容词
/
名词）时，常将不定式后置，
构成句型
“
it + be +
表语（形容词
/
名词）
+
不定式”。
如：
►
It is not an easy thing to master a foreign language.
掌握一门外语不是件容易的事。
3.
Scientist James White thinks that robots will never
be able to
wake up.
Be able to
“
能够
……”
can & be
able to
相同点
:
两者都表示能力
不同点
:
1
）
can
只有现在式和过去式。
2
）
be
able to
可用于现在时、
过去时
和
将来时
，
但
它
没有进行时。
3)
表示经过努力而成功的某一次动作，只能用
be able to
.
试做以下试题
:
①He ____________ drive a car.
②He ____________climb over the mountain before.
can
was able to
4.
But many scientists
disagree with
Mr. Whit.
但很多科学家不赞同怀特先生的观点。
这里的“
disagree with
”
译为
“
不同意；不一致；
不适合
”
。
固定搭配：
agree
（同意）
agree with sb/sth
disagree
（同意）
disagree with sb/sth
e.g.
►
They
disagreed with
each other about the time
and place of the accident.
他们在对事故发生的时间和地点彼此有分歧。
►
I strongly
disagree with
his views.
我强烈反对他的见解。
►
I disagree completely with Jack.
我完全不同意杰克的意见。
5.If buildings
fall down
with people inside, these snake robots can help look for people under the buildings.
如果建筑物倒塌，人还在里面，这些蛇形机器人可以帮助在坍塌的建筑物里搜救伤者。
fall down
的意思如下：
1
）掉下，落下，跌倒：
►
The old lady fell down in the street and broke her leg.
老妇跌倒在大街上，摔坏了腿。
2
）拜倒，跪倒：
►
They fell down before him.
他们拜倒在他面前。
3
）倒塌：
►
The old house soon fell down.
这座老房很快就倒塌了。
6.
So I’ll probably just
keep
a bird.
keep
: v.
“
保持；维持；喂养”
keep
+ sb. / sth. +
形容词
“
使某人
/
某物
……”
e.g. The job kept them busy for a year.
2)
keep
+
形容词
“保持”
e.g. The man ran up and down to keep warm.
3)
keep
+ sb. / sth. doing
“
让某人
/
某物继续做某事”
e.g. She kept us waiting for her at the station for an hour.
4)
keep
+ doing
“
继续做，坚持做”
e.g. He kept running after her, trying to catch her.
7. I will live on a
space
station.
space
空间，空处
(
可数
)
►
There is a
space
of 46 inches wide between the two bookcases.
►
The road is bad for a
space
of two miles.
►
We need more
space
to set it up.
►
Is there any
space
left?
还有地方吗
?
space
当太空讲时是不可数名词。
space
station
太空站
space
ship
太空船
space
suit
宇航服
1. Read the passage after class
2. Write your own sentences with the
phrases below
over and over again, get bored, wake up, hundreds of, be able to, fall down
look for,
seem impossible
Homework
Section B 3a-Self Check
To be able to describe personal life in the future with
the simple future
tense
.
To
learn to summarize the
article.
To
be able to predict the robots in the future with the words and expressions
correctly.
Objectives
1.
在工厂
______________
2.
做简单工作
_________________
4.
多次；反复地
___________________
5.
许多；大量
___________________
6.
看起来像人类
________________
Let’s review the phrases in 2b.
in factories
do simple jobs
over and over again
hundreds of
look like humans
Revision
7.
醒来
________
8.
能够
_____________
9.
突然倒下；跌倒
___________
10.
寻找；寻求
______________
wake up
be able to
fall down
look for
Today there are ________ robots working in ___________. For example, they can help to ______ cars, and they do ______ jobs over and over again. They do jobs like working in dirty or
_________
______.
Fill in the blanks with the right words.
already
factories
build
dangerous places
simple
Fewer people will do such jobs in future because they are boring, but robots will never get _______. Some scientists _______ that there will
be more
robots in ________ ____ years. They are trying to make robots look like ________.
bored
hundreds of
believe
humans
In 20 years, I think I’ll be a newspaper reporter. I’ll _______in Shanghai, because
there will
be_______ jobs in that city. As a reporter, I think I will _______ lots of interesting people, so I’ll have more friends.
Read Jill’s answer to the question “What will your life be like in the future?” Fill in the blanks with the following words.
meet work live look keep
wear more less fewer take
live
more
meet
3a
I’ll have _______ pets, though,
because
I’ll
have
_______ free
time
. And my apartment will
be
no
good
for pets because
it’ll be
too small. So I’ll
probably just ____ a
bird. During the week,
I’ll
____ smart clothes. On the weekend,
I’ll
____ less smart but I’ll be more comfortable. In the future, people will ____more so they’ll probably have fewer vacations, but I think
I’ll
_______ a holiday in Hong K
ong
when possible. One day I’ll even go to Australia.
fewer
less
keep
wear
work
take
look
computer
programmer
basketball
player
airline
pilot
engineer
teacher
actor
What will you be in 10 years ?
I will be a …
Where will you work? I will work in…..
Make predictions:
How will you be different in the future?
Maybe 20 years from now?
I
will be
more beautiful.
I
will
have lots of money.
I
won’t
go to school.
I
will
have a big house.
……
Five
years
ago
, I
was
in primary
school, I
played
football
with
classmates after class,
and
I
had
a dog.
Now
I’m
a
middle
school student
, I
like
playing tennis. I
am
good at
English
and
I
have
good grades.
In
five
years
, I
will
be
a
doctor
,
I
will
make
much money, and
I
will
travel around the world. I
will
play
the guitar. I
will
have a car.
Write a short passage about yourself.
five years ago
now
i
n
five
years
Complete
the chart about your life 20 years from now. You can add more items
.
What
will your
…
be like?
job
home
free time activities
neighborhood
s
uper
policeman
i
n
America
attend a dancing
party
,
travel
a
famous singer
3b
Write about your life 20 years from now. Use 3a and 3b to help you.
In 20 years, I think I’ll be a super policeman. I’ll live in America, because there will be more joys in that city. As a super policeman, I think I will catch many bad guys(
坏人
), so I’ll help keep the city peaceful. And in my free time, I’ll attend
all
3c
kinds of dancing
balls,
so
that I can make a lot of friends. In
addition
(
另外
)
,
I
want to take a holiday to travel around the world. Every time when I get home, my neighborhood Coco will sing for me. I like this kind of
life
.
Discuss how you think a robot will help students with schoolwork in the future. Write down your group’s ideas and draw a picture of your robot.
I think students won’t need dictionaries because a robot will tell them the meaning of the words.
4
Sample:
1
. I think students won’t need
to go
to school
, because
their
robots can teach
them
at home.
2. I think students won’t need
to
write their
homework
on
paper but
on computer
, and robots will help
students to
correct the homework.
more/fewer
more/less
Self check
1. Put the words in the correct columns in the chart.
job, people, pollution, robot, fresh water, paper, planet, car, clean air, city, free time, building, money, tree
1. more
后面可跟可数名词或不可数名词；
2. fewer
后面跟可数名词；
3. less
后面跟不可数名词；
more/fewer
more/less
job, people,
robot
，
planet
car, city
building
，
tree
pollution, fresh water
paper, clean air,
free time
，
money
方法指导
2. Fill in the blanks in the conversation.
Girl
: Mom, what will the future
like?
Mom: Well, nobody knows what the future will be
.
Girl
: But
I be beautiful like you?
I be a pilot? I
want
to fly up into the sky.
be
like
will
Will
Mom:
You
’
re
already beautiful. And you should study
hard
. Then you _____ be a pilot.
Girl
: Ok, I must study harder then.
Mom: But you should also remember that
_____will _____
both
good and bad things in life.
Girl
: Oh, but
I
’
m
not scared, Mom
, because you______
__________help
me!
will
be
there
will
be here to
1.
be
: like
在本句中是介词，意为“像”，因此本句中缺少
be
动词，句中有情态动词
will
，故应用
be
动词的原形。
3.
will,
will
:
句意“我会像你一样漂亮吗？我会成为一名飞行员吗？”用一般将来时。
2.
like:
句意“没有人知道将来会是怎么样？”本句缺少介词，故用
like
。
5.
there, be:
句意“但是你应当明白生活中
既好的
也会有坏的事情”，本句为
there be
句型的一般
将来时态。
6.
will
:
因为你将会帮助我。也是一般
将
来
时态
。
4.
will:
空格后是
be
动词原形，故应用情态动词
will
。
1. I want to _____ for myself when I’m older.
2. My friends ______ a pet pig in their house.
3. I need to _____ smart for my job interview.
4. We have to ______ a uniform to school.
5. One day people will ______ to the moon for
vacations
.
work
keep
look
I.
填空。
wear work look fly keep
wear
fly
Exercises
II.
用
more, less, fewer
填空。
1. We plant trees every year, there will be _____ trees.
2. If we waste water, there will be _____ water.
3. If every family has a baby, there will be _____ people.
4. I think English is _________ popular than Chinese.
5. There will be ______ robots everywhere, and humans will
have _____ work to do.
6. There will be _____ free time when people retire.
more
less
more
less/
more
more
less
more
III.
根据句意填单词或短语。
1.
A place to live in space: ____________
2. Something kids will use to study at home:
__________
3. These will be in every home: _________
4. Yang Liwei is a famous Chinese __________.
space station
astronaut
computers
robots
Ⅳ.
用所给词的正确形式填空。
1. Tony
______ (write) a letter to his pen pal
in the U.S
. last
night
.
2. We all know Brazil _______ (win) the
World
Cup last year.
3. There
__________
(be) a big football match
between England and Italy on TV tonight.
wrote
won
will
be
4. The doctor tells his mother he will
be________
(well)
next
week than he is now.
5. Do you think there will be more pollution
or________
(little) pollution in 100 years?
better
less
Ⅴ.
句型转换。
1. The
students of Class 2 will see the animals at
the zoo
this
Sunday afternoon. (
变否定句
)
The students of Class 2 ________ ______
the animals at
the
zoo this Sunday afternoon.
2. The little girl fell off her bike
yesterday
.
(
就
画
线
部分提问
)
________ _____ the little girl _______
off her bike?
won’t
see
When
did
fall
3. I think there will be more pollution.
（改为否定句）
I ______ think there ______ be
more pollution
.
4. He will have a good time. (
先改为否定句，再
改为一般
疑问句
)
He _____ _____ a good time
.
_____
he _____ a good time?
5. Mary will get home
at nine this evening
.
(
画
线
部分提问
)
______ ______ Mary get home?
don’t will
won’t have
Will have
When will
6. My aunt hates keeping a pet dog. (
变同义句
)
My aunt _______ _____ _____
_______a
pet dog.
7. I have more apples than Lily. (
变同义句
)
Lily ______ ________ apples than I.
has
fewer
doesn’t like to
keep
Ⅵ.
根据提示完成句子。
1. Last year Lisa _____ ____ _________ (
在上大学
).
2. The old man _____ ____ _____
__________
(
住在一
所公寓里
)
by
himself now.
3. People _____ _____ _______
_____ _______
(
有更多
的空闲时间
) in the future.
4. Do you think there ____ ____ _____
_________
(
有更少
的污染
)
in
100 years?
was
in
college
lives in
an
apartment
will have more free time
will be
less
pollution
我将去西藏。
I ________ to Tibet.
2.
树林里将有很多鸟。
There _____ ____some birds in the woods.
3.
他们将用电脑工作。
They ____ ____ ____ computers.
Ⅶ.
翻译下面句子。
will go
will be
will work on
4.
也许他不会来。
Probably he
____ _____.
5.
将来会有更少的树。
____________________________
6.
空闲时间将会更少。
____________________________
7.
人将会更多。
____________________________
won’t come
There will be fewer trees in the future.
There will be less free time in the future.
There will be more people in the future.
8.
将会有更少的车子。
__________________________
9.
将会有更少的污染。
__________________________
10.
人将会活到
200
岁。
__________________________
11.
我五年后将成为一名老师。
___________________________
People will live to be 200 years old.
There will be less pollution.
There will be fewer cars.
I will be a teacher in five years.
VIII.
汉译英。
明天我们学校将有足球赛，我准备去看。
我打算和李明一起复习功课。
将来每人都会有一台电脑。
妹妹在做饭，今
晚她要带
到晚会上去。
我理想的学校有宽大的
教
室
和
图书馆。
学生将在电脑上和老师对话。
将来有学校吗？
不，没有
。
我们将使用因特网在家学习。
Answer
1. There will
be a football match in
our school tomorrow.
I’m
going to watch it.
2. I will
review
lessons with
Li Ming.
3. Everyone will have a computer in the future.
4. My sister is cooking, she will take the food to the party this evening.
5. My dream school will have big classrooms
and libraries
.
6. Students will talk to their teachers on the
computers
.
7.
— Will
there be schools in the future?
— No
, there won’t.
8. We will use the internet to study at home.
IX.
单项选择。
1. I think she _____ be a doctor in 5 years.
A. / B. would C. likes D. will
2. _____ do you think your life will be like in 10 years?
A. How B. What C. When D.
Why
B
D
3. In the future people will live _____ 100
years
old.
A. / B. to C. for D. to be
4. I think _______ be more tall buildings and
cars
in
five years.
A. there are B. there is C. there will D. there
5. Kids _____ go to school in the future.
A. don’t B. didn’t
C. won’t D. wouldn’t
D
C
C
6. Will there be _____ money in 100 years?
A. some paper B. any paper
C. many paper D. any papers
7. They will study at home ____ computers.
A. in B.at C.on D.from
8. I will live in an apartment _____ my best friends.
A. with B.to C. in D. for
9. She will have many _____ of goldfish.
A. different kind B. different kinds
C. difference kind D. differences kinds
B
C
A
B
What do you think
your life will be
like next month?
caterpillars(
毛虫
)
My life will
be a lot better
than it is now!
butterfly
Just for Fun!
写作
发挥你的想象
,
写一篇作文介绍你们
未来
的
学校、
教室
或未来的你
,
题目自拟
。
I
think we will need robots for cleaning
the house… …
Homework
unit 8
人教版八年级英语上册单元全套课件
How do you make a banana milk shake?
Section A 1a-1c
To learn to describe a process and follow instructions.
To learn countable and uncountable nouns.
To learn new words:
shake, pour,peel, blender,turn on...
Objectives
water
What’s your favorite drink?
fruit juice
green tea
Cola
Sprite
wine
beer
coffee
milk shake
watermelon
mango
es
apples
cherr
ies
pears
pineapple
grapes
tomato
es
strawberr
ies
oranges
bananas
shake
What kind of the
strawberry shake
mango shake
apple shake
peel
peel a banana
peel some oranges
peel an apple
peel a pear
剥，削
cut up
cut up the bananas
cut it up
切
put
into
put
the bananas and ice-cream
into
the blender
放在
……
里面
pour…into…
pour
the water
into
the cup
pour
the milk
into
the blender
倒
turn on
turn off
turn on/off the blender
turn it on/off
turn on/off the popper
打开
关上
drink
a
cup glass bottle bowl
of
milk shake water milk tea
喝
Write these words in the blanks.
peel
cut up
put
pour
turn on
drink
1a
___Turn on the blender.
___ Cut up the bananas.
___ Drink the milk shake.
___ Pour the milk into the blender.
___ Put the bananas and ice-cream into
the blender.
___ Peel three bananas.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Listen and put the instructions in order.
1b
首先
……
并且
……
接下来
……
然后
……
最后
……
Translation
And…
First…
Next,…
Then,…
Finally,…
A: How do you make a banana milk shake?
B: First,
peel
the bananas.
Next,
cut up
the bananas.
Next,
put
the bananas and yogurt
into
the blender.
Next,
pour
the milk into the blender.
Then,
turn on
the blender.
Finally,
drink
the milk shake.
Cover the instructions above.Tell your partner
how to make a banana milk shake.
1c
peel
cut up
put
pour
turn on
drink
A: How do you make a banana milk
shake?
B: First peel the bananas,
next…
next…
next/then…
then…
finally…
Write down the process
Let's make a banana milk shake.First,______________.
Then,____________.Next,________________________________________________and______________________________.After that,____________________.
Finally,_____________________________and________.How delicious!
peel three bananas
cut them up
put the bananas and ice-
cream in the blender
pour the milk into the
blender
turn on the blender
pour the milk shake into a glass
drink it
Language points
turn
短语：
turn on
打开
turn off
关闭
turn up
调大
turn down
调小
4.
That radio is pretty loud. Can you
turn it down
a little?
eg.1.
Could you
turn on
the bath for me while you’re upstairs?
3.
I can’t hear the radio very well; could you
turn it up
a bit?
2.
I laid my book aside,
turned off
the light and went to sleep.
I.
根据汉语提示填词。
1. Can you ______ (
切碎
) the vegetables, Tom?
2. Please ___ (
加
) some sugar to the coffee.
3. _____ the hot water ____ (
将
……
倒入
) the
glass, please.
cut up
add
Pour into
Exercises
4. ___ the bananas _____ (
将
……
放进
) the blender.
5. Don’t ____________ (
忘记做
) your homework.
forget to do
Put into
中考链接
It is getting dark. Why not_______ the lights?
turn on B. take away
C. pick up D. put away
天黑了。可知要开灯。
A
打开
捡起
带走
收拾
Write a passage about how to make banana milk.
Useful words:
First,…
Next,…
Then,…
Finally,…
Homework
Section A 2a-2d
To learn to describe a process and follow instructions.
To learn countable and uncountable nouns.
To learn new words:
yogurt, honey,
watermelon,spoon,add,finally,salt...
Objectives
How do I make a banana milk shake?
Warming up
blender
knife
glass
spoon
ice-cream
bananas
milk
What do
I
need?
peel
the bananas.
cut up
the bananas
.
put
the bananas and ice cream
into
the blender
.
First
,
And,
Next
,
pour
the milk
into
the blender
.
turn on
the blender,
a few minutes later
,
turn off
the blender.
drink
the milk shake.
Finally
,
Next
,
Then
,
After that
,
pour
the milk shake
into a glass.
First, …
Second, …
Next, …
Then, …
After that, …
A few minutes later, …
Later on, …
Finally, …
Peel
the bananas.
Cut up
the bananas.
Put
the bananas and ice cream
into
the blender.
Pour
the milk into the blender.
Turn on
the blender.
Turn off
the blender and drink it
How do you make a banana milk shake?
How much
How many
yogurt
bananas
Listen and complete the chart.
honey
watermelon
apples
oranges
2a
apples
watermelon
honey
oranges
bananas
yogurt
one
watermelon
two
three
one cup
Two spoons
Listen again. Write the ingredients under the correct amount in the chart.
apples
yogurt
and orange
honey
bananas
2b
Translate the expressions into English.
两勺蜂蜜
一杯酸奶
一个橘子
三个香蕉
多少西瓜
多少酸奶
two spoons of honey
a cup of yogurt
an orange
three bananas
how many watermelons
how much yogurt
Ask and answer
questions
about how to make fruit salad.
A: Let’s make fruit salad.
B
: OK, good idea. How much yogurt do we need?
A: One cup.
B
: And how many apples do we need?
A: Let me think… We need two apples.
B
: OK, and how much…
2c
Anna: Sam, I want to make Russian soup for a
party on Saturday. Can you tell me how?
Sam: Sure.
First,
buy some beef, one cabbage,
four carrots, three potatoes, five tomatoes
and one onion.
Then,
cut up the vegetables.
Anna: What’s next?
Sam:
Next
, put the beef, carrots and potatoes
into a pot and add some water.
Role-play the conversation.
2d
After that,
cook them for 30 minutes.
Then,
add the cabbage, tomatoes and
onion and cook for another 10 minutes.
Anna: Ok, that’s it?
Sam: No, one more thing.
Finally
, don’t forget
to add some salt.
Role-play the conversation.
Tell your partner how to make
Russian soup
First,
buy some beef, one cabbage, four carrots, three potatoes, five tomatoes and one onion.
Then,
cut up the vegetables.
Next,
put the beef, carrots and potatoes
into a pot and add some water.
After that,
cook them for 30 minutes.
Then,
add the cabbage, tomatoes and
onion and cook for another 10 minutes.
Finally,
don’t forget to add some salt.
1.
How many
bananas do we need?
How many
是疑问词，
“多少”，后面跟复数名词。
询问多少人或物的句型是：
How many +
复数名词
+
一般疑问句。
如：
How many
boats can you see
？
How many
apples would you like
？
How many
books are there on the desk
？
Language points
2.
How much
yogurt do we need?
How much
是疑问词，“多少”，后面跟不可数名词。
询问多少人或物的句型是：
How much +
不可数名词
+
一般疑问句。
如：
How much
bread can you see
？
How much
coffee would you like
？
How much
food are there on the desk
？
3.
Turn on
the blender
．
打开搅拌器。
这是一个祈使句
,
又叫无主句
,
表示命令、请求等语气的句子叫做祈使句。其否定形式是在前面加上
don’t
构成。
如：
Sit down, please.
请坐。
Please don’t sit down
．请不要坐下。
Put it away, please.
请把它拿走。
Please don’t put it away
．请不要把它拿走。
4.
First
cut up
three bananas, three apples and a
watermelon. Finally
mix
it all
up
.
以上两句话中的短语
cut up
和
mix up
都是由“动词
+
副词”
构成的。
“
动词
+
副词
”构成的短语，若其后所接宾语为名词，
名词可放在副词之后，也可放在动词和副词之间；
若其后所接宾语为代词，代词通常放在动词和副词之间，
即
“
代词中间化
”
。
如：
Please
mix up
the fruits /
mix
the fruits up.
请将这些水果混合在一起。
We need two apples. Please
cut
them
up
.
我们需要两个苹果，请把它们切碎。
5.put…into…
e.g. He put some sugar into the coffee.
词组：
put away
把
…
放好
put down
放下
put up
举起
put on
穿上
—
take off
脱掉
put off
拖延
1. Please ______(
剥
) an orange for your grandma.
2. I want some ________(
蜂蜜
) in my water.
3. My mother puts ______ ___________ (
两勺
) of honey
in it.
4. How do you ________ (
做
) the fruit salad?
peel
honey
two teaspoons
make
I.
完成句子。
Exercises
finally then next first
A: How do you make fruit salad?
B: _______ cut up three bananas, three apples and a
watermelon. _______ put the fruit in a bowl. _________
put in two teaspoons of honey and a cup of yogurt.
__________ mix it all up.
First
Next
Then
Finally
II.
选择方框中的单词填空。
1.
两杯水
________________________
2.
打开
…… ___________________
3.
剥香蕉
____________________
4.
把苹果切碎
_________________
5.
三块蛋糕
________________________________
III.
短语汉译英。
two cups / glasses of water
turn on...
peel a banana
cut up the apple
three cakes / three pieces of cakes
IV.
翻译句子。
1
.
把牛奶倒入果汁机。
2.
我们需要几个香蕉？
3.
我们需要多少酸奶呢？
Pour the milk into the blender.
How many bananas do we need?
How much yogurt do we need?
4.
我需要两勺糖。
I need two
spoons
of
sugar
.
5.
你能帮我把西瓜切成块吗？
Could you please help me
cut up
the
watermelon?
To our surprise, the computer _______ won the chess game against the human player.
A. certainly B. usually
C. finally D. mostly
中考链接
C
当然
最终
通常
大部分
使用“
How much…;How many…
”句型造句。
掌握并运用本课时重点动词和动词短语“
turn on, peel, pour
”。
熟悉并运用本课时的量词表述方式，熟练
运
“
a cup of, three pieces of, two spoons of
”
表述日常生活中的例子。
Homework
Section A
Grammar Focus-3c
To learn to describe a process by using connectives
first, next, then and finally
.
To learn to make
imperatives.
Try
to do things by ourselves,develop our independence.
Objectives
Let’s chant
Peel, peel, peel the banana.
Cut, cut, cut up the banana.
Pour, pour, pour the milk.
Turn, turn, turn on the blender
.
Salad show
What salad do you like to make ?
How do you make it?
How do you make a banana milk shake
?
Please recall…
First,
peel the banana.
Next,
put the bananas in the blender.
Then,
pour the milk into the blender.
Finally,
turn on the blender
.
Instructions for making fruit salad
First
, cut up three bananas, three apples and a watermelon.
Next
, put the fruit in a bowl.
Then
, put in two teaspoons of salad cream and a cup of yogurt.
Finally
, mix it all up.
How do you make a banana milk shake?
First, peel the bananas.
Next, put the bananas in the blender.
Then, pour the milk into the blender.
Finally, turn on the blender.
Countable nouns
Uncountable nouns
How many
bananas do we need
？
We need three
bananas.
How much
yogurt do we need
？
We need one cup of yogurt.
Grammar focus
1.
How many
bananas do we need
？
我们需要多少香蕉？
How many
是疑问词，表示“多少”，后面
需跟复数名词。
询问多少人或物的句型是：
How many +
复数名词
+
一般疑问句？
如
:
How many
women can you see?
你
能看到多少位女士
?
How
many
classes are there in your school?
你们
学
校有多
少个教学班
?
How
many
chairs are there on the floor
?
地上
有多
少椅子
?
2.
How much
对不可数名词进行
提问，表示
“多少”，后面
跟不可数名词。如
：
—
How much
milk do we want
?
我们
要多少牛奶
?
—
We need one bottle of milk
．
我们
需要一瓶牛奶。
How much
butter does the cook want
？
厨师
想要多少黄油？
How
much
money are there in the
purple
？
紫色的有多少
钱？
注意
: money
是不可数名词。
3.
英语中量的表达方法分为三种类型：
① 表示
容器
的名词
+ of
a cup of tea, three bottles of milk
②
表示
单位的
名词
+ of
a piece of paper
seven piles of rice
(
七堆米
)
③
其他词
+ of
some of the apples
4.
可数名词有单数和复数两种形式，如：
bananas, tomatoes
不可数名词
没有单、复数形式；
可数名词单数
前面可用不定冠词
a (an)
；
不可数名词
前不能有
a (an)
；
可数名词复数
可用
a few, many
等修饰；
不可数名词
则用
a little, much
等修饰。
询问可数名词的“多少”用
how
many
询问
不可数名词的“多少”用
how
much
英语
中
个体名词
是可数
名词
，
它们
所表示的人或物
可以用数
来
计数
。如
：
banana, apple, blender, watermelon
…
物质
名词
一般是不可数
名词，它们
所表示的事物
不能用数
来
计数
。如
：
milk, yogurt, honey…
1. How ( much /many)
bananas
do we need?
2. How (much / many)
sugar
do we need?
3. How ( much / many)
bread
do we need?
4. How ( much / many)
tomatoes
do we need?
5. How ( much /many)
cheese
do we need?
Circle
the correct word in each question
.
3
a
First
, put the popcorn into the popcorn popper.
Next
turn on the popper
.
Complete the questions and answers. Then match them.
3b
Next pour the popcorn into the bowl.
Then put salt on the popcorn.
Finally eat the popcorn.
Half a cup.
b.______ , put the corn into the popcorn machine.
c. Yes, we can!
d. Next, _____on the machine. ______, add the salt.
e. Just one spoon.
1.______do you make popcorn?
2.___________corn do you need?
3.______ do we do next?
4.___________salt do we need?
5.Now can we eat it?
How
How much
What
How much
First
turn
Finally
b
a
d
e
c
Can you make
noodles with beef
and
tomatoes
?
First,
Next,
Then,
Finally,
cut up the tomatoes and
beef.
boil the
noodles.
add the ingredients to the noodles.
add salt to the
noodles.
Group work
Write how to do one of the following things. Then tell your partner how to do it.
plant a tree
make beef noodles
wash clothes
get a book from the
library
3
c
祈
使句的用法
本单元的语法重点是祈使句的使用。
祈使句用来表示
请求、命令
等，
没有
主语
，动词用原形
。
否定的祈使句要在动
词前
加
don’t
构成
。例如：
Peel
the apple,
please.
请
削掉苹果皮。
Don’t
wake
me up tomorrow morning.
明
天早上不要吵醒我。
2.
有时候吩咐别人做的某件事要
分步骤
来完成，并且有一个先后顺序，这时候可以适当地使用
first, next, then
和
finally
，既能使说话人喘口气，又能使听话者感到句子的连贯性。
First
...
（首
先
……
）
,
next
...
（接下
来
……
），
then
...
（然
后
……
）
,
finally
...
（最
后
……
）
.
1
、用祈使句表达说话者的要求
:
2
、用 “
first, next, then
…
”等
来表达顺序
:
Peel the bananas.
Pour the milk in the blender.
First, cut up the bananas; then
…
; next
…
; last
…
3
、
用
“how many,how much”
对名词数量提问
How much
milk do we want
?
How
many
chairs are there on the floor
?
Summary
1.
—_______
_______ bananas do you buy?
—Three
kilos.
2.
—
_______ _______ bread do we need?
— Three
pieces.
3. _______ _______ (not play)
computer games
, Jack!
How
many
How much
Don’t play
I.
填空。
Exercises
4. There is
an orange
on the table.
(
划线提问
)
_______ _______ oranges are there
on the table?
5. _______ _______ tomato sauce is
there
in the
bottle
? A little.
How many
How
much
II.
根据画线部分提问。
A. There are
two
pieces of bread in a sandwich
．
B. There are
two pieces of
bread in a sandwich.
How
many pieces of bread are
there in
a
sandwich?
How
much bread is there in a
sandwich?
Ⅲ.
翻译句子。
1.
怎么做水果沙拉？
2.
然后放进去两匙蜂蜜和一杯酸奶。
How do you make fruit salad?
Then put in two spoons of honey and a cup of yogurt.
3.
请往菜里加上些盐。
Please
add
some salt
to
the vegetables.
4.
你需要多少酸奶？
How much
yogurt do you need
?
5.
多吃水果对身体有帮助。
Eating
much fruit
is
good for your health
.
Make sentences with
how many
and
how much
.
2.
T
ry
to describe a process by using connectives
first, next, then and finally
.
Homework
Section B 1a-1e
To learn to describe a process and follow instructions.
To learn countable and uncountable nouns.
To learn new words:
sandwich,
butter,
piece,...
Objectives
Review: Use many or much to fill in the blanks:
1. A: How _____ watermelon do we need?
B: We need four pieces of watermelon.
2. A: How _____ watermelons do we need?
B: We need four.
3. A: How _____ oranges do you need?
B: Two .
4. A: How _____ orange do you need?
（小心）
B: Two cups.
5. A: How _____ are the shoes ?
B: Ten
yuan
.
much
much
much
many
many
Let’s study how to make
a cheese
sandwich.
pieces of bread
tomato
onion
butter
lettuce
ingredients
cheese
First
First
,
put
the
butter
on
a piece of bread.
How do you make a cheese sandwich?
First
Next
,
cut up
one tomato
. Put the tomato on the sandwich.
Then,
cut up
an onion
.
How do you make a cheese sandwich?
Next
How do you make a cheese sandwich?
Next
,
put
some cheese
on the sandwich.
Then
Then
,
put
some lettuces
on
the cheese.
How do you make a cheese sandwich?
Finally
Finally
,
put
another piece of bread
on
the top.
How do you make a cheese sandwich?
Group work
First
…
Next
…
Next
…
Then
…
Finally
…
turkey sandwiches
egg and beef sandwiches
ham
sandwiches
Tomato
sandwiches
Design: a recipe for your favorite sandwich.
Make a list of the things you like in a sandwich.
I like ____________________________________
tomatoes and lettuce,
but
I don’t like butter or onion.
1a
Ask and answer questions with a partner.Find
out what he/she likes in a sandwich.
A: Do you like lettuce in
sandwiches?
B
: Yes, I do.
A: Do you like tomatoes?
B
: No, I don’t.
1b
Look at the picture in 1a.Listen and circle the words you hear.
1c
Listen again and write the ingredients in the order you hear them.
First
Next
Then
Finally
butter
a piece of bread
tomato
onion
cheese
lettuce
another piece of bread
1d
Tell your partner how to make your favorite sandwich.
A: First, put some butter
on a piece of bread.
B: How much butter?
A: About one spoon.
1e
Report
Now,let me tell you how to make a cheese sandwich.First,put one spoon of butter on _________________.Next,____________one tomato and an onion.Put them on the bread with some cheese.Then,put some _________on it.Finally,put_____________________on the top.
a piece of bread
cut up
lettuce
another piece of bread
1. Put some butter on
a piece of
bread.
a piece
of
一片 、一份、一张、一条
...
如
:
a piece
of
meat/paper/news...
How
many
pieces of
roast beef
would
you like?
请问
你要几片烤牛肉
?
There
are several
pieces of
bread
.
有
几片面包。
Language points
2.
Add
these to the sandwich.
add
做动词为“加”的意思。在本句中的结构是
:
add sth. to sth.
将
……
加在
……
里。
Will you
add
more sugar to your coffee?
你的咖啡要多加些糖吗？
Please
add
my name to the list.
请在名单上加上我的名字。
add
也可与
to
合用
:
add to …
增加的意思。
如
: The news
added to
his anxiety.
这个消息增添了他的忧虑。
First _____ the butter on the two slice of
bread
.
______
cut up one ________. Put
the
tomato on the
bread
. Next, add
two
slice of ________. _________ put
two teaspoons of ________ on the
turkey
.
put
Then
tomato
turkey
Finally
relish
turkey finally relish
tomato then put
I.
选词填空。
Exercises
II.
翻译句子。
1. —
首先，把一些黄油放到一片面包上。
—
多少黄油呢？
—
大约一匙
。
—
First, put some butter on a piece of bread.
— How much butter?
— About one spoon.
2.
谢谢你给我制作三明治。
Thank you for making the delicious sandwich for me.
3.
请把牛奶倒入果汁机。
Pour milk into the blender, please.
4.
如果你把
3
和
5
相加，会得到
8
。
If you add 3 to 5, you’ll get 8.
5.
在做沙拉之前，检查一下所有的原料。
Before you make the salad, check you have all the
ingredients.
Write a recipe for your parents’ favourite food.
Homework
Section B 2a-2e
To learn to make traditional food on special holidays.
To learn new words:
traditional, celebrate,mix, pepper,fill,plate, cover...
To learn to make Chinese food,to love our traditional cuture.
Objectives
What kind of traditional food do people eat on special holidays in China?
dumplings
moon cakes
zong zi
laba porridge
yuan xiao
2
a
How do you make a turkey sandwich?
Put some butter on a slice of bread.
First
Cut up one tomato.
Put the tomato on the bread.
Next
Cut up an onion.
Next
Add two slices of turkey.
Next
Put two teaspoons of relish on the turkey.
Then
Finally
1.
traditional
adj.
传统的；惯例的→
tradition n.
e.g. Dumplings are
traditional
Chinese food.
饺子是传统的中国食物。
2.
autumn
n.
秋天；秋季
=fall
e.g. Leaves turn yellow in
autumn
.
秋天到，树叶变黄了。
e.g. How do you
celebrate
Spring Festival ?
你们怎样庆祝春节？
2.
celebrate
v.
庆祝；庆祝→
celebration n.
3.
mix
v.
混合；融合
e.g.
Mix
the sugar with flour.
把糖和面粉搅和在一起。
5.
temperature
n.
温度；气温；体温
e.g. The
temperature
is very low today.
今天气温很低。
e.g. Mr. Brown
serves
us with
a bottle of wine.
4.
serve
v.
接待；服务；提供
名词：
service
服务
Thanksgiving in North America
In most countries, people usually eat traditional food on special holidays. A special day in North America is Thanksgiving. In the United States, this festival is always on the fouth Thursday in November, but in Canada it falls on the second Monday in October. Thanksgiving is
a time to give thanks for food in the autumn and
Read the article and number the pictures.
2b
other good things people enjoy in life. Families see Thanksgiving as a time to get together and usually celebrate it with a big family meal. The main dish of this meal is almost always turkey, a large bird. To go with the turkey, people often prepare other things, such as gravy, cornbread, mashed potatoes, and pumpkin or apple pie.
Making a turkey dinner
Here is one way to make turkey for a Thanksgiving dinner.
First
, mix together some bread pieces, onions, salt and pepper.
Next
,
fill
the turkey
with
this bread mix.
fill…with…
装满；充满
Then
, put the turkey in a hot oven and cook it for
a few hours.
When
it is ready, place the turkey on a large
plate and
cover
it
with
gravy.
Finally
, cut the turkey into thin pieces and eat the
meat with vegetables like carrots and potatoes.
cover…with…
覆盖
Then number the pictures
3
2
4
1
5
Read the article again and answer the following questions.
1. Where do people celebrate Thanksgiving?
2. When do people celebrate it?
3. Why is Thanksgiving important?
In the North America.
On the fourth Thursday in November.
They give thanks for food in autumn and other good things people enjoy in life.
2c
4. How do people celebrate it ?
5. What is the main dish of the Thanksgiving meal?
By having a big family meal.
Turkey, gravy, cornbread, mashed potatoes, and pumpkin or apple pie.
Here are the instructions for making a turkey dinner written in a different way. Put them in order. Write First, Next, Then and Finally.
_______, serve it to your friends with some other food.
_______, put this into the bird.
_______, cook it at a very high temperature for a long time.
_______, put everything you need together in a large bowl.
Finally
Next
Then
First
2d
Read the passage again,finish the following tasks.
1
判断正误，
2
补全句子，
3.
写出能替换
place the turkey on a large plate...
中
“place”
的词
4
英译汉
1.
Thanksgiving in North America is on the fouth Thursday in November
.(T/F)
2.
Thanksgiving is a time to
________________________________________
and
other good things people enjoy in life.
❀
to give thanks for food in the autumn
3
._____________
put
4.
Next, fill the turkey with this bread mix.
________________________________________
接下来，把这些面包的混合物放进火鸡里。
1.
In most countries, people usually eat traditional food on special
holidays
.
在大多数国家，人们通常在特殊的节日里吃传统食物。
此处的
holiday
表示“节日”，而非“假期”的意思，指国家法定的公众性“节日；假日”如：
Christmas is the most important holiday in Western countries.
圣诞节是西方最为重要的节日。
Language points
圣诞节是西方最为重要的节日。
holiday
也有“假期”之意，在英国比较多用，美国则用“
vacation
”如
Will you take a holiday next week?
=Will you take a vacation next week?
下周要休假吗？
The school holidays(
美
vacation) start tomorrow.
学校明天开始放假。
2.
Next,
fill
the turkey
with
this bread mix.
fill A with B “
用
A
装满
B”
eg. He filled the hole with sand.
A be filled with B “A
被
B
装满
”=
A be full of B
eg.The bottle is filled with water.
=
The bottle is full of water.
Ex.The room ___________with people.
A.is full B. is fill C.is filled D.filled
C
3.When it is ready, place the turkey on a large plate and
cover
it
with
gravy.
cover A with B “
用
B
盖住
A”
→A be covered with B “A
被
B
覆盖
”
eg. Please cover the table with a cloth.
The table is covered with a cloth.
Ex. The playground _________ snow.
A. is cover with B. is covered with
C. cover with D.
covered with
B
1. When is this special day?
2. What are the reasons for this special day?
Do people give thanks for anything on this day?
Do people remember anything or anyone on this day?
What do you think is the most special day in China? Answer the following questions.
2e
3. How do most people celebrate this day?
4. Is there any traditional food?
What are the main dishes?
5. Can you make these dishes?
1.
It’s Dragon Boat Day.
4. Yes, there is. The main
dishes are zongzi.
2. In order to remember the
famous poet Qu Yuan.
3. People eat zongzi and
have boat races.
5. Yes, I can.
Model
Writing practice
Write down how to make
one of the traditional dishes
using “ first,next,then,finally...”.
I.
单项选择。
1. It’s getting dark. Can you ______ the light?
A. turn off B. turn on C. turn over
2. — ________ yogurt do you need?
— One teaspoon.
A. How many B. How much C. Which
B
B
Exercises
3. The baby can eat ____ bread for breakfast.
A. two B. many of C. two slices of
4. I have _______ bananas in the fridge.
A. a lot B. many C. much
5. Would you like ____ relish on the bread?
A. many B. any C. some
C
B
C
1. Read the passage after class.
2.
选择一个你熟悉的传统食物
,
用英语描述一
下它的制作过程
。
Homework
Section B 3a-Self Check
Revision
Thanksgiving is a s_____ holiday in the U.S.A. It always on the f_____ Thursday in November. There are many r______ for this special day. For some people, it is a time to give thanks for food in the a______. These days most Americans still have a big meal at home to c_______ it. The main dish of this
Fill in the blanks with the right words.
pecial
ourth
easons
utumn
elebrate
meal is almost always t_____.
How to make a turkey dinner?
First, m__ together some bread pieces, onions, salt and pepper. F__ the turkey with this bread mix.
Next, put the turkey in a hot oven and c____ it for a few hours. Then, place the turkey on a large plate and c____ it with gravy.
F_____, serve it to your friends with some other food.
urkey
ix
ill
ook
over
inally
Jiaozi,
Spring Festival
What kind of traditional food do people eat on special holidays in China?
Lead-in
Yuanxiao,
the Chinese Lantern Festival
Zongzi,
the Dragon Boat Festival
Mooncake,
the
Mid-autumn Festival
Laba rice porridge/Laba garlic (
腊八蒜
),
Laba Festival
Do you know the traditional food in your city? Can you list some of them?
Yunnan Rice Noodles
dumplings
Beijing Duck
mapo tofu
Read
the recipe below and fill in the blanks with the words in the box.
cook next
wash finally
have enjoy
first cut
Yunnan Rice Noodles
In Yunnan, many people eat rice noodles for breakfast, and even for lunch and dinner. To make this special food, you need to _________ rice noodles, chicken soup, chicken, lettuce and eggs. (Of course, you can also have other things like fish and different vegetables
.)_________,
_________
the lettuce and cut
it up. ________,
________the chicken into pieces.
have
First
wash
Next
cut
3a
Then, make the chicken soup very hot, over 100
℃
. Then ,_______ the eggs, meat and lettuce in the pot of hot soup, one by one.________, put the rice noodles into the soup. Now, it’s time to ________ the rice noodles
!
Finally
enjoy
cook
Think
of a favorite food in your hometown. Make a list of ingredients.
__________________________________________________________________________________________
3b
Write a recipe for your favorite food. Use 3a and 3b to help you.
3c
I like ___________
Group work
First ….
Next…
Next…
Then …
Finally…
First ____ butter on two pieces of bread.
______
cut up one ________. Put the tomato
on
the bread. Next, add two pieces of ______.
_______
put two teaspoons of ______
on
the turkey.
turkey finally relish
tomato then put
Here’s a recipe for a great turkey sandwich!
put
Then
tomato
turkey
Finally
relish
Example
Make
up a crazy recipe with your partner. Then tell another pair of students how to make this crazy food. The other pair will draw it.
First
, put some yogurt on a piece of bread.
Then
, cut up one apple and an onion and put them on yogurt
…
4
How
many
apples/oranges/bananas
…
do
you need?
I need three apples/oranges/bananas...
How
much
yogurt/water
…
do you need?
I need one teaspoon/cup of it.
How many
/
How much
Summary
1.
How many +
可数名词复数形式
+…
？
eg.
How many students are there in our class?
There are sixty one./ sixty one.
2.
How much +
不可数名词
+
…
？
eg.
How much water do you drink every day?
I drink five
glasses
./
Five
glasses
.
(
注：回答不可数名词量多少时，数词后一定要有容器量词
)
eg.
a
cup
of tea
two
glasses
of water
three
pieces
of paper
four
teaspoons
of cinnamon
A:
How
many
bananas are there in
the
picture?
B:
There are three ./Three.
A:
How
much
milk are there in the
picture
?
B:
There are two
cups
./Two
cups
.
Practice:
A:
How
many
watermelons do you
eat
every day?
B:
I eat four./Four.
A:
How
much
honey do you drink
every
day?
B:
I drink four
teaspoons
./
Four
teaspoons
.
1 Number these instructions for making tomato and eggs soup in the correct order. Then complete the instructions with the words in the box.
First Next Then Finally
________, mix everything together and serve it.
_______, cook for five minutes and add two eggs.
_______, cut up three tomatoes and put them into a pot.
_______, add some water, sugar and salt.
4
3
1
2
Finally
Then
First
Next
First Next Then Finally
Q: ____________________________________
(how many / eggs / we / need / make /cake)
A: ____________________________________
(two)
Q: ____________________________________
( how much / milk / we / need)
2 Write questions and answers using the words in brackets.
How many eggs do we need to make a cake?
We need two.
How much milk do we need?
A: ____________________________________
(three cups)
Q: ____________________________________
(have to / add / sugar or honey)
A: ____________________________________
(can / add / two spoons)
We need three cups of milk.
Do we have to add sugar or honey?
Yes ,we can add two spoons of honey.
finally then next first
A: How do you make fruit salad?
B
:
_____, cut
up three bananas ,three apples and a watermelon.
______,
put the fruit in a bowl.
_____,
put in two teaspoons of honey and a cup of yogurt.
______,
mix it all up.
First
Next
Then
Finally
I.
选词填空。
put turn on cut up pour mix up
1. I
need some help. Can you _______
the
tomatoes
,
please
?
2. Next you need to _______ the
ingredients
into
a blender.
3. Then _______ hot water into the
blender
.
cut up
put
pour
Exercises
4. Add some honey and ________
the ingredients
. 5. __________ the blender for
about
two minutes.
mix up
Turn on
1. ___________ hours are there in a
day
? 2.
— ____________ is
the shirt?
— $
30. 3. ____________ pens do you have ? 4. ____________ butter do you need?
How many
How much
How many
How much
II.
用
how much
或
how many
填空。
III.
将下列名词归类。
yogurt, teaspoon, watermelon, popcorn,
bread
,
banana
, hamburger, strawberry,
tomato
, carrot, water
1
. countable nouns
_________________________________
_________________________________
2
. uncountable nouns
_________________________________
yogurt
watermelon
popcorn
bread
banana
hamburger
strawberry
tomato
carrot
water
1. How does he ______ milk shake? A. make B. made C. makes D. do 2. _______ milk do you need? A. How many B. How much C. How often D. How long 3. Turn on the blender _____ about
two
minutes. A. in B. at C. for D. to
A
B
C
IV.
单项选择。
4. Please ___the blender. Let’s taste it.
A. turn on B. turn off
C. turn up D. turn down
5. Then ____ peppers and ____on the cheese.
A. cut up: put them
B
. cut up; put it
C. cut in; put them
D
. cuts up; put it
6. Pour water ____ the blender.
A. of B. into C. on D. up
B
A
B
7. How ____ bread do we need? A. many B. long C. often D. much 8.There are ___ and a cup of yogurt.
A
. two teaspoons of honey
B. a teaspoon of honey
C. two teaspoon of honey
D
. a teaspoons of honey
D
A
1. I need some help. (
否定句
)
I _____ ______ _____ help.
2.We need
two
teaspoons of honey
. (
画
线
提问
)
_____ ______ teaspoons of honey
_____
we need?
3. Put the pizza on the table. (
否定句
)
______ ______ the pizza on the table.
How many
do
Don’t put
don’t need any
V.
句型转换。
4. There is
only a little
water in the
bottle. (
画
线
部分提问
)
_____ _____ water ___ _____ in the
bottle
?
5. There are some sandwiches on
the
plate.
(
改为一般疑问句
)
_____ _____ ____
sandwiches on
the plate?
Are there any
How
much
is there
VI.
在空白处填上恰当的单
词。
A: Do you like
______ salad
?
B: Yes, I like fruit salad very much.
A: Let’s
______ some
now.
B: OK. How many ______ do we need?
A: Let me see. We ______ two apples.
B: And how many ________ do we need?
A: Three.
fruit
make
apples
need
bananas
B: OK. How many ___________ do we need?
A: Only one.
B: How ______ ________ do we need?
A: One cup.
B: Here are two apples, three bananas, one
watermelon and one cup of yogurt. And
here
is a
bowl. It’s ready now. Let’s begin to make it.
yogurt
much
watermelons
What is the correct way to eat Beijing Duck?
Look at the pictures for ideas and then write
down the instructions.
Homework
以下菜名可供老师们在探究活动中参考，根据学生的基础可选用一部分来扩大学生的词汇量。
Chinese
Food
smoked
fish (
熏鱼
) crisp chicken (
香酥鸡
)
Beijing roast duck (
北京烤鸭
) sweet and sour fish (
糖醋鱼
) steamed fish (
清蒸鱼
) instant boiled mutton (
涮羊肉
)
pork steamed with rice flour (
米粉肉
) home-style bean-curd (
家常豆腐
) Chinese cabbage with dried shrimps (
海米白菜
) braised bamboo shots and mushrooms (
烧两冬
) stir-fried green beans (
干煸四季豆
) bean-curd soup (
豆腐汤
) meatball soup (
汆丸子
)
Western Food
pork
/ lamp chop (
猪
/
羊排骨
)
beef
steak (
牛排
) roast beef (
烤牛肉
)
fried
fish (
煎鱼
)
pickled
cucumber (
酸黄瓜
)
sardine
(
沙丁鱼
)
ham
salad (
火腿色拉
) vegetable salad (
蔬菜色拉
) pudding (
布丁
) sandwiches (
三明治
) hamburger (
汉堡
) apple pie (
苹果派
) cream cake (
奶油蛋糕
) fruit jelly (
果冻
)
Encourage students to write the instructions. Here is an example:
Instant boiled mutton
First, cut the mutton into pieces. Then put them into boiling water. Take them out within half a minute. The cooked (ready) pieces of mutton are dipped into condiments to eat with cabbage and noodles made from bean starch.
1. 500g flour, 200g sugar, 200g cream,
200g mixed fruit,
500
克面粉
, 200
克砂糖
, 200
克奶油
, 200
克什锦水果。
2. 2 cups of milk, 3 eggs,
200g orange juice,
2 teaspoons of baking soda
两杯牛奶，
3
个鸡蛋，
200
克橙汁，两
茶匙苏打粉
Task:
A Christmas cake
INGREDIENTS :
首先将鸡蛋打散
,
与面粉、奶油和砂糖
混合
在一起搅匀。然后倒入什锦水果、牛奶
、橙汁
和苏打粉
,
将它们揉成一个面团
。
First
, beat the eggs
.
And
mix the flour, cream and sugar
up.
Then
, put the fruit, milk, orange juice and baking soda into
it.
Next
，
mix it well into a dough
.
Instruction:
烹饪方法
之后将面团放入烤炉烘制一个小时。这样圣诞蛋糕就做好了
。
After that
, put the dough in the oven and
bake
for one hour
.
At last
, the Christmas cake is done
!
unit 9
人教版八年级英语上册单元全套课件
Can you come to my party?
Section A 1a-1c
To learn to use the following structures about
invitations.
—Can
you come to my party on…?
—Sure
, I’d love to
./
Sorry
, I can’t. I
have to/must
…
To learn to use the modal verb
can
for invitations
and
have
to
for giving
reasons.
Objectives
make invitations
decline invitations
accept invitations
talk about obligations
Language Goals
I helped my parents with housework.
What did you do last weekend?
Free talk
prepare for an exam
meet my friends
What did you do lastweekend?
go to the doctor
have the flu
go to a birthday party
buy some gifts
Can you come to my party?
— Sure, I’d love to.
— I’m sorry, I can’t. I have to…
Match the phrases with the pictures.
1a
Listen and write the names (Tim, Kay, Anna and Wilson) next to the correct students in
the picture.
Tim
Anna
Kay
Wilson
1b
Listen again and fill in the blanks.
Sun Ning is going to hold a party on Saturday afternoon.She invites some of her friends to come.
But Ted can't come because he has to_______________.
Tim can't come because he has to__________________.
Wilson can't come because he must_________________.
Anna
can't come because she might have to _______________.Kay can't ,either. Because he ______________. What a small party!
help his parents
prepare for an exam
go to the doctor
meet her friends
has the flu
A:
Can you come to my party
on
Saturday afternoon?
B:
Sure, I’d love to
.
C:
Sorry, I can’t. I have to
prepare
for an exam.
D:
I’m sorry, too. I must
go to the doctor.
You are the students in the picture. Student A, invite three students to your party. Student B, C and D, give answers.
1c
Can
you
come to my party
？
Can
you come to my party
？
Sure,
I’d love to
.
Can
you come to my party
？
Sorry, I
can’t
. I have a piano
lesson.
Can you…
Work in pairs
Can
you come to my party
？
Sure
，
I’d love to.
Can you…
Can
you come to my party
？
Sorry, I
can’t.
I
have to
go to the doctor.
Can you…
A:Can you
come to my party?
B:I’m sorry.
I have to
help my mom.
A:
Can you
play tennis ?
B:
Sure,I’d love to.
A:
Can you
come to my party?
B:
Sure,I’d love to.
A:Can you
go to the mall?
B:I’m sorry. I’m going to the movies.
I have a piano lesson.
Why can’t you come to the party?
Why can’t he come to the party?
He has to play football.
She has to visit her grandparents.
Why can’t she come to the party?
Can you come to my party on Saturday afternoon?
Sure, I’d love to.
Sorry, I can’t. I have to prepare for an exam.
I’m sorry, too. I must go to the doctor.
How to make an invitation
Can you come to my birthday?
Could you come to my school?
Have a summary
How to
accept
an invitation
Yes, I’d love/like to.
Certainly, I’d love/like to.
Sure, I’d love/like to.
Thanks for your invitation.
Thanks for asking me.
How to
decline
an invitation
I’m sorry, I can’t. I have to…
I’d love to, but I have to…
Sorry, I can’t. I’m
going to the movies
.
Thanks for your invitation.
Thank you for asking me.
短语翻译。
1.
复习备考
______________
2.
帮助我的父母干家务
___________________
__________
3.
去看医生
________________
4.
见我朋友
_______________
5.
太多作业
_______________________
6.
谢谢你的邀请
________________________
study for a test
help my parents do
housework
go to the doctor
meet my friend
too much homework
thanks for your invitation
Summary
1.
invite
v.
邀请
invite sb. to sth.
e.g. Lucy invites me to her party.
The Smiths invite us to dinner.
invitation
n.
邀请，邀请书
e.g. make an invitation
accept an invitation
decline an invitation
thanks for your invitation!→
thanks for inviting me.
Language points
2. I have an exam on Monday so I must
prepare for
it.
周一有考试，所以我必须为其做准备。
prepare
用作及物动词时
1). prepare sth.
表示“准备
……
”
后接
名词或代词
作宾语。
e.g. :
Our English teacher was preparing the lessons now.
我们的英语老师在备课
.
当宾语是食物之类的东西时，可译为 “制；做”
e.g.
Mother was preparing dinner in the kitchen now.
妈妈正在厨房做饭。
2). prepare sb. sth.
表示“给
……
准备
……
”
，
也可转换为
prepare sth. for sb
.
e.g. She prepared us a nice breakfast.
= She prepared a nice breakfast for us.
她给我们准备了可口的早餐。
3). prepare to do sth.
表示“准备做
……”
，
例如：
They were preparing to cross the river when it began to rain.
他们正准备过河，突然下雨了。
I.
填空。
1. —_______ you come to my party?
—_______, I’d love to.
2. — _______ you go to the movies?
— I’m sorry, I _______.
3. — _______ you go to the basketball game?
— No, I ______. I’m playing soccer.
Can
Yes
Can
can’t
Can
can’t
Exercises
4. — ______ you go to the concert?
— Great! I’d ______ _____.
5. — _______ you go to the mall this week?
— Sorry, I _______.
Can
love to
Can
can’t
II.
单项选择。
1. He ___ stay at home, because his mother was ill.
A. has to B. have to C. had D. had to
2. I went to the mountain _____.
A. next week B. the day after tomorrow
C. yesterday D. tomorrow
D
C
4.
___
__
Friday morning, I like to go to the
movie
___
___
friends.
A. In, on
B
. On, with C. On, and D. At, with
5. Would you please
_
___
me _
___
the housework?
A. help
, in B. to help, with
C
. help, doing
D
. help, do
B
D
—Would you like to go fishing with me tomorrow?
—________. It’s my favourite.
A. Of course not B. That’s right
C. Sure, I’d love to D. I’m afraid I can’t
中考链接
“这是我最喜欢的。”可知很乐意去。
C
Make an invitation card for your
friend.
2. Write a conversation about invitation.
Homework
Section A 2a-2d
To learn to use the following structures about
invitations.
—Can
you come to my party on…?
—Sure
, I’d love to
./
Sorry
, I can’t. I
have to/must
…
To learn to use the modal verb
can
for invitations
and
have
to
for giving
reasons.
Objectives
I can, you can, everybody can.
Sing, dance, jump and run.
He can, she can, everybody can.
Come, go, sit and stand.
You can, they can, everybody can.
Cook, clean, wash our pants.
We can, you can, everybody can.
Play, laugh and have a lot of fun.
Chant
Can
you come to my party
？
Sure, I’d love to.
Can
you help with the party now
？
Of course. I’m free now.
Can
you hang out with me and buy some snacks
？
Yes, It’s my favorite.
Listen
and circle can or can’t.
1. Jeff
can/ can’t
go to the party.
2. Mary
can/ can’t
go to the party.
3. May
can/ can’t
go to the party.
4. Mei Ling
can/ can’t
go to the party.
5. Paul
can/ can’t
go to the party.
2
a
Listen again. Who can’t go to the party? Why? Complete the chart.
2
b
names
reasons
Jeff
Jeff might have to meet hisfriend on Saturday.
May
May has the flu.
She must study for a math test.
Mei Ling
Check the answers
Report it like this:
Jeff can't come to the party because...
Can
you come to my party this Sunday
？
Sorry, I
can’t.
Why can’t
you come to my party
？
I
have to
go to the dancing class.
Can
you come to my house now
？
I have some sweets.
I’d love to
，
but....er, ...
Why can’t
you come to my house
？
....er, but I have to go to the dentist.
1. too much homework
2. ___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
Look at the reasons in the chart in 2b. Write some more. Then, Student A, invite your partner to do something. Student B, say you can’t go and why.
have to take part in the football match
have to look after his little sister
have to visit his grandparents
2
c
Hey, Amy. Can you go to the movies on Saturday?
I’m sorry, I’m not available. I have too much homework this weekend.
That’s too bad. Maybe another time.
Sure, Dave.
Thanks for asking.
Hey, Joe. Can you go to the movies on Saturday?
I’m sorry, I’m not available.
I have to take part in the
concert.
That’s too bad.
Maybe another time.
Sure, Tommy.
Thanks for asking.
Role-play the conversation.
Jeff: Hey, Nick,
can you come to my house on Saturday?
My cousin Sam from Xi’an is going to be here.
Nick: Oh, Sam! I remember we went bike riding together
last fall when he visited you.
Jeff: Yes, that’s right.
2
d
Nick:
I’d love to come
, but I’m afraid I can’t. I have
an exam on Monday so I must
prepare for
it.
Jeff: That’s really too bad! Oh, but Sam
isn’t
leaving
until
next Wednesday. Can you
hang out with us
on Monday night?
Nick: Sure!
Catch you on Monday
!
Answer the questions
1.Why can't Nick go to Jeff's house on Saturday?
Because he must prepare for an exam.
2.When is Sam leaving?
Next Wednesday.
3.What are they going to do on Monday night?
They are going to hang out together.
Work in pairs.
Jeff: Hey, Nick, ....
Nick: Oh, Sam,
Jeff: Yes, ...
Nick: I'd....
1.
I’m sorry. I’m not
available
.
此句中的
available
表示“有空；不忙；有时间交谈
，聊
天
”，其后还可用
to
do
引出
具体的事情。例如：
►
Are
you
available
tomorrow morning?
明天早上
你有空吗？
►
I’m
afraid I’m not
available
to
help with
the school
show on
the 19th.
我
怕是没空来帮着准备学校
19
号演出了。
Language points
2.
Sam isn’t leaving until next Wednesday.
在
英语中，
not … until …
是一个常见句型
，表示
“
直到
……
才
……”
。在口语中，还可使用
till
代替
until
，
构成
not … until…
结构。
►
Don’t
leave today’s work
till
tomorrow
.
不要
把今天的事留到明天去做。
►
I
didn’t
go to bed last night
until
past
midnight
.
昨晚
我过了午夜
12
点才睡。
3. Can you
hang out with us
on Monday night?
hang out with sb
与某人闲逛；和某人闲荡；
和某人闲逛；和某人一起闲混
相关搭配：
hang out with
与
……
出去玩
e.g.
hang out with friends
和朋友闲混；和朋友闲逛
4.
Catch you on Monday!
礼拜一见！
这是英语中道别的又一种说法，相当于
See you on
Monday!
类似的说法还有：
Catch / See you later!
(
回头见！
)
5.
Thanks for asking.
谢谢邀请。
表示感谢的几种方式：
（
1
）
thank you.
谢谢你。
（
2
）
thanks a lot
.
多谢。
（
3
）
thank you for your help
.
谢谢你的帮助。
（
4
）
thank you for helping me.
谢谢你的帮助。
6. That’s too bad.
Maybe another time
.
太糟了，也许换个时间吧。
Maybe another time.
相当于
Maybe next time
.
意
为：也许下一次吧
another
表示三者或三者以上的 “另一”
e.g. Can you give me another book?
你能再给我一本书吗？
单词
available
/another time/ until / hang /hang out/ catch
短语
have too much homework/ come to my home/ last fall
go bike riding/ have an exam/ hang out with my friends
句子
Can
you come to my party
？
Sorry
, I can’t.
Why
can’t you come to my party
？
I have to go to the doctor
.
Summary
1. I have ________homework to do.
A. too many B. too much C. much too D. a few
2. Joe ______go to the doctor. His leg is broken.
A. have to B. can C. has to D. may
3
. I have to ______for the math test.
A. study B. studying C. learning D. studied
B
C
A
I.
选择题。
Exercises
1.—
星期五你能来参加我的聚会吗？
—
对不起，我不能去。我有钢琴课。
— Can you come to my party on Friday?
— Sorry, I can’t. I have a piano lesson.
II.
翻译句子。
2.—
你星期日能去看电影吗？
—
对不起，我不能去。这周末我有太多作业。
— Can you go to the movies on Sunday?
— Sorry, I can’t. I have too much homework this weekend.
3.
真遗憾，我没有空。
4.
安不能来我的聚会。
5.
直到
11
点他才写完作业。
I’m sorry. I’m not available.
Ann can’t come to my party.
He didn’t finish his homework until 11 o’clock.
中考链接
Without umbrellas, the tourists didn’t leave the hotel ________ the heavy rain stopped.
A. if B. because
C. until D. whenever
句意“没有伞，游客们直到大雨停歇才离开宾馆。”
C
因为
无论何时
如果
直到
假设你将于这个周末过生日，并开一个生日聚会，你邀请朋友们参加你的聚会，但有几名同学因故不能来，请你将与他们的对话用英语写出来。
Homework
Section A Grammar Focus-3c
To
learn to use “
Can you/he/they…?
”
to
make
invitations.
To
use the following structure to talk about obligations:
I might have to/must…
To learn how to communicate with others politely.
Objectives
Hey, Anna, can you come to my birthday party on Saturday?
…
Oh, Sam! I remember we went bike riding last fall when
…
Review
Can you play chess with me tomorrow afternoon?
Sure. I’d love to.
I’m afraid not. I have the flu.
Can Lily take a walk with us?
No, she can’t. She must prepare for the exam.
Can you come to my party on Saturday?
Sure, I’d love to
./
Sorry, I must study for a math test.
Can you go to the movies tomorrow night?
Sure. That sounds great.
I’m afraid not. I have the flu.
Can he go to the party?
No, he can’t. He has to help his parents.
Can she go to the baseball game?
No. she’s not available. She must go to the doctor.
Can they go to the movies?
No, they’re not free. They might have to meet their friends.
Grammar Focus
Make two conversations
using “Can....?”
1.--Can you...?
--......(
接受）
2.--Can you...?
--......(
拒绝）
情态动词主要有：
may/might, can/could, must, have to, shall/should, will/would, ought to, need, dare, used to
现在我们来着重学习情态动词
can
以及
have to
的用法。
其特征主要有：
情态动词
can
的基本用法
情态动词
can
有一定的
词义，但
不能独立
存在，它
必须与动词原形一起构成谓语。情态动词
can
没有人称和数的变化。其具体用法如下
:
表示“
能、会
”指脑力
或体力方面的“
能力
”。如
:
►
I
can
speak Japanese.
我会讲日语
。
►
Frank
can
swim but I can’t.
佛兰克会游泳
,
但我不会。
2.
表示“
可能
”，常用于否定句或疑问句中，指某种可能性。例如：
►
My
cousin
can’t
be in this city. He is in Korea now.
我堂兄不可能在这个城市里。他在韩国呢。
►
Can
he come to our club today, please?
请问
他今天能来我们俱乐部吗？
3.
表示“
可以
”，常用于口语中，指许可或请求做某
事
►
Can
I ask you a question
?
我
可以问你一个问题吗
？
►
You
can bring something to eat.
你可以带些吃的。
can
为情态动词
,
在本单元中表示
请求
，
用于发出邀请，后跟
动词原形
。当同意接受对方的邀请时，常用
Sure, I’d love
to. / Certainly. /Of course.
等来回答；若不接受
，
常用
Sorry
等来有礼貌地拒绝
，
一般情况下需要说明不能接受邀请的原
因以表示歉意。
►
—Can you come to my birthday party tomorrow
？
明天你来参加我的生日聚会，好吗？
—Sorry, I can’t. I am going to visit my grandpa.
很抱歉，我来不了，我要去看我爷爷。
can/may
(
1
)
都可表示
“许可” 。
may
用于较正式场合，
can
比较口语化。
You
may/can
smoke here.
►
Borrowers
may not
take out of the library more than two
books at
a time.
►
The
policeman says you
can’t
park here.
(2)
May/Can I/we…? 表示征询对方许可。 Can you…? 表请求。
① —
May
I use your phone?
— Yes, you
may
./Yes, please. /No, you
may not
. /No, you
mustn
’
t
. /No,
you
’
d
better not. /
I
’
m
afraid not.
/I
’
m
sorry.
I
’
d
rather you
didn
’
t
.
② —
Can
I go out and play, Mum?
—Yes/Certainly, you
can
. /No, you
can
’
t
.
③ —
Can
you help me with this bag?
—
With pleasure./Sorry, I
can
’
t
.
(3)
都可表示“可能性”
Mr. Reed looks pale. He
may
be
ill.
Mr
. Read is in poor
health.
He
can
be ill at any time. This news
may
be true
.
(=might/could)
Wang
Wei
can
be really stubborn
.
Mr. Reed looks pale. He
may
be ill. Mr. Read is in poor health.
He
can
be ill at any time.
This news
may
be true. (=might/could)
Wang Wei
can
be really stubborn.
(4) can
还可表示
“能力”、“能够”
—You
can
swim,
can’t
you?
—No, I
can’t
.
I
can’t
promise anything, but I’ll do
what
I
can
.
Tickets
can
be bought from the Tourist Information Center.
have
to
的用法
1.
have (has) to +
动词原形
have (has) to
后面要用动词原形。当主语为第三人称单数时用
has to
，当句子是过去时用
had to
。
►
We
have to
go home now.
我们
不得不现在就回家。
►
He
has to
work on Sunday.
他
不得不在周日工作。
►
I
had to
do much housework last Sunday.
上周日
我不得不做很多作业。
2. have to
的
否定句
句型
：
主语
+
don’t/didn’t/doesn’t
won’t
+
have to
+
动词原形
►
You
don’t have to
walk so fast.
你
不必走那么快。
►
He
will not have to
buy a new coat next year.
明年
他没必要买新外衣了。
3. have to
的
疑问句
句型
：
Do/Does/Did/Will
+
主语
+
have to
+
动词原形
Did
he
have
to
ask the question?
他
非要问那个问题吗？
Yes
, he did.
是的。
No
, he didn’t (have to).
不。
不能独立作谓语，只能和动词原形一起构成谓语，
表示说话人的语气和情态。
2. 没有人称和数的变化。 (have to除外)
3. 否定形式：在其之后加not (have to除外)
疑问形式：情态动词提到主语之前(have to除外)。
3.
have to
的意思是“必须、不得不”
,
往往强调由于客观原因
而必须做某事。
have to
后接动词原形；
have to
有人称、数和
时态的变化
,
其
第三人称单数形式
为
has to,
其
疑问形式和否定
形式
要借助于助动词
do
或
does
来完成。例如：
►
We
have to
look after our sister at home.
我们不得不在家照顾我们的妹妹。
►
Does
he
have to
get up early tomorrow
morning?
明天早上他必须早起吗？
►
I don’t
have to
stay at home today.
今天我不必待在家里。
4. must/have to
must
表示主观“必须”；
have to
表示客观客观需要，即
“不得不” 。
I don’t like this TV set. I
must
buy a new one.
This TV set doesn’t work. We
have to
buy a new one.
You
must
get up at five tomorrow.
We
(will) have to
get up early
tomorrow.
I
had to
leave early because I wasn’t feeling
well.
She
said she
must/had to
see the manager.
表示邀请的句型
:
(
你能来参加我的聚会吗
?)
Can you come to my party?
Could you come to my party?
Would you like to come to my party?
接受邀请
:
拒绝邀请
:
Sure, I’d love/like to.
I’m sorry, I can’t. I have to…
/I’m V-ing…
小结
1. A: What are you going to do on Saturday?
B: I’m not sure. I might _________________
2. A: What are you planning to do after school?
B: I don’t know
. ____________________
watch TV on the weekend my cousin visit grandparents practice the violin
practice the violin
.
I might watch TV.
Complete
the answers with might
and
one of the phrases in the box.
3a
3. A: When will you finish the science
homework?
B: ______________________________
4. A: Who are you going to the movies with?
B:_______________________________
5. A: Are you free to come to my place on
Saturday?
B: _______________________________
O
n the
weekend.
M
y
cousin.
No.
I might
visit
grandparents
.
1. Inviting: (can / play tennis
)
________________________________
Accepting:________________________
Can you come to play tennis?
Sure, that sounds great.
Complete the sentences below. Use the words in brackets to help you.
3b
invite v.
邀请
invite sb. to do sth.
accept v.
接受
↓
↓
2. Inviting: (would like to/ go to the movies)
Reason: (might have to)
____________________________________
Refusing:____________________________
____________________________________
Would
you
like to
go to the movies
?
I’m afraid not. I have too much
homework to do.
refuse v.
拒绝
refuse to do sth.
↓
3. Inviting: (can/hang out with us tonight)
Reason: (must)
____________________________________
Refusing: _____________________________
_________________
Can
you
hang out with us tonight
?
No
, I can’t. I must finish my
homework.
4. Inviting:
(would like to
/ come to my
birthday
party)
__________________________________
Accepting:__________________________
Would
you
like to come to my
birthday party
?
Sure, I’d love to.
Write
down everything you have to do next week. Choose a day and time to have a party. Then invite classmates to your party.
A: Can you come to my party?
B: When is it?
A: Next week, on Thursday night.
B: I’m sorry. I have to study for a math test.
3c
What do you usually do on weekends?
What activities do you do
on
weekends
?
have to …
不得不
A: What do you have to do this weekend? B: I have to…
What
weekend activities
do you do?
Have a talk about your weekend
colorful
weekend
activities
go shopping
go skateboarding
play soccer
go to the cinema
Have a talk
colorful
weekend
activities
play the piano
climb mountains
go to a party
surf the Internet
1.
Jim
play soccer with his friend this
weekend
, because he is very busy.
A. can B. cans C. cann’t D. can’t
2. Henry
his homework this afternoon.
A. have to do
B
. have to doing
C. has to do D. has to doing
3
.
—
? — It’s
October the 14th.
A. When is today
B. What’s today
C. What time is today D. What day is today
D
C
I.
选择填空。
D
Exercises
1.
星期六你能来我的聚会吗？
____ you _____ to my party on Saturday?
2.
当然，我
乐意去。
Sure, ____ ____ ___.
3.
对不起，我
必须为数学考试而学习。
Sorry, I _____ ______ ____ a math test.
4.
明天晚上你能去看电影吗？
____ you ____ to the movies __________night?
I’d love to
Can come
must study for
Can
go
II.
根据课本内容
,
完成下列句子。
tomorrow
5.
当然
可以
，
听起来
很棒。
_____, that _______ _____.
6.
恐怕
不行，我
得了流感。
I’m ______ not. I have the ____.
7.
他能参加聚会吗？
____ he ___ to the party?
8.
不能
，
他
得帮助他的父母。
No, he _____. He _____ to help his parents.
9.
她能参加棒球比赛吗？
____ she go to the baseball ______?
Sure sounds great
afraid flu
Can game
Can go
can’t has
10.
不，她没有空。她必须去看医生。
No, she’s ____ _________. She ______ ___
to
the _______.
11.
他们能去看电影吗？
____ they ____ to the _______?
12.
不
，
他们
没有空。他们可能必须去见朋友。
No, they’re not ____. They _____
_____ ___ meet
their
________.
not available must go
doctor
friends
Can go movies
free might
have to
中考链接
You
____
walk on the wet hill path because
you ____ fall
and hurt yourself.
A
. must; might not
B
. mustn’t; might
C
. needn’t; need
D
. must; must
句意“你一定不要在潮湿的山间小路行走，因为你可能摔倒伤到自己。
B
It’s a Birthday
Party
Friday, June30, at five thirty
Betty’s house, 327
th
Street
Come and have fun!
For whom :
Time :
Place :
Betty
Write an invitation based on
the following
information
.
Homework
Section B 1a-1f
To
grasp the expressions about the
days
：
today, yesterday, the
day before yesterday, the day after tomorrow, tomorrow
To
learn to use some words and phrases
:
would
like to, will be, after this, please, reply
◆
To learn to make friends properly.Remember:a friend inneed is a friend indeed.
Objectives
Review
Inviting:
Can you ......on Sunday?
Accepting:
Sure, I’d love to.
Refusing:
Sorry, I can’t. I
have to …
Inviting:
Would you like to ... ...
on Monday afternoon?
Refusing:
Sorry, I 'm afraid not. I have to …
Accepting:
Sure.That sounds great.
weekdays: Monday Tuesday Wednesday
Thursday Friday
weekends: Sunday Saturday
｛
What day
is
it today?----It
's
...
What day
was
it yesterday?----It
was
...
What day
is
it tomorrow?----It
's
...
days
dates:
January
1st
February
2nd
March
3rd
April
4th
May
5th
June
8th
July
9th
August
12th
September
20th
October
21st
November
22nd
December
23rd
What
's
the date today?----It
's
...
What
was
the date yesterday?----It
was
...
What
's
the date tomorrow?----It
's
...
days and dates
What
was
yesterday?--It
was
…
What
was
the day before yesterday?--It
was
…
What
’s
tomorrow?-- It
’s
…
What
’s
the day after tomorrow?--It
’s
…
What
’s
today?--It
’s
Wednesday, the 20th.
Today is
Friday, November 22nd.
Sunday
the
______
Monday
the______
Tuesday
the______
Wednesday
the______
20th
17th
18th
19th
Write the dates for this week on the calendar.
Thursday
the_____
Friday
the______
Saturday
the______
21st
22nd
23rd
1a
Sunday
the _____
Monday
the _____
Tuesday
the _____
Wednesday
the _____
Thursday
the _____
Friday
the ______
Saturday
the ______
20th
17th
18th
19th
21st
22nd
23rd
today
yesterday
the day after tomorrow
weekday
weekday
weekday
weekday
weekday
Write the words below the correct dates.
weekend
weekend
1b
the day before yesterday
tomorrow
Ask and answer questions about the days in 1a.
A: What
’
s today?
B: It
’
s ... .
A: What
’
s tomorrow?
B: It
’
s ... .
A: What
’
s the day after tomorrow?
B: It
’
s ... .
1c
Yes No
Listen. Can Vince play tennis with Andy? Circle Yes or No.
1d
Vince’s Activities
Days
__ Play soccer
a
. today
b
. tomorrow
c
. the day after
tomorrow
__ Go to the doctor
__ Study for the test
__ Have a piano lesson
__Look after his sister
c
b
a
a
b
Listen again. Match Vince’s activities with the days in 1d.
1e
Students A is Andy and Student B is Vince. Andy, invite Vince to play tennis.
A: Hi, Vince. Can you play
tennis with me?
B: When?
A: Today?
B: Sorry, I can’t. I
…
1f
Role play: Vince and Andy
Andy: Hi, Vince, can you play tennis with me?
Vince: ______?
Andy: Today.
Vince: Sorry , I can’t. I ______________________
______________
______
.
Andy: What are you doing tomorrow?
Vince: ______________________
Andy: How about _____________________?
Vince: I have to babysit my sister.
have to go the doctor and study for a test.
When
I’m having a piano lesson
the day after tomorrow
与时间相关的短语有很多。例如
:
the day after tomorrow
后天
the day before yesterday
前天
two days ago
两天前
the year before last
前年
after three weeks
三个星期后
in two years
过两年
Language points
2.
问日期的句型有：
今天是几号？
What’s the date today?
或
What date is it today?
3.
“日期”的表示法 例如
: 11
月
5
号
November 5;
November 5th
读作
November the fifth
4.
Monday
(
名词
)
“星期一”
在英语中表示星期的词有：
Monday
星期一
Tuesday
星期二
Wednesday
星期三
Thursday
星期四
Friday
星期五
Saturday
星期六
Sunday
星期日
注意
:
表示“星期”开头的字母要大写。
表示星期的单词都以“
day
”结尾。
问“星期”的句型有：
What day is it today?
What day is today?
I.
根据中文填空。
1. Today I’m very busy, but she is _______(
空闲的
).
2. They are studying for a _______ ______. (
数学测验
).
3. I get his __________ (
邀请
) but I can’t go.
4. I have too _________(
多
) homework to do.
5. Mr. King sometimes goes to the _________ (
音乐会
).
free
math test
invitation
much
concert
Exercises
II.
单项选择。
1. — Can you come to play soccer with me?
— __________.
A. I can B. That's all right C. Sure. I’d love to
2. He can go with you, but I _______.
A. am not B. can’t C. don’t
3. What are you doing _____ Monday morning?
A. on B. at C. in
C
B
A
4. Thanks for _______ me to the party.
A. ask B. asking C. asks
5. Bob can’t come out to play because he________ help
Dad in the garden.
A. can B. can’t C. has to
6. —Would you like a cup of coffee?
—____________.
A. No, I don’t want B. No, thank you
C. I don’t like it
B
C
B
Plan a party
Write everything you have to do next week. Choose a day and time to have a party. Then invite classmates to your party.
Homework
Section B 2a-2e
1. Write down these phrases.
1)
为
……
做准备
______________
2)
得了流感
_____________
3)
去见朋友
________________
4)
当然，我愿意去
_______________
5)
太多作业
___________________
prepare for …
have the flu
Sure. I’d love to.
meet the friends
too much homework
Review
— hang out, tonight;
— study for a math test
— play tennis;
— not free, go to the doctor
— come to my party;
— I love to.
1) — Can you hang out with us tonight?
— Sorry. I must study for a math test.
2. Make an invitation to your friends.
2. — Can you play tennis with us?
— I’m not free. I must go to the doctor.
Make a list of the kinds of parties people have.
Birthday party
___________________
___________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
family party
class party
Think more!
farewell party (
送别会）
housewarming party
（乔迁庆宴会）
2
a
Message 1: ________________________
Message 2: ________________________
Message 3: ________________________
Read the messages quickly. Why did the people write them? Match the reason with each message.
make an invitation
turn down an invitation
accept an invitation
1.accept an invitation
2.make an invitation
3.turn down an invitation
2b
Message
New
Reply
Forward
Delete
Print
Move to
Hi David,
What a great idea! I really like Ms. Steen a lot. She helped me to improve my English so much. I
’
m sad to see her go, and this party is the best way to say
“
Thank you and goodbye.
”
I can help to buy some of the food and drinks. I can help to bring MS. Steen to the party. I already have a great idea about how to do that.
☺
He Wei
1
Hi David
Thanks so much for planning this. I
’
d love to come to the party, but I
’
m not available. My family is taking a trip to Wuhan at the end of this month to visit my aunt and uncle. However, I
’
d still be glad to help out with any of the party preparations, like planning the games. Let me know if you need my help.
Jake
3
Dear classmates,
As I
’
m sure you know by now, our favorite teacher, Ms. Steen, is leaving soon to go back to the US. We
’
re very sad that she
’
s leaving because she is a fun teacher. To show how much we
’
re going to miss her, let
’
s have a surprise party for her next Friday the 28th!
Can you come to the party? If so, can you help with any of these things?
Please tell me by this Friday.
2
Buy food and drinks.
Think of games to play.
Prepare things we need for
the games (glue, paper, pen,
…
).
4) Bring Ms. Steen to the play without telling so that she can be surprised.
I look forward to hearing from you all.
David
What kind of party is it?
_______________________
2. Who is the party for?
________________________
3. When is the party?
________________________
4. Who did David invite to the party?
____________________________________
5. What can people do at the party?
_____________________________________
Read the messages and answer the questions.
Surprise party. (
送别会）
Ms. Steen.
Next Friday the 28
th
.
All his classmates, such as He Wei, Jack.
They can eat, drink, and play games.
2c
指导：
通读
这三段信息，可知
David
将为
Ms. Steen
举办一个送别聚会。第三条是聚会的具体情况。第一、二条是
He Wei
和
Jake
的回复。
第三条是
David
对同学们所发的邀请，包括对聚会的准备情况。因此，回答问题应主要根据第三条的内容来回答。
在理解五个问题的基础上，重点在第三条内容中寻找。
HeWei
______
the invitation
1.He can
_______________________.
2.
He
can________________________.
_______
______
the invitation
He 's not available because
_______________________________.
_______
makes
the invitation
He does this in order to show
_______________________________.
accepts
refuses
Jake
David
help to buy some of the food and drinks
help to bring MS. Steen to the party
his family is taking a trip to Wuhan
how much they
’
re going to miss her
Fill in the chart
We are planning a housewarming
at our new house this Saturday. Can you
? Our house is at 2 London Road. We are serving
and
.
from 7:30 p.m. Please
your friends and family. A party is more
with more people! Please let us
by Wednesday
you can come to the party. Hope you can make it!
party
come to my party
food
drinks
bring
fun
Complete the invitation with words and phrases from the message on page 37.
2d
know
if
Why is he /she one of your favorite teachers
？
________________________________________
2. What do you want to say to him /her?
________________________________________
3. When is the best time to have the party?
________________________________________
She often encourage me and help me in my life.
Dear Mr. Shen, really thanks for your care!
This Friday at 7:00 p.m.
Imagine one of your favorite teachers is leaving. Plan a party for him / her. Answer the questions with a partner.
2e
4. Where can you have the party?
_______________________________________
5. What kind of food will there be?
_______________________________________
6. What kind of drinks would you like to serve?
_______________________________________
A restaurant near our school.
Fruit, meat dairy products and nuts
（坚果
）
.
All kinds of orange juice, beer and so on.
7. Who will come to the party?
__________________________
8. What activities will there be at the party?
________________________________
9. How can you make the party a surprise for your teacher?
__________________________________
All of my classmates.
guess riddle, tell jokes, sing and so on.
Invite her without telling her.
Report
Give us a report according to the answers
My favorite teacher ,
Mr. Shen is leaving...
1.
Thank you for
后接
名词或动名词
形式，表示“
因为
……
而感谢你
”
Thanks for your photos. (photos
为名词
)
Thanks for helping me. (helping
为动名词
)
如果说
:
谢谢你邀请我去做什么事情。我们可说
:
Thank you for your invitation to visit next week.
Language points
2.
invitation
是名词，当“
邀请
”讲时，是
不可数名词
，当“
邀请书，请帖
”讲时，是
可数名词
。
e.g
. Come at the invitation.
应邀前来
►
They
received invitations to the party.
他们
收到了参加聚会的
请帖。
invite
的用法
:
(1)
invite sb. to
sw
=ask
sb. to sw
（
某地
somewhere
）
邀请某人到某地
e.g. He invited many people to his house.
(2)
invite sb. to do sth
=ask sb.to do sth.
邀请某人做谋事
e.g. He also invited a singer to sing for his friends.
invitation to sw /to do sth
.
去某地
/
做某事的邀请
e.g. an invitation to the party
an invitation to go to the summer camp
3.
Let’s have a
surprise party
for her next Friday the 28th!
surprise party
是西方国家常见的一种聚会形式，是一种旨在给人带来惊喜的聚会。聚会往往围绕一个或若干主题人物而举办，聚会的举办者事先会对主题人物保密，待其来到聚会现场之后才意外发现大家在为自己举行派对，因而会十分惊讶和感激。
还有一种
surprise party
并没有所谓的主题人物，而是旨在娱乐，参与者在聚会当中不断遭遇各种意外惊喜，欢乐不止。因此，
surprise party
可译作“惊喜聚会；意外派对”。
4.
I
look forward to
hearing from you all.
我期盼着你们的答复。
look forward to
是一个固定搭配，表示“
期待，期盼
”，其中
to
是介词，因此后面
如果使用动词，要使用其
-ing
形式
。
如：
I look forward to your reply.
我期待你的答复。
►
I’m really looking forward to seeing my little grandson
again.
我好期待再次见到我的小孙子。
5.
have a piano lesson
上钢琴课
have a lesson
上课
have a try
试一试
have a (good) rest have a look
看一看
have a good time have meals
吃饭
have breakfast / lunch/ dinner/ supper
6.
Hope you can
make it!
希望你能参加（聚会）
!
此句中的
make it
是个独立地表达方式，表示通过努力或是历经困难后取得成功、完成某事，可译为“
成功；胜利
”， 但有时也要视语境及上下文灵活进行翻译，此处便是如此。
e.g.
►
If we run, we should make it.
要是我们跑的话，应该不会迟到。
►
Though it was difficult, they still made it.
虽然很难，但他们依然成功了。
1. Today is
Monday.
(
提问
)
______ ___ _____ today?
2. They are going to the doctors
on Monday.
(
提问
)
_____ ____ they going to the doctors?
3. Call me after the test. (
否定句
)
______ ____ me after the test.
I.
句型转换。
What’s
the
date
When are
Don’t call
Exercises
5. Why don’t you have an English party?
(
同义转换
)
_____ ____ have an English party?
6. Do you want to come over to my house?
(
同义转换
)
______ ____ ____ to come over to my house?
_____ you come over to my house?
Would you like
Can
Why not
中考链接
— Do you have any plans for the holiday?
— Yes, I’m planning to travel to Jiuzhaigou. I’m
looking forward to _____ the colourful lakes
and amazing waterfalls.
A.see B. seeing
C. sees D.saw
look forward to doing sth
，期待做某事。
B
1. Read 2b after class.
2. Write your own sentences with
the phrases below.
1. bring … to … 2. take a trip
3. think of 4. without doing …
5. so that 6. look forward to
7. surprised 8. hear from
Homework
Section B 3a-Self Check
A: Can you …with me?
B: Sure, I’d love to.
Sorry, I have to…
I’m (doing)…
B: When is it?
A: It’s … the...
Review
colorful weekend
activities
play the piano
climb mountains
go to a party
surf the Internet
(1) -
What’s today?
-
It’s
Monday the
2nd
.
(2)
-
What’s tomorrow?
-
It’s
Tuesday the
3rd
.
(3) -
What’s the day after tomorrow?
-
It’s
Wednesday the
4th
.
(4) -
What’s yesterday?
-
It’s
Sunday the
1st
.
Sunday
Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday
Saturday
1)What’s today?
2)What’s yesterday?
3)What’s tomorrow?
4)What’s the day
after
tomorrow?
People always hold a party on December 25
th
. Will you?
Calendar
opening
concert
headmaster
event
n.
开幕式，落成典礼
n.
音乐会
n.
校长
n.
大事，公开活动
guest
calendar
daytime
n.
客人
n.
日历，日程表
n.
白天；日间
Words and expressions
Dear Parents,
I would like to invite you to
the opening of
our new library at No.9 High School. The opening will be
on
the morning of Wednesday, January 8
th
at 9:00. After this, you can
enjoy
our school concert. Then lunch will be
in
the school hall at 12:00.
Read
the invitation and answer the questions.
3
a
Please
dress smartly
. I would also like to invite each parent to bring one book as a gift for the new library. Please reply in writing to this invitation
by
Friday,
December 20
th
.
Larry Smith
Headmaster
用适当的介词填空
1.The opening will be ____
the morning ____ Wednesday, January 8
th
___ 9:00.
2.
I would also like to invite each parent ___bring one book __a gift ___the new library.
3.
Please reply _____writing to this invitation ___Friday.
on
of
at
to
for
as
in
by
1. Who is making the invitation?
__________________________
2. What is the invitation for?
______________________________
3. When will the event happen?
__________________________________
___________________________________
The headmaster.
For the opening of the new library.
O
n
the morning of Wednesday, January
8th at 9:00.
4. What will happen after this?
___________________________________
5. Do parents have to bring anything?
___________________________________
6. How should people reply to this
invitation
, and when?
___________________________________
___________________________________
After this they can enjoy the school concert.
Yes, each parent need to bring one book.
They should reply in writing to this
invitation by Friday, December 20th.
1.
Please
reply in writing to this invitation by Friday, December 20th.
1)
reply in writing
表示“以书面的形式进行回复”。其中
reply
相当于
answer
，
但要比后者更加书面化且正式许多。此处介词
in
表示方式，相当于汉语“用
……
方式（形式）”的意思。
Language points
2) reply
用作动词时，不直接跟宾语，须由介词
to
引入宾语的内容，构成
reply to…
结构。例如：
Did you reply to these
letters?
3
)
在此句中，介词
by
意为“截止至
……
；到
……
为止
”。介词
before
也有“
……
之
前”的意思。但区别于
before
不包含其后的时间，而
by
则包括。试比较
：
You
should get your homework ready
by
Friday.
Remember
: Friday is the last day!
你
应当最迟于星期五把作业准备好
。
记住
：周五是最后一天
！
Can
you come and meet me
before
Friday?
I’ll
be away early Friday morning
.
你
能礼拜五前来见我一面吗
？
我
周五一大早就走了
。
Write
an invitation to a party or any
other
event. Reply to your partner’s
invitation
. If you turn down the invitation,
give
a good reason.
would like to
;
will be;
after
this;
please
;
reply
Use the following
words and phrases
：
3
b
本题
要求写两个小作文，一个是邀请他人参加聚会或活动的信函；另一个是答复伙伴的邀请信。
首先
,
认真阅读邀请信所包含的内容：
聚会或活动的类型；举办的时间与地点；客人是否需带礼物；客人是否需答复此信；何时及如何答复此信。
参照
3a
写一个包含上述内容的邀请信，注意运用提示词语。
写作指导：
1. Making invitations
发出邀请
“Do
you have any plan next Friday
night? We
are having some friends over for a dinner p
arty
. Would you like to join us?”
“Are you free next Friday night
?”
“
Are you doing anything Friday night
?”
“
Would you be interested in coming to our
house
that night
?”
“
How do you like to join our party Friday
night?”
“
Would you like to
...”
2. Accepting invitations
接受邀请
“I’d love to, thank you.”
“That’s very kind of you, thanks.”
“It sounds great, thank you.”
“That will be lovely, thank you.”
“That’s great, thank you.”
“What a good idea, thank you.”
3. Declining invitations
拒绝邀请
“That’s very kind of you, but actually
I’m planning
to see my grandma next Saturday.”
“I’m really sorry, but I have to do something
else
on next weekend
.”
“
I really don’t think I can make it—I am
supposed
to be at airport picking up my
friend
next Sunday morning.”
Remember:
当你拒绝他人的邀请时
,
要特别注意礼貌。通常你要给个理由
,
说明为什么无法接受邀请
,
或者道歉。
One possible version:
Dear parents,
I’d like to invite you to the opening ceremony for the new students at No. 10 Middle School. The opening will be on the morning of Wednesday, September 4th at 8:00. After this, you can visit our school. Please dress smartly. I would also like to invite each parent to think of some words to encourage your child to study hard at school.
Please reply in e-mail to this invitation by Monday, September, 2nd. Our e-mail address is Number10MS@sina. com.
I look forward to hearing from you all.
Huang Zongsheng
Headmaster
A: Can you go shopping with me next week?
B: Sure, I
’
d love to. When?
A: Well, what are you going to do on
Monday
evening
?
B: I must study for the English test.
What
about
Tuesday
evening?
Student
A, look at your calendar on the right. Student B, look at yours on page 81. Find a time when you can both go shopping.
4
Student
A’s
calendar
MONDAY FRIDAY
Daytime: school
Daytime: school
Evening:
Susan’s
party
TUESDAY
SATURDAY
Daytime: school
Evening: study for
math
Morning: play tennis with
Dad
Afternoon: do homework
WEDENDAY
SUNDAY
Daytime: school
Morning: visit grandparents
Evening: go to a concert
THURSDAY
Daytime: school
Evening: help parents
A: Hi, Peter.
you come to my party
___the
weekend?
B: Sure,
love to.
A: How about
, Jenny?
C: I’m afraid I
. I
to look after my little cousin.
A:
you come, Jeff?
D: I
be able to, but I’m not sure. ____let you know
tomorrow
.
Can
on
I’d
you
can’t
have
Can
might
I’ll
1. Fill in the blanks in the conversation.
Self Check
1.
Invitation: “Can you come to my party on
Saturday?”
Reply:___________________________
___________________________
Sorry, I can’t. I have to prepare
for math test.
2.
You get these invitations but can’t go.
Write
a refusal and a reason.
2. Invitation: “Let’s go to the
movies tomorrow
night
.”
Reply: ______________________________
______________________________
Sorry, I can’t. I must visit my
grandparents.
3. Invitation: “Let’s go to the concert on
the weekend
.”
Reply: ______________________________
______________________________
Sorry, I’m afraid I can’t. I will go to
the concert with my parents.
4. Invitation:
“
Do you want to go shopping with
me
next week?
”
Reply:________________________________
_________________________________
Sorry, I’m afraid I can’t. I will go
to the summer camp.
5. Invitation: “Can you play soccer with me
after
school
today?
Reply: ________________________________
_________________________________
_________________________________
Sorry, I’m afraid I can’t. I have to
go home early to look after my little
brother.
1. My American friend is going to ______ me next vacation.
2. Are you _______ football this weekend?
3. I can’t join you because I ______ help my mom on weekdays.
4. Please keep quiet! I’m trying to ______.
5. Do you want to _______ to my birthday party?
visit
come
study
have to
playing
I.
选词填空。
play come have to study visit
Exercises
1. Thanks a lot for your i_________.
2. I don’t stay out late on w_______.
3. Every morning I spent two hours t________
for
the
race.
4. Miss Lee t_______ us English this year.
5. S_______ is the seventh day of a week.
II
. 首字母填空。
nvitation
eekdays
raining
eaches
unday
III.
完成对话。
A: Hello, Tim, can you _____ to my party?
B: _______ is it?
A: Next week. ______ Wednesday night.
B: Sure, _______ to. But I have to _____ for the science test.
A: Maybe ______ time.
B: Thanks for ________ me.
come
When
On
I’d love
next
asking
study
Ⅳ.
根据汉语提示完成下列句子。
1.
我们后天去参观那个地方吧。
2.
我将等到四点钟。
Let’s go and visit the place the day after tomorrow.
I’ll wait till four o’clock.
1
.
—
May
I use your dictionary
?
—
_____
A. Never mind
B
. You are welcome
C. It
doesn
’
t
matter
D
. Certainly. Here you are
2. Jack is very funny. He always makes us_____
A. laugh
B
. laughing
C. to laugh D. laughs
3.Before 2008 we will finish_____ the Olympic Park.
A. build B. built C. building D. to build
D
A
C
Ⅴ.
单项选择。
假如你叫
Jenny,
你的朋友
Jane
邀请你
下周和她
一
起
去看
电影。你
根据时间安排，给朋友回一
封信
。
注意
信的格式。
Homework
unit 10
人教版八年级英语上册单元全套课件
If you go to the party,you’ll have a great time.
Section A 1a-1c
To learn to talk about
consequences.
To learn to use
first conditional
if
+
will
.
To learn to use present
progressive as future.
Objectives
She will be late.
If she _______ to school, she _____ ____ late.
She is going to
walk to school.
walks
will
be
Warming up
It is going to rain tomorrow.
I will stay at home.
If it _____ tomorrow, I _____ _____ at home.
rains
will
stay
If it ____
sunny tomorrow, they _____ ______ a trip.
It will be sunny tomorrow.
They will have a trip
tomorrow.
is
will have
He won’t study hard.
He will fail in the exam.
If he _______ study hard, he ____ _____ in the exam.
doesn’t
will
fail
A: If you are happy,
what
will
you do?
B: If I’m happy,
I
will
…
sing a song
watch TV
play sports
dance
go shopping
play computer
If
I
have
enough money, I
will
go
for a vacation.
If
it
is
hot, I
will
go
to swim.
If
I
go
to the zoo, I
will
see
the animal show.
If
she
eats
too much, she
will
be
very fat.
Statements
___I think I’ll wear jeans to the party.
___I think I’ll stay at home.
___I think I’ll take the bus to the party.
___I think I’ll go to the party with Karen
and Anna.
c
d
b
a
Match the statements with the pictures [a-d].
1a
Listen and complete the responses in 1a.
Statements
Responses
I think I’ll wear jeans to the party.
If you do, the teachers won’t
______________.
I think I’ll stay at home.
If you
do,
you’ll _______________.
I think I’ll take the bus to the party.
If you do, you’ll _______________.
I think I’ll go to the party with Karen and Anna.
If you do, you’ll
____________________.
let you in
be sorry
be late
have a great time
1b
Translate the sentences
1.
如果你穿牛仔裤去参加聚会，老师将不让你进。
If you
wear
jeans to the party,the teachers
won't
let you in.
2.
如果你待在家里，你会遗憾的。
If you
stay
at home,you
will
be sorry.
3.
如果你乘公共汽车去参加聚会，你会迟到的。
If you
take
the bus to the party,you
will
be late.
4.
如果你和
Karen
和
Anna
一起去参加聚会，你会玩的
很开心。
If you
go
to the party with
Karen and Anna,you
will
have a good time.
Look at the pictures above and make conversations.
A: Are you going to the party tomorrow night?
B: Yes, I am.
A: Who will you go with?
B: I think I’ll go with Karen and Anna.
A: If you do, you’ll have a great time.
1c
No, I think I am going to take the bus to the party.
The bus?
If
you
do
, you
’ll
be
late.
Are you going to take a taxi to the party?
Make your own
conversations
Are you going to the party tomorrow night?
Yes, I am.
If you do, you’ll have a great time.
I think I’ll go with Karen and Anna.
Who will you go with?
1. I will watch TV this weekend. My mother will be angry.
If I ________ TV this weekend, my mother ____ ____angry.
2. He will have a strange haircut. The teachers won’t agree.
If he _____ a strange haircut, the teachers ______ _______.
watch
will be
has
won’t agree
Exercises
I.
填空。
1. If it rains tomorrow, we _____ to visit the museum.
A. don’t do B. won’t go
C. aren’t go D. didn’t go.
2. Will you go to the park if it ____ fine?
A. will be B. was C. is D. /
3. If you __ to school late, your teacher ____ angry with you.
A. come; are B. come; will be
C. will come; are D. will come; will be
B
C
B
II.
选择。
4. If you _____ hard, you will ___ successful.
A. work; are B. works; is
C. to work; be D. work; be
5. If I ____ too much TV, my mother will _______.
A. watch; angry
B. watched; be angry
C. watch; be angry
D. will watch; be angry
D
C
中考链接
—
We will go for a picnic if it
_____
this Sunday.
—
Sounds great.
A.won't rain
B.is sunny
C.will be sunny
句意
“
—
如果这周日天气晴朗，我们就去野炊。
—
听起来不错。”
B
Listen
to 1a and
1b.
Remember
the new words.
Preview
the next part.
Homework
Section A 2a-2d
To learn to talk about consequences.
To learn to use
first conditional
if + will
.
To learn to use present progressive as future.
Objectives
I.
翻译。
1. —
我想我要步行去学校。
—
如果步行去，你就会迟到。
— I think I
’ll walk
to school.
—
If
you
do
, you
’ll
be
late.
What
will happen
if
they
have
the party tomorrow?
Review
2.
如果他们明天聚会，将会发生什么？
II.
用
括号内所给动词的适当形式填空。
1. If
you
______(
forget) your tickets,
you can’t
____(go)
to
the concert
.
2. If Jenny
_____(
fail) the test again, the
teacher
_______
(
ask) her mother to
come
to school.
3. If you
_____(
play) music too loud,
your roommates
________(
be) mad at you.
4. Andy, would you like something
_______(drink)?
forget go
fails will ask
play
will be
to drink
video
n.
录像带；录像
potato chips
炸土豆片；炸薯条
Is the
video
on the bookshelf?
录像带在书架上吗？
I’d like some
potato chips
, please.
我想买些薯条。
New words
chocolate
n.
巧克力
I like
chocolate
ice-cream best.
我最喜欢巧克力冰激凌。
meeting
n.
会议；集会；会面
Is the
meeting
on Wednesday?
会议是在星期三吗？
organize
v.
组织；筹备
Let’s
organize
a soccer game.
让我们组织一次足球比赛吧。
The students are talking about when to have
(a class party / a class meeting / a birthday party).
2. They plan to have it on
(Friday evening /
Saturday afternoon /
Saturday evening).
Listen and circle the correct answers to complete the sentences.
2a
half the class won’t come
some students will be bored
make some food students will leave early
the party games
1. What will happen if they have the party today?
Half the class won’t come.
2.What will happen if they have the party tomorrow?
________________________________________
Students will leave early to study for the test.
Listen again. Choose the correct short answer in the box to answer each question.
2b
3. What will happen if they watch a video at
the party?
__________________________________
4. What will Mark organize?
__________________________________
5. What will Nelly do?
__________________________________
Some students will be bored.
He will organize party games.
She will make some food.
Retell the conversation
Students are talking about when to have a ____________. If they ______it today,half the class ___________.If they _____it tomorrow, students _____________early ___________the test. So they decide to have it on___________________.They will __________________at the party.Nelly will
_________________.Mark will______________________.
class party
have
won't come
have
will leave
to study for
Saturday afternoon
play party games
make some food
organize the party games
Role-play a conversation between
Nelly and Mark.
A: OK, when is a good time to have the party?
B: Let’s have it today.
A: Hmm. If we have it today, half the class won’t come.
2c
Hmm. If we have it today, half the class won’t come.
Why not have it on the weekend?
OK, good idea.
Role-play the conversation.
Jeff: Hey, Ben. For the party next week, should we ask
people to bring food?
Ben: No, let’s
order
food
from
a restaurant. If we ask
people to bring food, they’ll just bring potato
chips and chocolate because they’ll be
too
lazy
to
cook.
Jeff: OK. For the games, do you think we should give
people some small gifts if they win?
2d
Ben: I think that’s a great idea! If we do that,
more people will want to play the games.
Jeff: Yes, the games will be more exciting, too.
order…from…
从
……
预定
too…to…
太
……
而不能
……
注释
Answer the questions.
1. What will happen if we ask people to bring food?
_____________________________________
_____________________________________
2. What will happen if we give people some small gifts if
they win?
___________________________________
More people will want to play the games.
They’ll just bring potato chips and chocolate because they’ll be too lazy to cook.
Hey, Ben. For the party next week, should we ask people to bring food?
No, let’s order food from a restaurant
…
Role-play the conversation.
…
The students are talking about when to have a class
meeting
.
meeting
是名词，意为“会议，集会；会面”，作“聚会”解时
,
多指出于偶然的机会
,
在某地与某人相遇。
meeting
作“会议”解时
,
指任何有组织的、有领导的、公开的或私下的各种集会
,
多在室内举行
,
目的是商讨议案、作出决定等。
如：
The meeting will deal with these problems.
Language points
Our meeting in Beijing was later than I expected.
meeting
用作主语
,
谓语动词多用
单数形式
。
meeting
前常加介词
at
,
表示“在会议上”；而表示“在会议期间私下说话”则用介词
in
。
2.
What will happen
if
they have the party today?
if
作为连词，引导条件状语从句，表示“
假如
”
、“
如果
”
等
。引导条件状语从句最常用的连词是
if
，表示在某条件下，某事很
可能发生
，主句不能用
be going to
表示将来，而应该用
shall
，
will
。
如：
If you leave now, you will never regret it.
如果你现在离开，你将绝不会后悔。
if
引导的条件状语从句，其结构为：
If
＋一般现在时，主语＋
shall/will+
动词原形
。
要注意在状语从句中有一个规则是
“
主将从现
”
，即主句是将来时，则从句要用一般现在时表示将来。 如：
If it rains tomorrow, I shan’t climb the hills.
如果明天下雨
,
我将不会爬山。
3.
What will Mark
organize
?
organize
是动词，意为“
组织，筹备
”
,
过去式是
organized
，
即组织某人或某事物，将某人或某事物编入组织或系统，使之相互联系，且每一个体在组织中都有其恰当的作用或职责，如：
I believe I have the ability to organize a party.
我相信我有能力组织一次社交聚会。
Don’t ask them to organize the trip. They’ll only screw everything up.
别让他们组织此行。他们准得把一切都搞糟了。
organized
还可作形容词，意为
“
有组织的，有条理的
”
，
如：
An organized program of advertisements.
有组织的大规模的广告计划。
If I
get
up at 9:00,
If I
am
late,
If the teacher
is
angry with me,
If she
is
happy
，
she
will play
the guitar.
I
will be
late.
the teacher
will be
angry with me.
I
will be
sad.
总结
: if
引导的条件状语从句主句和从句时态如何？
if
引导
条件状语
从句时，如果
主句
是
______________
，那么
if
引导的
从句
用
_______________
来表示将来可能发生的动作或存在的状态
,
也就是所谓的
___________
。
一般将来时态
一般现在时态
“
主将从现
”
3. You ___________(not get) nervous if you _____(do )
enough exercise.
4. If she _______(finish ) work early, she ______ (go) home.
5. If it _____(rain), we ________(stay) at home.
用括号内所给
单
词的正确形式填空
。
1. I’ll buy a computer if I _______(have) enough money.
2. I’m sure if he _____(go) to the party, he ________
(have) a great time.
have
goes
will have
do
finishes
will go
rains will stay
won’t get
Exercises
Tell your mother your plans about a party.
Preview the new words and expressions on page 75.
Preview the letter from Tina to Su Mei.
Homework
Section A Grammar Focus-3c
To practice the sentence structures:
If…, you’ll…
—What will happen if they…
—If
they…,
…will/won’t…
—Should we…?
—If we…, they’ll…
Objectives
What are you going to do this weekend?
go camping
go to the park
play football
stay at home
do my homework
listen to some music
watching TV
go shopping
The weather is very important!
sunny
rainy
snowy
cloudy
If it is sunny this weekend…
sunny
If it
is
sunny this weekend,
If it
is
sunny this weekend,
If it
is
sunny this weekend,
I
will
go camping.
I
will
go to the park.
I
will
play football.
rainy
If it
rains
this weekend,
If it rains this weekend…
I
will
stay at home.
If it
rains
this weekend, I
will
do my homework.
If it
rains
this weekend, I
will
listen to some music.
I think I’ll take the bus to the party.
If you do, you’ll be late.
I think I’ll stay at home.
If you do, you’ll be sorry.
What will happen if they have the party today?
If they have it today, half the class won’t come.
Should we ask people to bring food?
If we ask people to bring food, they’ll just bring potato chips and chocolate.
Read the sentences
I
think
I
’ll
take the bus to the party.
If you
do
, you
’ll
be late.
I
think
I
’ll
stay at home.
If you
do
, you
’ll
be sorry.
What
will
happen if they
have
the party today?
If they
have
it today, half the class
won’t
come.
Should we ask people to bring food?
If we
ask
people to bring food, they
’ll
just bring potato chips and chocolate.
Grammar Focus
I will have a good time tomorrow.
I will go to the party tomorrow.
If I
go to the party
tomorrow,
I’ll have a good time.
合并
Grammar
Focus: if
条件句
if
引导一个条件状语从
句时，
当
主句是一般将来时时
, if
引导的从句必须用现在时来
表示将来可能发生的动作或存在的状态。
在英语里
,
当句子的主句为将来时态时
,
它所引导的时间状语从句和条件状语从句都使用一般现在时来表示将来时间
,
这在英语里被称为“主将从现”。主句的将来时态并不仅限于我们这一课里所学习到的
will
＋动词原形构成的一般将来时
,
还包括
be going to
＋动词原形、
be doing
所表示的一般将来时以及我们以后会学到的其它的将来时态。例如
:
►
What
is he going to do
when
he grows up?
他
长大了想干什么
？
►
We
are leaving for
Xiamen
tomorrow
if
it doesn’t
rain.
如果
明天不下雨
,
我们就去厦门。
►
We
will buy that microwave next week
if
its price
keeps
going down.
如果
价格持续下降
,
下个礼拜
我们就买那台微波炉。
If
+
…
, I’ll / you’ll
+
…
↘
↙ ↘
↙
条件
结果
1.
结构
For example:
If
you study
, I’ll
be happy.
wear
jeans to
school, you’ll
be sorry.
get
up
late, you’ll
be late.
eat
too much,
you’ll
be fat.
wash
your clothes yourself…
有时，我
们可以使用
并列结构的祈使句
来表
达
if
引
导的条件句。如：
If
you set your alarm clock, you
won’t oversleep.
如果
你上闹钟
,
你就不会睡过头了
。
Set
your alarm clock, and you
won’t oversleep
.
►
If
you give him an inch, he will take a mile.
他
会得寸进尺。
►
Give
him an inch, and he will take a mile.
►
If
you don’t give him some food, he will starve.
如果
你不给他一点吃的
,
他就会饿死。
►
Give
him some food, or/else he will starve.
2
.
用法
(1)
条件状语从句通常由连词
if
引导
,
意为“如果、假如”
,
主句不能用
be going to
表示将来
,
而应该用
shall, will
。
e.g
. If you leave now, you are never going to regret it.
(
错误
)
If
you leave now, you will never regret it.
(
正确
)
(
2)
if
“
如果”
,
引导条件状语从句
,
主句用一般将来时
,
从句则用一般现在时，
如：
If
it rains tomorrow, I shan’t climb the hills.
注意
:
宾语从句中的
if
与条件状语从句
if
的区别。
宾语从句中的
if“
是否”相当于
whether,
引导宾
语从句
,
时态需根据语境确定
。
I
don’t know
if
it will rain tomorrow.
我不知道明天是否会下雨。
在阅读英文文章时
,
我们有可能看到这样的句子：
If my father will give me permission, I shall spend a few months abroad.
如果我父亲同意
,
我将在国外待几个月。
If you will take the trouble to read his letter carefully,
you will see what he means.
如果
你肯花一些时间来认真读他的信，你就会明白他是什么意思了。
在
if-
分句中用“
will
＋动词原形”并不单纯表示将来意义，这里的
will
是个表示“意愿”的情态动词
,
相当于
be willing to
(
愿意
)
。
要注意这种
带“
will
＋动词原形
”的
if-
分句在某些场合是不可以随便用的
,
比如我们可以说：
If he gets my letter in time, he’ll be able to change
his plans
.
如果他及时收到我的信
,
他就能改变他的计划
。
却
不可以说成：
If he will get my letter in time, he’ll be able to change his plans.
If you would try Italian food, you would like it.
如果你愿意尝尝意大利食物
,
你会喜欢它的。
If you would reserve the seats, we would be sure of a comfortable journey.
如果你愿意订座
,
我们将肯定会有一个舒适的旅程。
Dear Su Mei,
I don’t
______(
know) what to
______(
do) about going to Mike’s birthday party tomorrow night. My parents ______(think) I should study for my English exam next
week. If
I
______(
go) to the party, they ________(be) upset. Mike ______(tell) us wear nice
know
do
think
go
will be
Fill
in the blanks with the correct forms of the verbs in brackets.
3a
told
clothes
, but I don’t ______(have) any. If I _____(wear) jeans, I ________(look) the worst. Also, I’m not sure how to ____(go) to the party. If I
______(
walk), it
_________(
take) me too long. If I
_____(
take) a taxi, it
_________(
be) too expensive. Can you give me some advice please
?
Tina
have
wear
will look
go
walk
will take
take
will be
1
. If
I get up late tomorrow,
____________________________
2
. If
I don’t finish my homework,
____________________________
I will miss the school bus.
my teacher will be angry.
Complete
the sentences
using your
own ideas.
3b
3. If I don’t get enough exercise,
____________________________
4. I will not have enough time to study if
___________________________________
5. I will not make any friends if
____________________________
I won’t be strong.
I play computer games all the day.
I always make them upset.
仿照例子把两句话合成一句话。
Example:
a. You think you’ re going to visit New York City.
b. You will see some tall buildings.
→
If
you
go
to visit New York City,
you
’ll see
some tall buildings.
Practice
1. a. You think you’re going to study English hard.
b. You will do better in English.
2. a. You think you’re going to eat and drink more.
b. You will be fatter.
→
If
you
study
English hard,
you
’ll do
better in
English
.
→
If
you
eat
and
drink
more, you
’ll
be
fatter.
3. a. They think they are going to do more exercise.
b. Their health will be better.
4. a. I think you are going to let me watch TV.
b. I will stay at home.
→ Their health
will be
better if they
do
more exercise
.
→ I
will stay
at home if you
let
me
watch
TV.
Write
a story with your group on a piece of paper. The first person begins the story with “I think I will …” The others add sentences with “if
”.
Pass the paper around twice. Then read the story.
I think I will go to the movies tonight. If I go to the movies, I won’t finish my homework. If I don’t finish my homework…
3c
1.
be
＋
doing
形式
:
用现在进行时态表达将来，主要意义是表示按计划、安排即将发生的动作，常用于位置转移的动词
,
如
go
、
come
、
leave
、
start
、
arrive
等
,
也可用于其它动态动词。如：
The president is coming to the UN this week.
总统这周将到联合国来。
We are moving to a different hotel the day
after tomorrow
.
我们后天将换一家宾馆。
拓 展
在英
语中
,
有相当多的动态动词都可以用现在进行时表示将来。
例如：
Dinner is ready. We’re
having
fish for dinner.
晚饭好了
,
今晚我们吃鱼。
I’m
spending
my holidays in Singapore this year.
今年我要去新加坡度假。
Tom isn’t
finishing
his high school until next year.
汤姆明年才高中毕业。
Can
you give me some
advice
please?
advice
意为“劝告；建议”是不可数名词，不能说
an
advice,
而应说
a
piece of
advice
。“
两个（则）建议”，我们通常说
two pieces of advice
。注意
piece
要采用复数，
advice
不可数，但
piece
可数。我们也可以
说
some
pieces of advice
一些建议。如：
Can you give me some advice?
你能给我一些建议吗？
Language points
与
advice
有关的一些词组：
ask advice
of
向
……
征
求意见
,
请教
by sb
.'s advice
依某人劝告
on sb
.'s advice
依某人劝告
follow sb.'s advice
接受某人意见
give advice
劝告
,
忠告
Ⅰ.
翻译下列句子。
1.
如果你不赶快走
,
你就会迟到。
2 .如果你爱你的父母
,
你应当帮他们做做家务。
3. 如果你更友善一些
,
你会交上很多好朋友。
If you don’t go soon, you’ll be late.
You should help do the housework if you love your parents.
You will make lots of friends if you are more friendly.
Exercises
4. 如果你带外校的朋友来
,
老师会让他们离开。
5. 如果你不完成作业
,
妈妈不会让你玩电游。
6.
当你看到
Bill Gates,
你会对他说些什么？
If you bring friends from other schools, the
teacher will ask them to leave.
If you don’t finish your homework, your
mother won’t let you play computer games.
What will you say to Bill Gates when
you see him?
1.
我想我将会乘公共汽车去参加聚会。
I _____ I’ll take the bus to the ______.
2.
如果你那样做，你将会迟到。
If you _____, _____ be late.
do you’ll
think party
Ⅱ.
根据课本内容，完成下列句子。
3.
我想我将待在家里。
I _____ _____ stay at home.
4.
如果你那样做，你将会觉得很抱歉。
If you ____, ______ ____ sorry.
think I’ll
do you’ll be
5.
如果他们今天聚会，将会发生什么事？
_____ ___ _______ if they _____ the
party today?
What will happen
have
6.
如果他们今天聚会，班里一半的学生将
不会去。
If they ______ the party today, ______ the class _______ come.
7.
我们应当要求人们带食物来吗？
Should we ______ people to ______ food?
have half
won’t
ask bring
中考链接
—This task is really beyond me.
—Well, if you _________solve it,
you
won't
get
paid.
A. can’t B. needn’t
C. mustn’t
D. shouldn’t
句意“
—
这任务真的超出我的能力。
—
好吧，如果你不能解决，你将拿不到报酬。”
A
I think I’ll take the bus to the party.
If you do, you’ll be late.
I think I’ll stay at home.
If you do, you’ll be sorry.
What will happen if they have the party today?
If they have it today, half the class won’t come.
Should we ask people to bring food?
If
we ask people to bring food, they’ll just bring potato chips and chocolate.
1.Write five sentences with if structure.
2.Copy and translate the sentences
below.
Homework
Section B 1a-1d
To get the specific information about Michael’s problem and the
advice.
To learn to talk about Michael’s problem and give
advice.
To make a good choice for the future.
Objectives
选词填空。
1. If you walk there, you’ll be late for the ________.
2. If they watch a _______ at the party, some students
will be bored.
3. I don’t know what to do. Can you give me some
________?
meeting, video, chocolate, taxi,
upset, advice, organize
meeting
video
advice
Review
4. What will happen if she _________ a soccer game on
Saturday?
5. If she doesn’t come home on time, her parents will be
________.
6. If it rains tomorrow, we’ll take a _______ there.
7. If he eats too much _________, he’ll be very heavy.
organizes
upset
taxi
chocolate
e.g. Children under five usually
travel
free on train.
五岁以下的孩子乘火车通常是免费的。
agent
n.
代理人；经纪人
e.g. Mr. Lin is an
agent
for APPLE.
林先生是苹果公司的代理人。
travel
v.& n.
旅行；游历
New words
Some important things in our life.
be happy
go to college
Warming up
If you go to the party, you’ll have a great time.
If you
wear
uniforms to school, the
teachers
will be
happy.
If it snow
s
, we
’ll
make a snowman.
_____ be happy
_____ go to college
_____ be famous
_____ travel around the world
_____ make a lot of money
_____ get an education
Which of the things below are the most
important to you? Circle three things.
周游世界
赚钱
接受教育
1a
Listen. Look at the list in 1a. Write A before
each thing the soccer agent talks about and P
before each thing Michael’s parents talk about.
_____ be happy
_____ go to college
_____ be famous
_____ travel around the world
_____ make a lot of money
_____ get an education
P
P
P
P
A
A
1b
If you join the Lions, ______
If you become a Lion, ______
And if you work really hard, _____
If you become a soccer player, ______
5. But if I don’t do this now, ______
a. you’ll be famous.
b. I’ll never do it.
c. you’ll become a great soccer player.
d. you’ll never go to college.
e. you’ll travel around the world.
b
d
a
e
c
Listen again. Complete the sentences.
1c
Conversation 1
Agent: The lions are a great soccer team, you know! ___ you
join the Lions, you’ll become a great soccer player. If you
________ a Lion, you ________ around the world. And if you
work really hard, you _____ famous.
Listen again and fill in the blanks.
If
become
will travel
will be
Conversation 2
Parents:
You shouldn’t _____ the Lions right now. If you become a professional soccer player, ______ never ____
__
college. Of course you want _____ happy, but there are many other interesting jobs out there. It is exciting. And I know you want to _____ a lot of money. But money isn’t everything, son.
join
to be
you’ll
go to
make
What do you think I should do? Can you give me some advice?
I think you should go to college.
Student A is Michael. Student B is his friend. Student B, give Student A advice.
But if I go to college, I’ll never become a great soccer player.
No, if you go to college, you can get a good education and play soccer on the school team.
…
But if I play on the school team, I won’t develop professional skills, and I won’t earn money.
1d
Talk about your own plan with your partner and
write it down
A:What do you want to do when you grow up?
B:I want to...
If I ...,I will...
Example
My own plan
I think I will be a teacher in ten years. If I become a teacher, I will work with children. I love children so I will be happy. I will also be able to work outside sometimes. But I won’t be famous.
Now you can give me some
advice
.
现在你可以给我一些忠告。
That’s really a good piece of
advice
.
那的确是一条不错的建议。
advice
相当于汉语“
建议；忠告
”的意思，是不可数名词，故
不可
添加复数词尾
-s!
表示“
一条建议；一则忠告
” 应说
a piece of advice
或
a word of advice
。如：
1.
Can you give me some
advice
please?
Language points
advise
是动词，意为“
提建议；给忠告
”。如：
Robert Hunt
advises
students about common problems.
罗伯特
·
亨特就一些常见的问题给学生们提出建议，进行
指导。
The minister
advised
him to leave as soon as possible.
部长建议他尽快离开。
I.
选择填空。
1. If it _____ tomorrow, we’ll go to the park. A. isn’t rain B. doesn’t rain C. will rain D. don’t rain
2. I _____ with you if I’m free.
A. go B. will go C. went D. going
3. The volleyball match will be put off if it _______.
A. will rain
B. rains
C. rained
D. is rained
B
B
B
Exercises
4. There ______ a football game on TV this afternoon.
A. is going to have
B. will be
C. is going to play
D. will play
5. This work is ________ for me than for you.
A. difficult
B. the most difficult
C. most difficult
D. more difficult
6. I’ll catch up with Lucy before she ___ the finishing line. A. reach
B. is reaching
C. reaches in D. will reach
B
D
C
7. Excuse me. Could you tell me ________? A. where’s the office
B. where’s the bus stop C. what’s she doing
D. where the post office is 8. I won’t go if it ________ tomorrow. A. rain B. is raining
C. rains D. will rain
D
C
10. You'd better ________ your jacket.
The room is too hot.
A. take off
B. put on
C. take out
D. take care
9. Wu Dong is good at ________ English. A. speak
B. speaks
C. speaking
D. spoke
C
A
1. Read the article in Activity 2b.
2. Write about your own plans, using
sentences with “
if
” and “
will
”.
Homework
Section B 2a-2e
To get information about problem-solving.
To learn some key words and structures:
teenager, normal,wallet,normal,unless,certainly,mile,angry,understanding,careless,mistake,himself,careful,advise,solve,step,trust,experience,else...
To have a positive attitude to worries.
Objectives
课时重点回顾
a great soccer team,
join the Lions,
become a great soccer player,
travel much,
travel around the world,
sound great,
work really hard,
right now,
become a soccer player,
go to college,
want a job,
of course,
interesting jobs,
really exciting,
make a lot of money,
get an education
Review
Problems teenagers may face
Do you have any problems in your daily life?
I have too much homework to do.
I can’t get along well with my classmates…
I can’t get good marks.
Sometimes I don’t know how to communicate with my parents.
I’m not good at math. I usually worry about it.
I usually go to my math teacher for help.
What kinds of things do you worry about? Who do you usually go to for help?
2a
have no close friends to talk to
have too much homework
eat too much and get fat
feel sleepy in class
When you have such worries, who do you usually go to for help?
An expert?
Keep the worries to yourself?
Your parents?
Your good friends?
Have you ever heard of “
知心姐姐
”?
There is a similar expression in English —
Agony Aunt
.
They write the replies to reader’s letters in an advice column.
Look at the statements and read the passage quickly. Which statement expresses the main idea of the passage?
a. If people have problems, they should get
advice
from an
except
.
b. If people have problems, they should talk to other people.
c. If people have problems, they should
keep
them
to themselves.
2b
专家
保守秘密
Students these days often have a lot of worries. Sometimes they have problems with their schoolwork, and sometimes with their friends. What can they do about this? Some people believe the worst thing is to do nothing. Laura Mills, a teenager from London, agrees. ”Problems and worries are normal in life,” says Laura. “But I think talking to someone helps a lot. Unless we talk to someone, we’ll certainly feel worse.”
Laura once lost her wallet, and worried for days. She was afraid to tell her parents about it. She even walked three miles to school each day because she didn’t have any money. She just kept
thinking
①
,
“If I tell my parents, they’ll be angry!” In the end, she talked to her parents and they were really understanding. Her dad said he sometimes made careless mistakes himself. They
got
②
her a new wallet and asked her to be more careful. “I will always remember to share my problems in the future!” Laura says
.
Robot Hunt advises students about common problems. He feels the same ways as Laura. “It is best not to run away from our problems. We should always try to solve them.” He thinks the first step is to find someone you trust to talk to. This person doesn’t need to be an expert like himself. Students often forget that their parents have more experience, and are always there to help them. In English, we say that sharing a problem is like cutting it in half. So you’re halfway to solving a problem just by talking to someone about it!
Students these days have problems with their________and ___________.Some people think the worst thing they can do is ____________.
But Laura thinks ______________________
helps a lot. ___ we ______do this,we'll _________.
Read paragraph 1,fill in the blanks.
schoolwork
friends
to do nothing
talking to someone
If
don't
feel worse
Read paragraph 2,translate.
1.
害怕做某事
2.
步行三英里去学校
3.
最后
4.
一直做某事
5.
犯粗心的错误
6.
如果我告诉父母，
他们会生气的。
1.be afraid to do sth.
2.walk three miles to school
3.in the end
4.keep doing sth.
5.make careless mistakes
6.If I tell my parents,they'll
be angry.
Read paragraph 3,
complete the sentences.
1.It's best not _______(run)away from our problems
2.
He thinks the first step is ______(find) someone you
trust to talk to.
3.
In English, we say that_________ (share) a problem is like cutting it in half.
4.Y
ou’re halfway to _______ (solve) a problem just by______ (talk) to someone about it!
to run
to find
sharing
solving
talking
Read the passage again and answer the questions. Discuss your answers with a partner.
What is the worst thing to do if you have a problem?
___________________________________
2. Why didn’t Laura want to tell her parents about her lost wallet?
___________________________________
To do nothing.
If she tells her parents, they will be angry.
2c
3. What is the first thing you should do when you want to
solve a problem?
_____________________________________
4. Why can our parents give us good advice about our
problems?
________________________________
The first thing you should do is to find someone you trust to talk to.
Because they have more experience, and are always there to help us.
1.
It’s to do nothing.
读短文第一段第三句“
Some people believe the worst thing is to do nothing.
”可知。
2.
She was afraid they would be angry.
由第二段中第一、二两句“
Laura once lost her wallet, and worried for days. She was afraid to tell her parents about it.
”可知。
指导
3.
It is to find someone you trust to talk to.
由短文第三段第四句“
He thinks the first step is to find someone you trust to talk to
”可知。
4.
Our parents can give us good advice about our problems because they have more experience than us, and are always there to help us.
读第三段第五句“
Students often forget that their parents have more experience, and are always there to help them.
”可知。
Fill in the blanks with the phrases in the box.
1.discuss your problems
2.tell her parents
3.unless you talk
4.run away from
5.talk to someone
6.share her problems
7.to do nothing
Students often have a lot of
problems and worries. Laura
Mills thinks the worst thing
is ____. She thinks you’ll feel
worse if you don’t ____ your
problems. Laura remembers
that she once lost her wallet
and was afraid to ____ about it.
7
5
2
2d
Now she believes you cannot feel better
____
to someone. She says she will always
____
in the future. Robert Hunt agrees with Laura. He thinks you should not
____
your problems, but you should try to solve them. If you cannot talk to an expert like Robert,
you can
____
with your parents,
because they have a lot of
experience.
3
6
4
1
Ask three students the following questions. Take notes of their answers.
Problems with schoolwork
Who you talk to and why
Who you get advice from
Student A
Student B
Student C
2e
1. What problems do you have with schoolwork?
2. Who do you talk to about these problems and why?
3. Who else can you get advice from?
4. Do you always tell your parents about your problems?
Why or why not?
5. Do you ever give advice to your friends about their
problems? What advice do you give?
Some useful structures:
1
. If people have problems, they should try to
keep
them to
themselves
.
keep... to oneself
意为“保守秘密”，如：
One must keep such interests to oneself.
有这类爱好不该让人知道。
We should keep their worries to themselves.
我们应该为他们的忧虑保守秘密。
Language points
keep... to oneself
还可意为“不与人来往；
不交际”，如：
Keep sb at arm’s length: not allow oneself to become too
friendly with sb.
与某人保持距离；不使自己太亲近某人。
2.
Problems and
worries
are normal life
worries
是名词
worry
的复数形式，意为“
令人忧伤的人或事
”；
worry
意为“
烦恼
,
忧愁
,
忧虑
”
,
指因遭遇困难或不如意的事而苦闷，是不可数名词。如：
My chief worry is that he doesn’t have experience.
我的主要忧虑是他没有经验。
Her happiness at seeing him submerged her former worries.
她看到他非常高兴，顿时完全忘记了先前的烦恼。
worry
作及物动词，意为“使担心”；做不及物动词，意为“ 担心”。
worry about / over sth / sb
意为“担心某事
/
某人”。
如：
Your worry is always triggered by some external event or happening.
你总是为一些外因或事情而烦恼。
Don’t worry, he'll be alright.
别担心，他不会有事的。
I did not want to worry my friend.
我没想麻烦我的朋友
。
3.
Her dad said he sometimes made
careless mistakes
himself.
careless
做形容词，意为“粗心的”“不小心的”
,
在句中可用作定语或表语。如：
It was careless of you to leave the door unlocked.
你没锁门，太粗心了。
The careless waiter dropped the dish onto the ground.
那个粗心的侍者把盘子摔到了地上。
mistake
意
为“错误
,
过失
”，可
指没有做对或做得不好的
事物
，
也
可指错误的想法或
见解
，
还
可指“误解”或“误会”。
mistake
后可接介词
短语、动词
不定式、现在分词作定语。接
about
表示“关于
……
的
错误
”
，
接
in
表示“某方面的错误
”。
make
a mistake
表示
“犯错误”
；
by mistake
表示“错误地”。
如：
You’ve
made
several grammatical
mistakes
in the composition.
你的作文中犯了几处语法错误。
Tom must have taken your dictionary
by mistake
.
汤姆一定是弄错了才拿了你的字典。
4.
They
got
her a new wallet and asked her to be
more careful.
get
意为“买”，相当于
buy
，但不如后者正式。如
:
Could you
get
me a ticket, please?
请给我买张票好吗？
I usually
get
vegetables from that supermarket.
我通常从那家超市买蔬菜。
Which newspaper do you
get
?
你订阅什么报纸？
5.
In English, we say that
sharing
a problem is like cutting it in half.
在英语中，我们说与人分担一个烦恼就像把麻烦分成两半。
share
是“分享；分担；共同承担
”
的意思。如：
share a room with
someone
与
某人同住一个房间
share a book
同
看
一本书
share a
taxi
同
坐一辆
出租车
Yes
, I want to share my life
with
you.
是
的，我想和你共享生活。
cut…in half…
“
把
……
切
成两半”“
把
……
一切
为二
”，
cut
意为“切、剪”
in half/ halves
是一种固定
结构，此处
in
表示状态
。如
：
Please
cut the orange in half.
Now
, all the oranges are in half.
6.
So
you’re halfway to
solving a problem just
by
talking to someone about it!
你只要跟人聊聊这个问题，你的问题就解决了一半
。
be
halfway to…
表示“完成了或者做了事情的一部分”
，
其中
to
为介词。如：
we’re
still only halfway to finishing the job.
我们
才仅仅完成了工作的一部分。
句中的
by
在这里表示方式，“通过
……
办法；
使用
……
方式”的意思。如：
A
：
How do you study for a test? B: Well, most of time by going over the notes and
reading the textbook.
Ⅰ.
用括号中所给单词的适当形式填空。
1. You mustn’t be a _________(care) driver.
2. It’s five _______(mile) from my home to school.
3. He is old enough to look after _________(he).
4. She is an _____________(understand) girl, and
everyone likes her.
5. They’re __________(certain) not mine.
careless
miles
himself
understanding
certainly
Exercises
Ⅱ.
根据汉语意思完成下列句子。
1.
如果你有什么问题，你可以从你的父母那里得到建议。
If you have any problems, you may ______ _______
_______ your parents.
2.
老师要求我们交作业。
The teacher _______ ______ _____ hand in our
homework.
3.
最后他成功了。
He succeeded ______ _______ ______
．
get advice from
asked us to
in the end
Ⅲ.
根据句意及汉语提示完成单词。
1. How do you become an ______(
专家
)?
2. This is a _______(
正常的
) phase that we all go through.
3. I was glad he was a sympathetic and _____________
(
善解人意的
) man, and that she liked him.
4. What did you learn from this ______(
错误
)?
5. The accident taught him to be more _______(
小心的
).
expert
normal
understanding
mistake
careful
中考链接
Kitty, you’ll fail the English exam_____ you study hard.
A. because B. when
C. if D. unless
句意“除非你努力学习，否则你会在英语考试中失败。”
D
因为
如果
什么时候
除非
Review the expressions and structures you’ve learnt from the passage.
Homework
Section B 3a-Self Check
To learn to write a passage to solve your friends’ problems in life
To learn to make friends in a proper way.A friend in need is a friend indeed
.
Objectives
1.
有许多担忧
___________________
2.
与某人交谈
___________________
3.
害怕做某事
___________________
4.
最终
____________
5.
生气
___________
将
下列词组或句子翻译成英语。
have a lot of worries
talk to someone
be afraid to do sth.
in the end
be angry
Review
6.
犯一些粗心的错误
_____________________________
7.
分享我的问题
____________________
8.
逃避问题
________________________
9.
将
……
分成两半
_______________
10.
有时候他们在学业上出现问题。
________________________________
_________________________
make some careless mistakes
share my problems
run away from the problems
cut … in half
Sometimes they have problems with their schoolwork.
I don’t have many friends. What do you think I should do? Can you give me some advice?
If you join a sports team, you’ll know many new friends.
Warming up
I think you should try to play games with your classmates.
I think you should join a club.
have no close friends to talk to
have too much homework
eat too much and get fat
feel sleepy in class
List the problems and worries you have in life.
Talk about his/her problems and what she/he should do, using the following patterns:
He/She is…
I think he/she should…
If he/she…, he/she will…
Talk
to someone you know. Find out his/her three biggest worries. Try to think of some solutions to the problems and write them down.
3
a
Problems
Possible solutions
don’t stay up late, buy an alarm clock, ride your bike to go to school
too heavy
eat less junk food and more vegetables, do more exercise
always be late for school
take notes in class, do more exercises, ask the teacher for help
physics is difficult
My friend _______ has a problem.
He / She
___________________________.
I
think
he/she
should
_________________.
If
he/she____________________________,
he/she will __________________________.
Write about your friend’s first problem and the possible solutions. Use the structures below to help you plan your writing.
3b
分析
3b
中的作文提纲，可以看出
。写
三个方面的内容就能轻松完成一篇小作文。
首先
，写清楚朋友的名字及其现在存在的问题或困难。
然后
，写出自己给他的建议。并用
if
从句来进一步
说
明
自
己的建
议将会起到的作用。
最后
，复读一遍作文来检查有没有错误。
指 导
My friend
Jenny
has a problem. She
is too heavy
. I think
she should eat less junk food and eat more vegetables and fruit
. I think
she also should get more exercise
. If she
eats more vegetables and fruit,
she will
eat less junk food
. If she
gets more exercise
, she’ll
be much thinner soon.
Possible version
My friend also has two other problems. __________________________________
__________________________________
__________________________________
__________________________________
Now write your advice for your friend’s second and third problems. Use the structures in 3b to help you.
3c
…
.She is always late for school. I think she shouldn’t stay up late on weekdays. She should get an alarm clock. She should rides her bike to school. If she has an alarm clock, she will get up early.
Possible version
If she rides her bike to school, it will
cost
her less time to get to school. She thinks physics is too difficult for her. I think she should take notes in class. She should also do more exercises. She should ask the teacher for help after class.
Your school is taking part in the project “We Can Help!” Add more items to the poster. Then talk about what you will do if you take part in the project.
We Can Help!
old people’s home visit
school clean-up children’s hospital visit
_____________________
_____________________
A: What will you do if
you visit an old
people’s home?
B: If I do that, I’ll
bring
the
old
people
some
flowers
.
4
What will you do if you visit an old people’s home?
If I do that, I’ll bring the old people some flowers.
If I do that, I’ll sing and dance for them to make them happy.
If
意为如果，表示条件，
if
引导的句子是
从句
，用
现在时
态
，主句则用将来时态。
也就是
所谓的“
主将从现
”
。
如：
If you eat less, you will be thinner.
If you work hard, you will be successful.
If you come to school late, your teacher will
be
angry
with
you
.
复习：
if
句型
拓展：
1.
主情从现，主祈从现
eg:If you
find
the lost pet,
please call
me.
You can go to the movie if you
finish
your
homework.
拓展：
2.unless “
如果不，除非
”
（
if...not
）
eg:
Unless
we work hard,we can't pass the exam.
=
If
we
don't
work hard,we can't pass the exam.
meeting teenagers video experience
1. If
my family travels to a new country this summer, I’ll
send you
a letter about
my __________.
2. Will you watch the ______with me if you are free this
weekend
?
3
. If
the __________ stay out too late, their parents will
worry
about them.
4. I’ll go to
the ________
if it ends by
5:00 p.m
.
experience
video
teenagers
meeting
Self Check
I. Fill in the
blanks with the words in the box.
II.Complete
the conversation with the words in the box.
if
are
will flight want sorry going
A: Hi, Sally. ____ you ____ to the party tomorrow?
B: I _____ to, but I can’t.
A:
Oh!
But _____ you don’t go to the party, you
_____
miss all the fun!
B: I know, but I got into a _____ with my parents.
A: Hmm… then you should just say _____ to your
parents
.
B: I guess you’re right. I _____ talk to them
tonight
.
Are
going
want
if
will
flight
sorry
will
III. Use your information! What will you do if …
1. It
rains all weekend?
2.
There’s
an English test tomorrow?
3.
Your
cousin decides to come and visit
from
another town
?
I will stay at home.
I will work hard / go to bed early tonight.
I will
…
If I eat too much lunch, _______________.
If I am a good cook,
_____________________________.
If I watch too much TV,
_______________________.
If I don’t help others, ______________________.
I will feel sick
I’ll cook delicious food for you
I won’t have enough sleep
others won’t help me
Complete the sentences using your own ideas.
Ⅰ.
选择选项，完成对话。
a. You should stay at
home. b
. Good idea
!
c. I will have a great time.
d
. I will be bored.
e. I can go swimming with you.
A:
I think I’m going to play
basketball
.
B:
If you do, you will be
uncomfortable
. Look
at
the
sun
,
it’s
too hot. _____
A:
If I stay at home, _____
B:
Maybe you can go
swimming in
the lake.
A:
______ If I do, _______
B:
That’s right. ______
a
d
b
c
e
Exercises
Ⅱ.
发挥想象力，补全句子。
1. If it rains all weekend,
_________________________________.
2. If there’s an English test tomorrow,
________________________________.
3. If my cousin decides to come and visit from another town,
________________________________________.
I
will watch TV
at
home
I will get nervous/prepare for the test
I
will buy a gift for him/ buy something delicious
1. Copy
and recite the new words & grammar focus.
2.
模仿
编五
个对话。
I
think I’ll do ____________.
If
you do, you’ll ____________.
Homework
相关文档
- 仁爱湘教版本初中英语八年级上册单2021-10-129页
- 外研版英语八年级上册Module 10课2021-10-126页
- 初中英语八年级上册Unit6I’课件 2021-10-1210页
- 人民教育出Goforit初中英语八年级2021-10-125页
- 仁爱版英语八年级上册Unit 3 单元2021-10-123页
- 仁爱版英语八年级上册Unit 1（Sestio2021-10-123页
- 新目标英语八年级上Unit5Doyouwant2021-10-128页
- 外研版英语八年级上册Module1 Uni2021-10-125页
- 人教版新目标英语八年级上册Unit9W2021-10-1227页
- 人教版英语八年级上册Unit3Iammore2021-10-12163页
微信/支付宝扫码支付下载